Blog

Correct Use of the Word To – Most people when writing would often use the word to.
However, not a few also feel confused about how to use the word ke which is good and right.
The word ke is basically a type of preposition or also known as a preposition.

Apart from the use of the word ke-, there are several other prepositions that often cause confusion, for
example the words from, in, to or even. Many people get confused on the part of connecting or
separating with the next word.

So, for those of you who often write scientific papers or for the need to fulfill college assignments or
other matters, this article provides various explanations about how to use the word ke according to
Indonesian language rules. Let’s see more!

A. Getting to Know the Third Word

As previously stated, the word ke is included in one type of preposition or it can also be called a
proposition. These prepositions or prepositions themselves must be in accordance with the rules
of the Indonesian language that are currently in effect, namely the General Guidelines for Indonesian
Spelling or can be abbreviated as PUEBI or EBI.

Prepositions can basically be understood as a word that is in front of another word or the next word.
The preposition itself is often written or paired before the use of verbs, nouns, and even other
adverbs. Therefore, the actual use of prepositions must be adapted to the rules that apply.
This is done so as not to change the meaning of the word.

In addition, the addition of prepositions or prepositions before a sentence is used to clarify the meaning
of a word. This of course will be very useful to clarify the meaning of a sentence.
However, not all nouns, verbs, and other adverbs can or are suitable for prepositions.
However, prepositions can function as affixes and as pointers.

B. How to Use the Word Ke- Correctly

After knowing the meaning of the use of the word ke, in this section we will discuss four ways to use the word ke
in accordance with applicable Indonesian language rules.

However, before that, so that you can more easily understand how to use the correct word.
There are two important things that need to be considered first, including the following:

1. What is the word that
precedes (the word in front of the preposition – preposition)

The first important thing to note is knowing the form of the word that is in front of the preposition or
preposition to be added. If the word has the property to show a name, place or time.
Then the added to word can be used separately. However, if the word before the
preposition does not indicate a place or time, then the word added must be continued.

2. What is the meaning of the marked

The second thing that is no less important is knowing which preposition is used to mark which word.
For example, the word ke is used to mark the position or whereabouts of something or someone.
Then the word ke can be used in a sentence by being separated.

C. The Function of Using the Word

In this section, of course you have started to understand how to use the word ke correctly according to
Indonesian language rules or Indonesian spelling. Basically, the use of the word to be
separated or connected can be adapted to its function in a word or sentence. So, here are three
functions that you need to pay attention to when using the word in a sentence, including:

1. As a Prefix

The function of using the first word is as a prefix or affix. This function is known according
to the type of affixed preposition, which has a form that can be used as an affix to other words.
Therefore, writing the preposition to as a prefix or affix can be used by connecting.

In addition, there are several forms of words that do not only use affixes in the form of the prefix to-,
but also add endings, such as the word -an. This finally forms the word getting the affix.
There are many forms of words that can get these affixes and endings by writing in
conjunction.

There are many examples of words that have prefixes and endings -an, for example, togetherness, ability, beauty,
beauty, and so on.

The following are some examples of using the word in a sentence as a prefix, namely:

• The beauty of Mount Semeru never fades with time.
• Everyone has the ability to survive, so the test will be easy to pass.
• Togetherness in the family is the most important.

2. As a Preposition or Preposition

The function of using the second word is as a preposition or preposition. If the preposition
in a sentence has a preposition function, then automatically the use of the word to must be separated.
The preposition itself is included in the basic word category so that it can be used separately
from the word in front of it.

As a word that has the function of a preposition or preposition, the word ke is often used before or before
an adverb of place. Every word ke- becomes a preposition of a word that has a function as an
adverb of place, so writing the word ke can be used separately.

For example, like, forwards, backwards, to Jakarta, to Bandung, to Singapore, and so on. You
only need to understand and remember one function as a preposition, then you can write the word well and
correctly. This is because besides having a function as a placeholder description, the writing
is continued.

The following are some examples of using the word ke in a sentence separately, including:

• Deciding to have a vacation to Bali, Andin chose to book plane tickets from now on.
• Yesterday my brother went to the city by motorbike.
• Next Tuesday, my younger brother and father are asked to come to school to pick up a report card.

3. As a Number or Sequence Pointer

The following function differs from the previous two functions, in this function the word ke can be used as
a pointer to a number or sequence. You must have come across the word ke followed by a number
or used as a numbering sequence. This provision itself is ultimately divided into two,
namely:

a. Numbers are letters, that is, each word can be accompanied by a number, but only in
letters. When you find a form of writing a word with numbers, you can use it connected.
For example, the word second, third, fourth, fifth, and so on. Basically, numbers or
number sequences written in letters can be written in a connected way.

b. It is a number, i.e. every word followed by an Arabic numeral in a sentence.
Then the word ke can be written using a dash (-) before writing the Arabic numeral.
For example, namely the word 7th, 3rd, 10th, and so on.

The following are some examples of writing the word ke as a pointer to a number or sequence in a sentence,
including:

• Mr. Joko Widodo is the 7th President of Indonesia.
• In the 14th century Islamic teachings began to enter Indonesia.

However, there is one more thing that you need to pay attention to when using the word to. If
a word is followed by a number with a letter that has the meaning of two things, three things, three places,
and so on. So, the number that is located in front of the word no longer has a function as a
sequence, but as a word that has a real number meaning.

Examples of the use of the word to a word that has an actual number meaning, namely:

• Brother went to two places at once today.
• Dad visited three hospitals a week on his assignment.

D. Types of Prepositions

These types of prepositions are basically very diverse, ranging from very complex additions to complete the
form of a word and sentence. Broadly speaking, the following are several types of prepositions
that you need to pay attention to, including:

1. Basic Words

The first type of preposition or preposition is the base word. The basic word itself can be
understood as a type of preposition which has a very basic form and can stand alone. Known root
words do not need to be used as an affix that blends with other words. Some basic words,
including: from, in, with, to, by, on, since, like, as well as, and so on.

2. Affixed Words

The second type of prepositions or prepositions are affixes. This affixed word can be
interpreted as a word that has a function as an affix of other types of words. Affixed words
can also be affixes to verbs that form sentences, both active and passive sentences.
Prepositions that have a role as affixes can be combined with the word in front of them.

The use of affixed prepositions is then always put together. This makes each word have a clear
meaning so that it is easily understood by anyone. Several forms of prepositions that fall into
the category of affixed prepositions include during, throughout, towards, regarding, together with, towards,
aimed at, and so on.

3. Compound Words

The third type of prepositions are compound words or commonly known as compound prepositions.
The compound word itself is a type of preposition which is used in combination with other
prepositions. The first preposition will usually be separated by clauses and continued with the
next preposition.

Therefore, in one sentence you will find two prepositions at once. In addition, these two
prepositions have the same meaning or reinforce each other. Some examples of prepositions that
are included in compound words include, therefore, because of that, between…with, since…up to, to, and so
on.

The three types of prepositions above have very varied writing rules. Variations of this rule
include writing that is combined or connected with the word before it. Meanwhile, writing that
needs or must be separated by the word in front of it.

There are still many people who don’t really care about food packaging. Whereas packaging plays an important role in determining whether the food consumed is safe or not, especially processed food. If food is packaged with plastic or materials that contain poison, it is not impossible that the toxin content can contaminate the food and then enter your body. This is because all types of plastic are made from petroleum with a mixture of various toxic chemicals. For example, Bisphenol A (BPA) which causes body disorders such as infertility or decreased fertility, Polystyrene (PS) which is carcinogenic and triggers cancer.

In addition there are also other materials such as PVC (Poly Vinyl Chlorida) which is very harmful to the health of the body. Therefore, when plastic is exposed to high temperatures, the substances contained in the plastic can release various chemicals. BPA will also damage the function of hormones in the body, especially the hormone estrogen, impaired immune system, accelerated puberty, obesity, is a risk factor for diabetes, and hyperactive behavior.

If consumed, the chemical content will then enter the body’s tissues. The factor that causes the easy transfer of these chemicals is due to the weak bonding of the plastic structure, which is the result of residual plastic monomers. The migration of remaining plastic monomers is greater if the packaged food contains high temperatures, such as meatball sauce, fried foods, high-fat foods, or foods that contain high levels of acid. In addition, the transfer of chemicals into food is also affected by the duration of food contact with plastic. So, when food with high temperatures is left in the plastic for too long, the contact with the remaining plastic monomers also increases.

Phthalates, like BPA, can also interfere with hormone function, in this case, the hormone testosterone. In experiments conducted using test animals, certain amounts of phthalates are thought to inhibit the function of testosterone in the body, thereby affecting the male reproductive organs and other organs. High levels of phthalates in the body have even been linked to lower sperm production and quality in adult men. The effect of this component can also be seen in pregnant women. Phthalates increase the risk of minor reproductive organ disorders in boys. Apart from these two materials, you also need to be careful with other materials such as polyvinyl chloride (PVC). In certain amounts, PVC is believed to increase the risk of cancer, birth defects, digestive disorders to impaired liver function.

Wrapping Hot Food Using Plastic Can Trigger Breast Cancer. Quoted from World of Buzz, according to Oriental Daily, the Ministry of Health and Welfare in Taiwan said in 2014, breast cancer is a disease that has the highest number of patients. There are more than 10,000 breast cancer patients in one year alone. Zheng, director of the breast cancer center at Memorial Shin Kong Wu Ho-Su Hospital, said Taiwanese generally suffer from breast cancer after menopause or before the age of 40. For those who have had breast cancer before the age of 40, one reason may be the habit of buying hot food to go in plastic bags or thin containers.

The heat from the food in the plastic bag can cause the release of harmful chemicals which are absorbed by the food and consumed by them. One of the chemicals present in plastic and harmful to the body is Bisphenol A (BPA) with a weak synthetic estrogen which can interfere with the body’s hormones and make breast cancer cells develop and grow at certain levels of exposure. In the West, breast cancer usually occurs after menopause but in Taiwan, women aged under 35 years, about 6-9 percent are breast cancer patients. Based on the explanation described above, that’s why it’s very important to minimize the use of plastic in everyday life. Here’s a way that you can apply at You’ house:

ALWAYS LOOK AT THE LABEL SIGNS ON THE PLASTIC

Avoid using plastic containers labeled with numbers 3, 6 and 7. Number 3 indicates PVC material which stimulates the growth of cancer cells (carcinogens). Code or number 3 releases poison in food and drink. The risk will be higher if the packaging is washed, heated, or cooled. While the number 6 is plastic packaging made from PS, or commonly known as styrofoam. This packaging will release poison when heated. Third Plastic packaging numbered 7 (Other). Found in baby bottles, drinking water bottles and other packaging. Number 7 contains Bisphenol A. This substance has an effect on changes in nerve performance and behavior, as well as puberty that occurs earlier. Also understand the contents of the following other types of plastic, You:

• Type 1: Polyethylene teraphthalate (PET): These plastic containers are usually marked with the symbol PET, which means they can only be used once. Although it does not contain BPA or phthalates, this type contains antimony which may be carcinogenic (cancer-causing) in humans. This type of plastic container is usually found in juice bottles or jam jars.
• Type 2: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) These plastic containers, usually given the symbol HDPE, are safe and contain high-density polyethylene which makes for a relatively stiff plastic. This type of plastic container is usually found in milk bottles.
• Type 3: Polyvinyl chloride (V) These plastic containers, usually marked with the symbol V, contain phthalates. Usually found in fruit juice bottles, cooking oil bottles and food packaging that looks clear, flexible and relatively stiff.
• Type 4: Low density polyethylene (LDPE) These plastic containers are usually marked with the symbol LDPE and are commonly found on food or seasoning containers that are easy to squeeze and resistant to solvents.
• Type 5: Polypropylene (PP) These plastic containers are usually given the symbol PP and are commonly found on yogurt, beverage bottles, and ketchup containers because polypropylene does not leach its chemicals into food or liquids.
• Type 7: Polycarbonate (PC) This plastic container is usually marked with the symbol PC or Other and is found in gallon bottles of water. This plastic container contains BPA, avoid using this container repeatedly You.

KNOW SAFE PLASTIC PACKAGING

Factors that affect the amount of migration from packaging to food include the concentration of migrants; bond strength or mobility of chemicals in the packaging; packaging thickness; the nature of the food in contact with the packaging (dry, watery, fatty, sour, alcoholic); solubility of chemicals in food; contact time and temperature. Several types of plastic that are relatively safe to use as food packaging are PP, HDPE, LDPE, and PET. Packaging security can be recognized by the logo or writing on it, for example, the words ‘safe for food’ or for food use or food grade. In general, plastic packaging should not be used for food that is acidic, contains fat or oil, especially when it is hot. (Ir Ingrid S Surono, MSc, PhD).

CHANGE PLASTIC AND OTHER MATERIALS

When buying food from somewhere, it’s best to bring your own glass or metal container. Especially for soup or soup, use a basket. If using plastic containers, you should avoid those that contain hazardous materials such as BPA. Apart from reducing plastic waste, this is also useful for avoiding the dangers of using plastic in hot food. If not, make sure that the plastic packaging used by the restaurant is heat-resistant and safe for food use. Also pay attention to the expiration date of the food and do not consume it if the expiration date has passed the limit, as well as if there are irregularities in taste or aroma and appearance in food or drink even though the expiration date has not been passed. If you want to heat food in a microwave oven, use solid containers. If you want to choose flexible (flexible) plastic for food cover, choose one that says polyethylene on the label. Containers or packages for cold food or drinks, for example for ice cream, and the like, should not be used for hot food or drinks. Because these plastic containers are only suitable for cold (low temperature) food and drinks. Also, do not heat food, for example steaming vegetables, using a plastic container in You.

HEAT FOOD PROPERLY

Avoid covering food with plastic made of PVC or PS when heating in the microwave, use a type of food grade packaging specifically used for microwave ovens. Instead, you can use a paper towel. You are also advised not to store fatty foods in plastic containers. Transfer food onto a glass plate before reheating. Besides plastic, be careful about melamine as a type of resin—which is a type of hard plastic that is usually used to make bowls, plates, glasses and cutlery for children. Melamine is indeed a substance that is toxic to the human body, especially to the kidneys. Do you still remember the case of powdered milk in China which was mixed with melamine to increase the “protein” content in the milk? The case claimed the lives of 6 babies and 50 thousand other babies had to be hospitalized. If melamine containers are used to heat food with a microwave, it is feared that the melamine components can come out and contaminate the food that you will eat, You. Avoid heating these foods in the Microwave:

• Potatoes: Can cause poisoning if heated in the microwave and left at room temperature, because it will grow the botulism bacteria that causes botulism.
• Chicken: After cooking the chicken to perfection, it’s actually fine to reheat the chicken in the microwave. But it is not recommended to cook chicken in the microwave, because it will only cook on the outside, the inside is not guaranteed to be perfectly cooked. Chicken that is not perfectly cooked can harbor bacteria, such as salmonella bacteria.
• Rice: According to the Food Standards Agency, reheating rice can cause food poisoning, due to the presence of a rogue bacteria called Bacillus cereus. Heat can kill these bacteria, but it can leave spores that are toxic to the body. What’s worse, these spores are heat resistant, aka they can’t be killed even if they’ve been heated in a microwave
• Mushrooms: A type of vegetable that should not be heated, because it can cause stomach upset. Bacteria can also grow if left at room temperature. So mushrooms should be eaten immediately after serving You.
• Greasy Foods: All oils can withstand various levels of heat. But if the heat level continues to increase, toxins and harmful substances called free radicals can form. According to Live Strong, these free radicals can trigger cancer. So avoid heating greasy food in the microwave, because the oil can get too hot and form free radicals.
• Green Vegetables If you want to warm celery, kale, or spinach, it’s best to warm it on a normal stove, not the microwave. When green vegetables are heated in the microwave, natural nitrates will turn into nitrosamines, which are carcinogenic and very harmful to the body.

AVOID PLASTIC WRAPPED FOOD CONSUMPTION

Now you can find many food vendors using plastic as a wrapper, such as lontong which no longer uses banana leaves or coconut leaves. Even though the majority of circulating plastics are not safe for wrapping hot food, let alone used for cooking or processing food. Moreover, using plastic to cook food such as rice cake, where the boiling process uses high temperatures. The plastic used to wrap high-temperature or oily food can contaminate food with dioxins and toxic substances from the addictive ingredients that form plastic.

Plastic lon also contains polymer chemicals. This polymer can enter the human body because it is soluble, so if it accumulates in the body it will cause cancer. Apart from cancer, the polymer content in lontong wrapped in plastic can potentially reduce reproductive fertility, and can even cause infertility. Also be careful with food wrapped in plastic, according to health experts, if the plastic is exposed to high temperatures, then it is feared that there will be compounds that decompose and eventually mix in the vegetables or side dishes that we buy. The problem is, often the plastic material used to wrap food is not of the food grade type, but ordinary plastic which may contain dangerous chemical compounds such as phthalate, bisphenol A (BPA), and adipate.

In a study, it was stated that the chemicals in plastic could actually trigger damage to various internal organs such as the liver, kidneys, lungs, or even the body’s reproductive system. Meanwhile, the phthalate content is said to be able to make men experience infertility disorders. Anyone is vulnerable to the adverse effects of exposure to the chemicals in this plastic, it’s just that, for children and pregnant women, the impact will be much more pronounced. Seeing this fact, it would be better if we ask food vendors to wrap cooked vegetables or side dishes with food wrapping paper or we can bring our own food containers which are classified as food grade or safe to use.

BRING YOUR OWN CONTAINER

Basically there are only two types of plastic that are safe for use in cooking food, namely polypropylene (PP) which is resistant to high temperatures up to 150°C, and nylon or polyamide (PA) type plastic which is resistant to high temperatures and is good for packaging materials. cooked in packs. On average, plastic is not safe to use as food wrapper, nor can it be used haphazardly for food, especially those that are oily and have hot temperatures.

Compound is a chemical substance. Where compounds can be formed due to natural processes.
But there are also those that are deliberately made for the benefit of humans. A
compound is a single substance that can be broken down into several elements. In general,
compounds have various kinds of elements chemically combined with each other. Thus, the symbol
for a compound consists of several symbol elements.

In addition, a compound is a substance consisting of two or more elements, where these elements are
chemically combined to form a new substance whose properties are different from the constituent elements.
These elements will lose their properties and appear with their new properties according to the
properties of the compounds formed.

A compound will be denoted by a chemical formula. Where the chemical formula in a compound
will state the composition, number, and also the types of atoms in a compound. Examples of
compounds are water (H2O), table salt (NaCl), carbon dioxide (CO2), potassium hydroxide (KOH), and barium
hydroxide (Ba(OH)2).

Definition of Compound

A compound is a single substance that can be broken down into two or more elements. In
addition, compounds also have several elements that are chemically combined with each other. So
generally the symbol of a compound will be drawn from several symbols of elements. An analysis
that finds the constituent elements of a compound is generally referred to as qualitative analysis.
Meanwhile, if the analysis finds a comparison of each number of elements present in the compound,
it is called quantitative analysis.

Compound Features

The following are some of the characteristics of chemical compounds, including:

a. Formed from two or more elements arranged using ordinary chemical
reactions.
b. Has a fixed composition
ratio.
c. Loses the properties of the original substance when
it becomes a compound.
d. Can be broken down chemically, but
not physically.

Compound Properties

Each compound has different properties from its constituent elements. Compounds can only be
broken down into their constituent elements by a chemical reaction. Under the same conditions,
compounds can have different forms from their constituent elements.

Physical properties and also chemical compounds are two things that are different from the elements that
form them. For example, the chemical reaction of two hydrogen atoms (2H) and one oxygen atom
(O) can form a water molecule (H2O). In simple terms, compounds have five properties that we
can distinguish between one compound and another. Among them are:

a. Compounds can be formed through chemical reaction processes
b.
The constituent components in the compound have a certain ratio that has a fixed
nature
c. The compound itself cannot be separated from its
constituent components again by using a chemical reaction
d.
Compounds can be categorized as single substance compounds
e.
Compounds have certain properties that differ from the elements that make them up

Various Compounds

Based on its origin, compounds are divided into two, namely organic compounds and inorganic compounds.
Here is a full explanation:

1. Organic Compounds

An organic compound is defined as a compound composed of the element carbon as its main framework, which
binds non-metallic elements such as oxygen, hydrogen and nitrogen. These compounds usually come
from living things or are formed from living organisms. This one compound is very easy to find,
such as urea or urea in urine or urine. Then the sugar or sucrose in the cane and also the
alcohol is the result of fermentation of the sugar solution.

Another definition of an organic compound is a compound containing carbon and hydrogen along with other
elements such as nitrogen and oxygen. CO, CO2 and O2 are not organic compounds, because they do
not contain hydrogen atoms.

Hydrocarbons are organic compounds that contain only carbon and hydrogen. Where we encounter
many hydrocarbon compounds in nature and also in living things. Starting from fuel to molecules
that originate and are found in living things such as proteins, carbohydrates, fats, amino acids, and so
on.

a. Alkane Compounds

Alkanes are the simplest hydrocarbons because they only contain single bonds between carbons and are also
the least reactive. Even so, commercially alkanes are needed. This is because
alkanes are compounds that are present in lubricants and gasoline.

The main characteristic that exists in alkanes and distinguishes them from other carbon-hydrogen compounds
is that alkanes are saturated. Because it has saturated properties, alkane compounds do not
contain double bonds between carbon atoms. Compounds that have double bonds will usually be
very reactive.

For the energy that is in the carbon-carbon bonds and also in the carbon-hydrogen bonds in alkanes is quite
large. When alkanes are burned, the compound will release a large amount of heat, especially in
the form of fire. Where the simplest alkane is methane.

Examples of Alkanes

The following are two examples of alkane compounds that need to be understood:

1. Methane

Methane or CH4 is the simplest hydrocarbon. Where this one alkane compound is in the form of a
gas at standard temperature and pressure conditions or STP.

2. Ethane

Two single bonded carbon atoms are usually supplemented by six hydrogens which is called ethane.
Ethane is the second simplest hydrocarbon molecule. Methane itself can be thought of
as two methane molecules bonded to each other, but with a halved hydrogen atom.

b. Alkenes and Alkynes

The nomenclature of alkenes and alkynes is actually almost the same as alkanes, but only changing the
ending -ane to -ene. The following are examples of alkenes:

C2H4 is called ethylene.
C3H6 is called propene.

While alkyne compounds use the ending -una. The following are examples of alkyne
compounds:

C2H2 is ethyne.
C3H4 is a propane.

As for the nomenclature of compounds containing more carbon atoms such as alkenes and alkynes, it is
necessary to understand the position of the double bond. The position of the alkene and alkyne
double bonds is in the carbon atom with the smallest serial number.

Describe Alkanes

When writing alkane structures, you can use different writing models according to your needs.
The general formula for alkanes is CnH2n+2. Here are four different examples of
writing pentane:

2. Inorganic Compounds

Inorganic compounds are compounds that are not composed of carbon atoms. Usually these
compounds are found in nature. Some examples of this compound are table salt or sodium chloride
with the symbol NaCI, aluminum hydroxide, which is usually found in ulcer medicines, has the symbol AI(OH)3.
Likewise with the gases that are in the respiration process, namely oxygen gas with the symbol O2
and also carbon dioxide gas with the symbol CO2. Acid is also one of the inorganic compounds
that we are easily familiar with, for example nitric acid (HNO3), hydrochloric acid (HCl), and so on.

Inorganic compounds are compounds composed primarily of metal atoms, which is what we see in many
non-living substances. For example, rocks, soil, water, and so forth. Meanwhile,
inorganic compounds can be classified as acid-base oxide compounds and also salt forms, the following is a
chart that describes the compounds:

Oxide compounds are compounds formed by oxygen atoms with other atoms. The presence of oxygen
atoms as a characteristic of oxide compounds. If based on the elements that form oxide
compounds, these compounds can be divided into two types, namely metal oxide compounds and non-metallic
oxide compounds. The classification can be simplified in the following chart:

Broadly speaking, the main reasons for separating the fields of study of organic compounds and inorganic
compounds are:

a. The number of organic compounds is more than the inorganic
compounds.
b. All organic compounds contain carbon atoms which are unique
in terms of their ability to form chains with fellow carbon atoms and have distinctive
properties.

Differences between Organic Compounds and
Inorganic Compounds

a. Organic Compounds

– The majority comes from living things and some comes from synthesis
– Organic compounds are more
flammable
– The structure of organic compounds is more complicated
– All
organic compounds contain the element carbon
– Can only dissolve in organic
solvents
– CH4, C2H5OH, C2H6 and so on

b. Inorganic Compounds

– Derived from mineral natural resources, not living things
– Non-flammable
– Inorganic
compounds have a simple structure
– Not all inorganic compounds have the element
carbon
– Can dissolve in water or organic solvents
– NaF, NaCl, NaBr, NaI
and so on

isometry

The molecular formula is a substance that only shows the number and types of atoms present.
While the structural formula will explain how the atoms are arranged. For example, H2O
is the molecular formula for water. Where each water molecule is composed of two hydrogen atoms
and also one oxygen atom.

The structural formula is H – O – H

The origin of the term isomer is from the Latin “isos” which means the same and “methos” means part.
Thus, structural isomers are compounds that have the same molecular formula but different
structural formulas.

For example: For the formula C2H6O

Structural Formula:

In the first formula, the two carbons are linked by a single covalent bond. While in the
second formula, carbon is associated with oxygen. To understand which arrangement belongs to a
liquid and which is a gas, that is by means of a simple chemical test. Where liquid C2H6O or
ethyl alcohol/ethanol reacts with sodium metal to produce hydrogen gas and a new compound C2H5Ona.
Meanwhile C2H6O gas or dimethyl ether will not react with sodium metal. Both are
structural isomers which have the same structural formula but differ in structure.

The Role of Organic Chemistry in Everyday
Life

Organic chemistry has many roles in everyday life through other branches of science. Almost
the same as reactions in living bodies involving organic substances and also the main ingredients of these
bodies, namely carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, nucleic acids, cell membranes, enzymes, and hormones are
organic compounds.

Organic compounds that we can see in everyday life are gasoline, wood furniture, clothing, paper for books,
medicines, plastic packages, film for photographs, carpets, perfumes, and so on. Often, we also
hear news such as epoxy, polyethylene, styrofoam, unsaturated fats, nicotine, cholesterol, and octane
number. Those are examples of organic compounds that have quite an important role in everyday
life.

Where the compounds mentioned above have meaning in meeting human needs and also as one of the real
evidence of the existing compound forms. The following are some forms of organic
compounds:

a. methanol

Methanol can be converted to methanol which is used to make polymers or plastics as a solvent to make organic
compounds.

b. Ethanol

Ethanol is an ordinary alcohol which belongs to the most important alcohols. At room
temperature, ethanol is a clear liquid, evaporates easily and has a characteristic odor.

Writing Structural Formulas

In writing the structural formula, to learn more about organic chemistry can be done in several ways, for
example, with the molecular formula C5H12

a. Formula Chain (CCCCC)

Straight chains usually use one valence for each carbon at the end to the next carbon in the middle of the
chain. Therefore, every carbon that has a trivalent side serves to bond hydrogen.

Structural Formula Abbreviation

To make it easier for us to write the structural formula, it can be done in an abbreviated way without
reducing the meaning of the formula itself. For example, the structural formulas for ethyl
alcohol, where each formula clearly distinguishes ethyl alcohol from dimethyl ether, can be represented by
one of the following structures:

Physical Characteristics of the Planet Venus – Venus is the second closest planet to the Sun after Mercury. This planet orbits the Sun for 224.7 Earth days. Venus has no natural satellites and is named after the Roman goddess of love and beauty. After the Moon, it is the brightest natural object in the night sky, with an apparent magnitude of −4.6 which is bright enough to cast shadows.

Venus is an inferior planet with an elongation angle of 47.8°. The maximum brightness of this planet can be seen immediately before sunrise or after sunset, so it is called the Morning Star or Evening Star.

Venus is a terrestrial planet and is sometimes called Earth’s “sister planet” because of its similar size, gravity, and composition (Venus is the closest planet to Earth and the planet closest in size to Earth). However, in other respects this planet is very different from Earth.

This planet has the densest atmosphere of the four terrestrial planets consisting of 96% carbon dioxide. Venus’s surface atmospheric pressure is 92 times greater than Earth’s. With an average surface temperature of 735 K (462 °C; 863 °F), Venus is the hottest planet in the Solar System. The planet has no carbon cycle that traps carbon in rocks and surface features, and no organic life that can sequester carbon in the form of biomass.

Venus is shrouded in an opaque layer of highly reflective clouds of sulfuric acid, so its surface cannot be seen from space. Venus may have had oceans, but those oceans are evaporating due to increasing temperatures caused by the continuous greenhouse effect. Much of the water may have been photodissociated, and the solar wind may have allowed free hydrogen to escape into space as a result of the lack of an internal magnetic field on Venus. The surface of Venus itself is deserted, dry, and punctuated by rock that is periodically renewed by volcanic activity.

Physical Characteristics of the Planet Venus

Venus is one of the four terrestrial planets in the Solar System, which means that it is a rocky planet like Earth. Its size and mass are similar to Earth, so this planet is often referred to as Earth’s “sister” or “twin”.

The diameter of Venus is recorded at 12,092 km (only 650 km smaller than Earth) and its mass is approximately 81.5% of Earth’s mass. However, conditions on the surface of Venus are very different from those on Earth, and this is due to Venus’ thick atmosphere which is composed of 96.5% carbon dioxide and 3.5% nitrogen.

The following are the physical characteristics of the planet Venus that distinguish it from other planets.

1. Topography

There has been much speculation about the surface of Venus before it was discovered by space probes in the 20th century. The planet was mapped in detail by Project Magellan in 1990-1991. On the surface there is evidence of volcanic activity, and sulfur in the atmosphere indicates that a volcanic eruption has occurred.

The first physical characteristics of Venus, namely that about 80% of the surface of Venus consists of volcanic land, with 70% is land with wrinkled ridges and 10% is land that is smooth and indented. The remaining 20% ​​are the two upland “continents”; one of the continents is located in the northern hemisphere of Venus, while the other is south of the equator.

The northern continent was called Ishtar Terra, named after Ishtar, the Babylonian goddess of love, and about the size of Australia. The highest mountain on Venus (namely Maxwell Montes) is located on Ishtar Terra. It is approximately 11 km above the average surface elevation of Venus. Meanwhile, the southern continent is nicknamed Aphrodite Terra, after the goddess of love in Greek mythology, and this continent is larger with a size more or less comparable to South America. This continent is filled with a series of faults and faults.

The absence of lava flows in the caldera is still a puzzle. The planet does not have many impact impact craters, indicating that the surface is relatively young, approximately 300–600 million years old. In addition to impact craters, mountains and valleys, Venus also has a unique surface feature. One of them is a volcanic appearance with a flat top, which is called “farra”. They are similar in shape to a pancake and vary in width from 20–50 km, while their height is usually in the 100–1,000 m range.

There are also series of star-shaped radial fractures called “novae”, concentric radial fractures that resemble cobwebs called “arachnoids”, and rings of fractures which are sometimes surrounded by depressions called “coronae”. These features are formed volcanically.

Most of the surface features on Venus are named after women in mythology and history, except for Maxwell Montes which is named after James Clerk Maxwell and the upland regions Alpha Regio, Beta Regio, and Ovda Regio which were named before the current system was adopted by the International Astronomical Union.

The longitudes of surface features on Venus are expressed relative to the prime meridian. The prime meridian initially passes through the bright spot in the center of the Eve feature which is south of the Alpha Region. After Venera’s mission was completed, the prime meridian was determined to pass through the peak in the center of the Ariadne crater.

2. Surface Geology

A second feature of Venus is that most of its surface appears to have been formed through volcanic activity. There are more volcanoes on Venus than Earth, with 167 large volcanoes that can be up to 100 km wide. The only volcanic complex on Earth this size is the Big Island of Hawaii. That doesn’t mean that Venus is more volcanically active than Earth; it is caused by Venus’ older crust.

In comparison, the surface of Venus is estimated to be 300–600 million years old, while on Earth, oceanic crust is continuously recycled through subduction processes at boundaries between tectonic plates, so the average age is around 100 million years. Some evidence points to ongoing volcanic activity on Venus. During the course of the Venera program launched by the Soviet Union, the Venera 11 and Venera 12 probes encountered lightning, and Venera 12 recorded the thunder as it landed.

Venus Express launched by the European Space Agency also found lightning in the atmosphere. While lightning on Earth is caused by rain, there is no rain on the planet Venus (although sulfuric acid descends from the atmosphere, and then evaporates at an altitude of 25 km above the surface). It is possible that the lightning was produced by ash from a volcanic eruption.

Other evidence comes from measurements of sulfur dioxide levels in the atmosphere, which decreased tenfold between 1978 and 1986. This suggests that the initial sulfur dioxide levels were boosted by large volcanic eruptions. Nearly a thousand impact craters are evenly distributed across the surface of Venus. On other cratered celestial bodies, such as the Earth and Moon, the craters appear to be degraded. On the Moon, degradation is caused by subsequent impacts, while on Earth the process is driven by erosion by wind and rain. On Venus, 85% of craters are still in an undegraded state.

The number of craters and their undegraded state indicate that the planet underwent a global resurfacing event approximately 300–600 million years ago, which was followed by reduced volcanism. While the Earth’s crust is constantly moving, Venus’ crust is thought to be unable to support this process.

Without the existence of plate tectonics to reduce the temperature of the mantle, Venus experienced a cyclical process that caused the temperature of the mantle to increase, eventually weakening the crust. Then, over about 100 million years, large-scale subduction occurred which recycled Venus’ crust.

The diameter of the craters on Venus varies from 3 km to 280 km. There are no craters smaller than 3 km in diameter due to the effect the dense atmosphere has on foreign bodies entering Venus. Objects with a kinetic energy less than a certain number will be slowed down by the atmosphere so they don’t produce an impact crater. Objects smaller than 50 meters in diameter will break up and burn up in the atmosphere before reaching the surface.

3. Deep Structure

Without seismic data or data regarding the moment of inertia, little is known about Venus’ internal structure and geochemistry. The similarity in size and density of Venus to Earth suggests that they may have a similar internal structure consisting of a core, mantle and crust. Like Earth, Venus’ core is partially molten because the two planets are cooling at the same rate.

Venus’ slightly smaller size means that the pressure inside Venus is much lower than on Earth. However, the main physical difference between the two planets is the absence of plate tectonics on Venus, which is probably due to Venus’ crust being too strong without the presence of water to reduce its viscosity.

As a result, the amount of heat lost on Venus is lower, thereby inhibiting planetary cooling and possibly explaining why Venus has no internal magnetic field. Venus may instead be losing its internal heat in the process of periodic resurfacing.

4. Atmosphere and Climate

The next physical characteristics of Venus, which has a very dense atmosphere, which consists of 96.5% carbon dioxide and 3.5% nitrogen. The mass of its atmosphere is 93 times greater than that of Earth’s, while the pressure on the surface of the planet Venus is 92 times greater than on the surface of the Earth—a pressure roughly comparable to that of an ocean 1 kilometer deep on Earth.

The density on the surface of Venus is recorded at 65 kg/m³ or 6.5% of the density of water. The CO2-rich atmosphere and thick sulfur dioxide clouds produce the most intense greenhouse effect in the Solar System, resulting in an average surface temperature of Venus of 462 °C (864 °F). As a result, the surface of Venus is hotter than that of Mercury, which has a minimum surface temperature of −220 °C (−364.0 °F) and a maximum surface temperature of 420 °C (788 °F), even though Venus is farther from the Sun and as a result only gains 25% of the irradiance that Mercury receives. The surface of Venus is often described as hellish. The temperature on Venus is also higher than the temperature for sterilization.

Research suggests that billions of years ago, Venus’ atmosphere was much closer to Earth’s than it is today, and there may have been water on the surface. However, over a period of 600 million to several billion years, a sustained greenhouse effect is caused by the evaporation of water which creates greenhouse gases in the atmosphere. Although the surface of Venus cannot support life the way it does on Earth, the possibility of habitable niches in the lower and middle early layers cannot be discounted.

Thermal inertia and heat transfer by winds in the lower atmosphere mean that the surface temperature of Venus does not vary much between the light and dark sides, even though the planet’s rotation is very slow. Surface winds are slow at a few kilometers per hour. However, due to the high atmospheric density on the surface of Venus, these winds are quite significant and are able to move dust and small rocks on the surface. In addition, the wind can also make it difficult for pedestrians even if heat, pressure, and lack of oxygen are not a problem.

Above the CO2 layer are thick clouds consisting of sulfur dioxide and sulfuric acid. The precipitate reflects and scatters about 90% of the sun’s light, hindering observations of Venus’ surface. As a result of this permanent initial layer, even though Venus is much closer to the Sun than Earth, its surface is not as bright as Earth’s.

Winds as high as 300 km/h (190 mph) over the clouds circle Venus every four to five earth days. The wind speed of Venus is 60 times faster than the rotation of Venus, while the speed of the fastest winds on Earth is only 10–20% of the speed of Earth’s rotation.

The surface of Venus is isothermal; the planet has a constant temperature not only between day and night, but also between the equator and the poles. Venus’ axis tilt of less than 3° also minimizes seasonal temperature variations.

The only appreciable temperature variation is due to altitude. In 1995, the Magellan probe managed to image a highly reflective substance on the top of the tallest mountain that looks a lot like snow on Earth. This substance was likely formed by the same processes as snow, albeit at a much higher temperature. This snow is too volatile on the surface, so it rises to colder elevations in a gaseous form, and then precipitates. The identity of this substance is still not known with certainty, but there are various speculations such as tellurium and lead sulfide (galena).

Venus’ clouds are capable of producing lightning like clouds on Earth. The existence of lightning has been controversial since its first discovery by the Venera spacecraft. In 2006-2007, Venus Express discovered electromagnetic electron waves, which are signs of lightning. Their intermittent occurrence suggests patterns related to weather activity.

In 2007, the Venus Express probe discovered an atmospheric vortex at Venus’ south pole. In addition, in 2011, this spacecraft also managed to find the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere of Venus. Furthermore, on January 29, 2013 scientists from the European Space Agency reported that the ionosphere on the planet Venus appears to have a tail like the ions that follow from a comet.

5. Magnetic Field and Core

The final physical characteristics of Venus, namely its magnetic field is weaker than that of Earth. In 1967, Venera 4 discovered that this magnetic field results from interactions between the ionosphere and the solar wind, and not from a dynamo in the core as it does on Earth. Venus’ magnetosphere provides protection from insignificant cosmic radiation. The radiation may produce cloud-to-cloud lightning.

The absence of an internal magnetic field on Venus is surprising because Venus was once thought to have a dynamo as a result of its size being not much different from Earth. Dynamo requires three things, namely conductive liquid, rotation, and convection. Venus’ core is thought to be electrically conductive. In addition, even though it is considered too slow, according to simulations of Venus’ rotation it can still produce a dynamo.

The absence of a dynamo on Venus is due to the absence of convection in the Venusian core. On Earth, convection takes place in the liquid outer layers of the core because the bottom is much hotter than the outside. On Venus, global resurfacing events may have halted plate tectonics and consequently reduced heat flux in the crust. As a result, the temperature of the mantle increases, thereby reducing the heat flux from the core. This is why there is no internal geodynamo capable of generating a magnetic field, instead the thermal energy from the core is used to reheat the crust.

Another possibility is that there is no solid core on Venus, or that the Venusian core is not currently cooling, so that all of the liquid portion exists at roughly the same temperature. It’s also possible that Venus’ core has completely solidified. The shape of Venus’ core is highly dependent on the concentration of sulfur, which is currently unknown.

Due to the weak magnetosphere, the solar wind interacts directly with Venus’ outer atmosphere, which produces hydrogen and oxygen ions by dissociating neutral molecules from ultraviolet radiation. Energy from the solar wind then causes some of the ions to experience release from Venus’ gravitational field.

As a result of this erosion process, low mass hydrogen, helium and oxygen ions are released, while high mass molecules such as carbon dioxide are more able to survive. Atmospheric erosion may also have contributed to the loss of water during the first billion after formation. In addition, erosion increases the ratio of high-mass deuterium to low-mass hydrogen (D/H ratio) in the upper atmosphere.

—

Those are the 5 characteristics of Venus that you can learn. It was concluded that the hottest planet in the solar system is Planet Venus.

Keyboard parts (piano) – Keyboards include a wide variety of modern musical instruments from around the world. In this modern era, the use of keyboards has been widely found in several groups of music games in several countries, especially in Indonesia. Keyboard games are of interest to everyone who loves music and musical instruments.

At this time, the keyboard became part of the entertainment for the general public, for young to old, for small children, teenagers, to adults. The existence of the keyboard really gives a color that really captivates the listeners. This is because the playing style and techniques presented from the keyboard game vary.

This keyboard instrument has various tempos, rhythms, and musical sounds that are presented differently. In general, the keyboard is programmed, so the keyboard player can play it by simply pressing the buttons that have been set to produce the rhythm, tempo, or whatever sound you want.

According to Soewito (1996) the keyboard is part of various musical instruments and components of musical instruments which are designed with a row of scales or commonly called white or black keys and also parts of other musical instruments called pianos and organs.

In playing a keyboard instrument, it is necessary to understand the parts of the keyboard first. It aims to make it easy for keyboard players to learn various techniques for playing keyboard musical instruments. Come on Sinaumed’s! Let’s understand first, what’s in the keyboard instrument before we learn how to play it.

Keyboard Parts 

1. Power button on or off

The power on or off button is the button that will be used the first time. The power button is used to turn on the keyboard after the keyboard has been connected to the power supply. In addition, the power button is also used to turn off the keyboard when it is finished using. When the power on button is pressed and the keyboard is automatically turned on, it is certain that when pressing the keys a piano sound will appear.

In general, the power on or off button on a piano uses a symbol shaped like the letter “I” and the letter “O”. Usually the power on or off button has been engraved with a perpendicular line like the letter “I” inside sticking out a bit or above a circle shape like the letter “O”.

2. Volumes

Volume on a keyboard instrument is something related to sound. The volume is defined as the level of strength or height of the sound that is issued. When the volume is increased, the sound produced or issued will be even louder. Conversely, when the volume is lowered, the sound produced will be smaller.

The volume buttons on the keyboard are part of the function to increase and decrease the sound. Keyboard users can set the big and small or the overall high and low sound that will come out on the keyboard after the keyboard is turned on.

The use of the volume buttons is not only on the keyboard (piano), but on smartphones, TVs, speakers, and others. Unlike the use of the volume button besides increasing and decreasing the sound on a smartphone, it also functions to take photos, screen captures, and others. However, the volume buttons on the keyboard (piano) can only function to increase and decrease the sound.

The volume buttons on the keyboard are given symbols in the form of a plus (+) or a plus sign and the minus button (-) or a minus sign. The (+) shaped symbol on the keyboard is used to magnify or amplify the sound. While the symbol in the form (-) is used to reduce or lower the voice.

3. Start or stop

The start on a keyboard instrument is intended as a sign that the musical rhythm that will be issued on the keyboard has started. Meanwhile, stop means that the rhythm of the music coming out of the keyboard stops.

The start or stop button on a keyboard instrument is used to start or stop a musical rhythm which is commonly called a rhythm. When a keyboard player wants to use a rhythm, he can press the start button, where the rhythm on the keyboard that will come out first is in the form of a drum sound. If the player wants to stop the rhythm, they can press the Stop Back button a second time, so the music rhythm will stop automatically.

In general, the start and stop buttons are designed to unite into a single unit on a keyboard instrument. Therefore, players can easily start a musical rhythm or rhythm by pressing the start button once. In addition, you can also easily stop the rhythm of the music or rhythm by pressing the stop button once if previously the rhythm was on.

4.Sync

Sync itself is defined as synchronization. So that sync on a keyboard instrument means that there is synchronization in keyboard play, between the rhythm of the music and the melody of the song being played according to what the player wants.

The sync button located on a keyboard instrument is usually used by keyboard players to adjust the music melody so that it can be played together with the rhythm of the music or rhythm. The sync button can set how to harmonize with the desired song melody.

When the keyboard instrument player presses the sync button to activate it, then if the keys on the keyboard on the left are touched by something, then immediately the drums along with the musical accompaniment will run simultaneously.

5. Rhythm 

Rhythm itself is defined as a musical rhythm related to tempo. Rhythm is part of the melody of a song as one of the basic and important elements in producing music. Rhythm comes from a combination of sounds with beats in long and short levels and long and short beats of these sounds so as to create a pattern.

The Rhythm button on a keyboard instrument is generally used by keyboard players in selecting various types of musical rhythms to be played. The choice of musical rhythms, including: waltz, bossanova, rhumba, and so on. The rhythm button on the keyboard instrument of some people or players also sometimes call it the style button.

6. ACMP

In playing keyboard instruments, basically ACMP is an accompaniment or so-called accompaniment. The ACMP button on a keyboard is generally used to hide sounds originating from various types of musical rhythms when the rhythm button or style button is pressed or turned on.

If the rhythm button or style button and the ACMP button are pressed, they will automatically turn on so that the keys on the left side of the keyboard instrument will function as chord accompaniment.

In addition, the ACMP key used in playing keyboard instruments is also intended to synchronize chords with the style chosen by the player. This makes the drum set along with other instruments will also sound according to the chords.

7. Voices

The voice button found in voice musical instruments is the same as the tone button or timbre button. Tone itself is an effect in sound settings that can allow setting the timbre or quality of sound according to what the keyboard instrument player wants or wants. Timbre is known as tone color or tone quality which is the quality of sound that will be felt by listeners or music connoisseurs that come from musical notes, sounds or tones.

The function of the voice button is used to select various sounds of existing musical instruments according to the wishes of the players. Examples of the sound of musical instruments, namely: organ, guitar, trumpet, flute, violin, cello, saxophone, drums, and many more.

In general, Voice or tone is divided into 3 (three) buttons, including: Main voice or right 1, layer voice or right 2, and left voice. Main voice or right 1 is a program that can activate the work function of one sound found on a keyboard instrument with various voice choices.

Layer voice or right 2 is a program on a keyboard instrument that can activate the work function of two sounds, but it can also produce two different sounds by pressing just one key bar. Meanwhile, the left voice is a program that is found on a keyboard instrument that can activate the voice work function on the part of the keyboard instrument on the left with a certain range limit.

8. Tempo

The Tempo button in a keyboard instrument game is used to adjust the speed or slowness of the beats of the music rhythm or what is commonly called rhythm according to what the player wants. The Tempo button can function if the start button on the keyboard has been pressed or turned on.

With regard to tempo, there is also a metronome on a keyboard instrument which has a function to assist keyboard players in stabilizing the beat of the song being played so that it is not too fast or not too slow.

9. Sustain

The sustain button on a keyboard instrument is used to make the sound that comes out of the keyboard not be interrupted immediately when the key is pressed. It is also intended that the sustain button is used to extend the sound of the instrument coming out of the keyboard instrument.

10.Transpose

Transpose is a feature found in playing keyboard instruments that is used to adjust the tone without moving the position of the fingers when playing it. This feature is able to change the basic tone of a keyboard instrument by raising or lowering the tone according to the player’s needs or desires.

If the player wants to raise half the pitch from the initial note, then the player needs to press the (+) button once. Conversely, if the player wants to lower the pitch halfway from the initial note, then the player needs to press the (-) button once.

11. Intro/ending button

Intro has a function to start a song by using the existing intro arrangements for each rhythm in playing keyboard instruments. While the ending has a function to end a song by using the existing arrangements for each rhythm in playing a keyboard musical instrument.

In playing keyboard instruments, the intro or ending button is used by pressing the button to start playing the keyboard and pressing the Back button a second time as the button to close the song.

songs

In a keyboard instrument there is a program called song. The program is especially useful for keyboard players, as it can be used to record or play back songs or instruments. The song demos are already available on keyboard instruments, so that players can use them directly.

In general, the keyboard instrument already provides several songs that can be played directly by the player, but the keyboard player can also easily play the song he wants through a midi file or mp3. To turn it on, players only need to press the play song button as desired.

12. Fill in

The Fill in button on a keyboard musical instrument has a function to reproduce or add variations in beats and drum variations. Fill in is divided into 2, namely Fill in to variation and Fill in to original. Fill in to variation functions to produce variations on the beat before entering the chorus of the song being played. Meanwhile, Fill in to original has a function to produce variations on the beat after the song chorus has been played.

13. Breaks

Breaks in playing keyboard instruments function in variations of drum playing style or rhythm. This break has a bit of the same function as fill in. The variation in break is quite monotonous compared to fill in.

14. Main Variations

Main Variation is a selection of various musical variants for style. This Main Variation aims to make the style of playing keyboard instruments played by players look complete and full.

15. One Touch Settings

One Touch Setting in playing a keyboard instrument is a program that can maximize the work of the keyboard instrument in its ability to store data. The program is a program that can make it easy for keyboard instrument players to choose the style they want automatically that has been presented.

If the keyboard instrument player has chosen the style he wants, then the program will store it in memory and can be played automatically by simply pressing the button.

16. Music Finder

In playing keyboard instruments, Music Finder is a program found on keyboard instruments that has a function to automatically provide settings for a song being played by the player. Music Finder is not only intended for sound management. The program is able to adjust the style, tempo, effects, and others.

17. Registration Memory

The existence of registration memory in playing keyboard musical instruments is related to everything related to data storage on the keyboard musical instrument. The intended data is, the selection of styles, voices, and others. In general, a keyboard instrument consists of 8 (eight) data storage areas, which are written in numerical order.

Registration memory has another function, which is to make it easier for keyboard instrument players to change styles and voices without pressing the button. This is because the registration memory program has stored the settings needed by the player.

Well, above are the various parts found on a keyboard musical instrument along with an explanation. You already know, right? It turns out that there are lots of parts on a keyboard instrument that many people don’t understand. If you already understand it, Sinaumed’s can easily learn how to play the keyboard until you are proficient. Sinaumed’s can get various ways of playing keyboards at sinaumedia.com .

Thus the discussion about the parts of the keyboard, I hope all the discussion above can make you interested in learning the keyboard and piano. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Nabila Frithania

Reference source

Biantoro, AS, Raharja, B., and Taryadi, R. Keyboard Acompaniment Learning at the Yogyakarta Etnictro Music Education Course Institute. 1-15.

Meirawati, RN (2014). Learning Methods for Keyboard Musical Instruments for Blind Children in Yaketunis, Yogyakarta. Department of Music Arts Education Faculty of Languages ​​and Arts (Thesis): Yogyakarta State University.

Yeni Indra. (2018). Children’s Song Accompaniment Technique: Using the Keyboard as a Rhythmic Instrument. Jakarta: Prenadamedia Group

Haspalian, MA (2016). Forms and Functions of Keyboard Games in Ciledut Traditional Music in Sakra Village, East Lombok . Department of Music Arts Education Faculty of Languages ​​and Arts (Thesis): Yogyakarta State University.

Septian, DA, Suhaya, and Septian, DD (2022). John Thompson’s Method of Piano Learning at Unity Music School Serang. Journal of Music Dance Theater & Visual (1): 1, 48-62.

Sihombing, LB The Role of Keyboard Instruments in the Traditional Music of the Karo Society .

Kidjing, J. (2016). Proficient in playing the keyboard . Depok: Genesis Learning

Hakim, T. (2005). The fastest technique to learn to play the keyboard . South Jakarta: Publisher PT Kawan Pustaka.

Fahri, MZ (2015). Secrets of being good at the keyboard self-taught without a teacher: especially for beginners . Indonesian Literature Sheet.

Erzha, E. (2014). Instant Tricks to Play Keyboard Skilled Self-taught . Indonesian Sky Sheet.

Sudibyo, P. Practical Techniques for Playing the Organ and Single Keyboard . Depok: Puspa Swara, Member of Ikapi.

Hakim, T. Collection of Legendary Group Songs in Keyboard Games . Library Friend.

Taher, D. (2012). Smooth Playing Keyboard from Zero to Advanced . Yogyakarta: Jogja Rises Publishers (Ikapi Member).

Origins and Customs of the 5 Largest Tribes on the Island of Sumatra – Sumatra Island is the sixth largest island in the world with an area of ​​473,481 km². The population of the island is approximately 57,940,351 (2018 census). This island is also known by other names, namely Percha Island , Andalas , or Suwarnadwipa (Sanskrit, meaning “golden island”).

When it was a trade route in the past, the island of Sumatra had many names, from Samoterra, Samotra, Sumotra, Zamatra and Zamatora. Dutch and English records, since Jan Huygen van Linschoten and Sir Francis Drake in the 16th century, have always been consistent in Sumatran writing. This form became the standard and was later adapted to the Indonesian tongue: Sumatra.

Sumatra Island is located in the western part of the archipelago archipelago. It is bounded on the north by the Bay of Bengal, on the east by the Malacca Strait, on the south by the Sunda Strait, and on the west by the Indian Ocean.

The eastern part of the island is often found in swamps which are drained by large rivers that flow there, including Asahan (North Sumatra), Siak River (Riau), Kampar, Inderagiri (West Sumatra and Riau), Batang Hari (West Sumatra and Jambi). ), Musi, Ogan, Lematang, Komering (South Sumatra), Way Sekampung, Way Tulangbawang, Way Seputih and Way Mesuji (Lampung). Meanwhile, several rivers that flow into the west coast of the island of Sumatra include Batang Tarusan (West Sumatra) and Ketahun (Bengkulu).

As for the western part of the island, the Bukit Barisan mountains stretch from the northwest to the southeast with a length of + 1500 km. Along the hill range there are dozens of mountains, both inactive and active volcanoes, such as Geureudong (Aceh), Sinabung (North Sumatra), Marapi and Talang (West Sumatra), Mount Dempo (South Sumatra), Mount Kaba (Bengkulu ), and Kerinci (West Sumatra and Jambi).

The island of Sumatra also has several lakes, including Lake Laut Tawar (Aceh), Lake Toba (North Sumatra), Lake Singkarak, Lake Maninjau, Lake Diatas, Lake Di Bawah, Lake Talang (West Sumatra), Lake Kerinci (Jambi), and Lake Ranau (Lampung and South Sumatra).

In general, the island of Sumatra is inhabited by the Malay people, who are divided into several tribes or sub-tribes. Major tribes other than Malay are Batak, Minangkabau, Aceh, Lampung, Karo, Nias, Rejang, Komering, Gayo, and so on.

The east coast of Sumatra and in several big cities such as Medan, Batam, Palembang, Pekanbaru and Bandar Lampung, are mostly inhabited by ethnic Chinese and Indians. The livelihoods of the people of Sumatra are mostly as farmers, fishermen and traders.

The majority of the population of Sumatra is Muslim and a small proportion are adherents of Protestant Christianity, especially in the Tapanuli and Toba-Samosir regions, North Sumatra. Meanwhile, in urban areas, such as Medan, Pekanbaru, Batam, Pangkal Pinang, Palembang and Bandar Lampung, several Buddhists were found.

In order to better understand the large tribes that inhabit the island of Sumatra, let’s look at the following descriptions and explanations together.

1. Malays

A Riau Malay couple playing a traditional gambus instrument, against the background of the tricolor Malay flag.

The Malay people are an Austronesian ethnic group who inhabit the Malay Peninsula, the east coast of the island of Sumatra (Bangka Belitung, Jambi, Riau, Riau Islands, South Sumatra and North Sumatra), the southern part of Thailand, the south coast of Burma, the island of Singapore, the coast of Borneo, the Philippines. the southern part, and the smaller islands located around this location—collectively known as the “Malay World”. This location is now part of the modern countries of Malaysia, Indonesia, Singapore, Brunei Darussalam, Thailand and the Philippines.

The name “Malay” comes from the Malay Kingdom that once existed in the Sungai Batang Hari area, Jambi. During its development, the Malay Kingdom eventually succumbed and became subordinate to the Sriwijaya Kingdom. The use of the term Malay also extended beyond Sumatra, following the territory of the Srivijaya empire which expanded to Java, Kalimantan and the Malay Peninsula.

Almost all of the Archipelago is directly influenced by the Malays. The Malay language, which has developed and is used by many people in the archipelago, was finally chosen as the national language in Indonesia, Malaysia and Brunei Darussalam.

In terms of race or national family, Malays in Indonesia are divided into two groups, namely Proto Malay or Proto Malayan and Deutero Malay or Duetro Malayan.

Proto Malayan is an Old Malay family that came for the first time around +1500 BC. This family includes the Dayak, Toraja, Sasak, Nias, Batak, Anak Dalam, Enggano, and so on who live on the islands of Kalimantan, Sulawesi, Nias, Lombok, and Sumatra.

The Deutro Malays are the Young Malays who came after the Proto Malays in the Metal Age around + 500 BC. The group that entered the second wave included ethnic Malays, Acehnese, Lampung and Minangkabau living on the islands of Sumatra, Java, Bali, Madura and Sulawesi.

Another group that does not belong to the Malay family, but still belongs to the nation in Indonesia is the Melanesian people who live in the eastern part of Indonesia. Even so, the term Malay used in Indonesia refers more to the meaning of a more specific ethnic group, so that the existing Malay does not belong to the Javanese ethnic group.

According to the 2010 census, the Malay ethnic group in Indonesia consists of Tamiang Malay, Palembang Malay, Bangka Malay, Deli Malay, Asahan Malay, Coastal Malay, Riau Malay, Archipelago Malay, Jambi Malay, Bengkulu Malay, Merangin Malay, Lematang Malay, Inner Malay, Malay Rokan, Siak Malay, Kampar Malay, Rawas Malay, Musi Malay, Kuantan Malay, Belitung Malay, Pontianak Malay, Sanggau Malay, Sintang Malay, Kotawaringin Malay, Lahat Malay, Sambas Malay, Lembak Malay, Kaur Malay, Besemah Malay, Ogan Malay, Langkat Malay, Lintang Malay, Serawai Malay, Kerinci Malay, Berau Malay, Loloan Malay and Bulungan Malay.

The related/closest Malay ethnic groups in Sumatra consist of the Minangkabau, Lampung, Komering-Lampung, Aneuk Jamee, Acehnese, Mukomuko, Rejang, Mandailing, Pekal, Talang Mamak, Gayo, Singkil, the Alas, the Kluet, the Devayan/Simeulue, and the Haloban.

The related/closest Malay ethnic groups in Kalimantan consist of the Banjar, Kutai, Tidung, Suluk, Maranao, Paser, Moro, and Meratus Dayak tribes. The related/closest Malay ethnic groups on the island of Sulawesi are the Bugis, while the related/closest ethnic groups on the island of Java are the Betawi and Loloan tribes.

2. The Acehnese

Acehnese women in their traditional clothes.

The Acehnese or in the Acehnese language are called Ureuëng Acèh is the name of an indigenous tribe that inhabits the coastal areas and parts of the interior of Aceh Province. The majority of the Acehnese people are Muslim. The tribe has several other names, namely Lam Muri, Lambri, Akhir, Achin, Asji, A-tse and Atse.

The language spoken by this tribe is Acehnese, which is part of the West Malayo-Polynesian language family and is closely related to the Cham language spoken in Vietnam and Cambodia. The Acehnese language belongs to the Aceh-Chamik language group, a branch of the Malayo-Polynesian language family.

The languages ​​that are most closely related to the Acehnese language are Cham, Roglai, Jarai, Rhade, Chru, Utset and other languages ​​in the Chamic language family, which are spoken in Cambodia, Vietnam and Hainan.

Acehnese legend says that the first inhabitants of Aceh came from the Mante and Lhan tribes. The Mante tribe is a local ethnic group that is part of the Alas and Karo tribes, while the Lhan tribe is thought to be related to the Semang tribe who migrated from the Malay Peninsula or the Back Indies (Champa and Burma).

The Mante tribe initially inhabited the Aceh Besar area and then spread to other places. There are also ethnological assumptions about the relationship between the Mante tribe and the Phoenicians in Babylon or the Dravidians who were in the valley of the Indus and Ganges rivers. However, this has not been confirmed by experts.

3. Minangkabau tribe

Minangkabau Cultural Festival 2016.

The Minang people are part of the Deutro Malays (Young Malays) who migrated from mainland China south to the island of Sumatra around 2,500–2,000 years ago. It is estimated that this community group entered from the east of the island of Sumatra, along the Kampar river to a plateau called the darek and became the homeland of the Minangkabau people.

Some of these darek areas then formed a kind of confederation known as luhak , hereinafter also referred to as Luhak Nan Tigo , consisting of Luhak Limo Puluah , Luhak Agam , and Luhak Tanah Data . During the reign of the Dutch East Indies, the luhak area became a territorial government area called afdeling and was headed by a resident (the Minangkabau people called him Tuan Luhak).

Along with the growth and development of the population, the Minangkabau people spread to other darek areas, as well as forming certain areas into rantau areas . This concept for the Minangkabau people is an area that is the entrance to Minangkabau nature.

Rantau also functions as a place to find life, a trade area. Rantau in Minangkabau is known as Rantau Nan Duo which is divided into Rantau in Hilia (east coast area) and Rantau in Mudiak (west coast area).

At first, the mention of the Minangkabau people was not distinguished from the Malays. However, since the 19th century, the mention of it began to be distinguished because it saw the matrilineal culture that persisted in Minangkabau society in contrast to the patrilineal culture adopted by the Malay community in general.

Today’s Minangkabau people are adherents of Islam. If there are people who leave the Islamic religion, those directly concerned are also considered to have left the Minangkabau community. This is in accordance with the term “thrown away along custom”.

According to Tambo, the Minangkabau customary system was first coined by two brothers, namely Datuk Ketumanggungan and Datuk Perpatih Nan Sebatang. Datuk Ketumanggungan inherited the aristocratic Koto Piliang customary system, while Datuk Perpatih inherited the egalitarian Bodi Caniago customary system. In its journey, the two customary systems known as kelarasan complement each other and form the Minangkabau community system.

There are three pillars that build and maintain the integrity of the culture and customs of the Minangkabau people. They are religious scholars, intellectuals, and ninik mamak, known as the Tigo Sajarangan Furnace . All three complement each other and work hand in hand in the same high position. All community affairs are discussed by these three elements.

4. Batak tribe

Batak tribe.

The Batak people are speakers of Austronesian languages, but it is not certain when the ancestors of the Batak people first settled in Tapanuli and East Sumatra. Language and archaeological evidence show that Austronesian-speaking people from Taiwan moved to the Philippines and Indonesia around 2,500 years ago, during the New Stone Age (Neolithic).

However, because until now no Neolithic artifacts (Young Stone Age) have been found in the Batak region, it can be assumed that the Batak ancestors only migrated to North Sumatra during the metal age.

Batak identity became popular in modern Indonesian history after the founding and joining of young people from Angkola, Mandailing, Karo, Toba, Simalungun, and Pakpak in an organization called Jong Batak in 1926, regardless of religion in one accord.

Before the Batak tribe embraced Christianity and Islam, they had a belief system and religion towards Mulajadi na Bolon who had power over the sky and the radiance of his power was manifested in the Natolu Debata .

The Toba Batak people recognize three concepts, including:

• Tendi/tondi is a person’s soul or spirit which is a force. Tondi gave life to humans. Tondi is obtained since a person is in the womb. If tondi leaves someone’s body, that person will get sick or die. This is what caused the mangalap ceremony (to pick up) the tondi from the sombaon that captivated him;
• Sahala is the soul or spirit of a person’s power. Everyone has tondi , but not everyone has sahala . Sahala is the same as sumanta , luck or supernatural powers possessed by kings or hula-hula (wife clan group);
• Begu is the tondi of people who have died, whose behavior is the same as that of humans, but only appears at night.

5. Mentawai tribe

Making Mentawai Tattoos.

The Mentawai tribe is the original inhabitants of the Mentawai Islands. Like the Nias and Enggano tribes, they are part of the Proto Malays who settled in the western Archipelago. Apart from Mentawai, their residential areas are on North Pagai Island and South Pagai Island.

The distinctive tradition of this tribe is the use of tattoos all over the body (in the local language it is called titi ), which is related to the user’s role and social status. Not just any tattoo, every motif depicted on their bodies has a certain philosophy.

Before getting to know Christianity, the Mentawai tribe followed their belief which was called Sabulungan. Currently, almost all Mentawai people have embraced religion, especially Christianity, both Protestant and Catholic, as well as some Islam, although some of them still adhere to the old Sabulungan beliefs.

One of the local churches established for the Mentawai tribe is the Mentawai Christian Protestant Church (GKPM), which was founded on July 6, 1916 and has a congregation of around 35,000 people.

So, that’s a brief explanation of the Origins and Customs of the 5 Largest Customary Tribes on the Island of Sumatra . The following are book recommendations from sinaumedia that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about tribes in Indonesia so they can fully understand them. Happy reading.

Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Getting to Know the Origins and Customs of the 5 Biggest Tribes in Java – Indonesia is a wealthy country. Wealth refers not only to natural products, but also to various ethnic groups, languages, religions, beliefs and customs. For ethnic wealth, Indonesia has hundreds of tribal names, even thousands if broken down to sub-tribes.

Each tribe has different customs and norms. Even so, this diversity does not make the integrity of the nation fragmented. Instead, diversity unites to achieve the goal of a just and prosperous society.

Tribal data in Indonesia itself was first produced through the 1930 Population Census (SP) by the Dutch colonial government. However, this data collection was halted during the New Order era due to a political taboo which saw that discussion of ethnicity was an effort that could threaten the integrity of the nation. It was only 70 years later that the ethnic data began to be collected again during the Reformation period by BPS through SP2000, followed by SP2010.

At least, there are around 1,340 ethnic groups spread throughout Indonesia. Records compiled by BPS in 2010 stated that the Javanese are the largest ethnic group with a proportion of 40.05% of the total population in Indonesia. The rest are ethnic groups living outside Java, such as the Bugis (3.68%), Batak (2.04%), Balinese (1.88%), Acehnese (1.4%), and other ethnic groups. other.

The Javanese people on the other hand do not only live on the island of Java, but there are also those outside Java while still maintaining their cultural values. Therefore, Javanese culture is considered large and very diverse from various sides.

The majority of Javanese people are Muslim, although nowadays many adhere to other religions. The main economy of the people comes from agriculture. Many rural people work as farmers and cultivate the fields. In addition, many of them also work as artisans, for example printing bricks, making batik, weaving, and becoming carpenters. Meanwhile, the Javanese who live in coastal areas generally work as fishermen and sell them at fish auctions.

In general, the majority of the Javanese region is inhabited by Javanese tribes, which are divided into several tribes or sub-tribes. Apart from the Javanese, other major tribes that inhabit this area are the Samin, Tengger, Osing, and Bawean tribes.

In order to better understand the origins and customs of these tribes, let’s look at the following descriptions and explanations together.

 

1. The Javanese

Javanese society adapts many aspects of Indian culture, such as the epic Ramayana.

(Photo: Gunawan Kartapranata )

The Javanese are the largest ethnic group in Indonesia, originating from Central Java, East Java, the Special Region of Yogyakarta, Indramayu Regency, Cirebon Regency/City (West Java), and Serang-Cilegon Regency/City (Banten). In 2010, at least 40.22% of Indonesia’s population was ethnic Javanese. In addition, there are also Javanese who live in the countries of New Caledonia and Suriname, because during the Dutch colonial period these tribes were brought there as workers.

Currently, the Javanese in Suriname are one of the largest tribes there and are known as the Javanese of Suriname. There are also large numbers of ethnic Javanese in most provinces of Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Saudi Arabia and the Netherlands.

The majority of the Javanese are Muslim, with some minorities Christian, Kejawen, Hindu, Buddhist and Confucian. Even so, Javanese civilization has been influenced by interactions between Kejawen and Hindu-Buddhist cultures for more than a thousand years. This influence is still evident in Javanese history, culture, traditions and art forms.

The Javanese people still adhere to the Kejawen belief. Kejawen itself is a teaching adhered to by Javanese philosophers and is the main teaching in building manners or rules for a better life. Kejawen is a belief, not a religion. Kejawen is more in the form of art, culture, traditions, attitudes, rituals, and the philosophy of the Javanese people which cannot be separated from the spirituality of the Javanese people.

This Kejawen school then developed along with the religion adhered to by its followers, so that it became known as Kejawen Islam, Kejawen Hinduism, Kejawen Buddhism, and Kejawen Christianity. Currently, the Kejawen belief is considered ancient by some people. However, there are still many people who carry out Kejawen traditions, ceremonies and rituals such as nyadran, mitoni, tedhak siten, wetonan , and others.

Traditionally, the majority of Javanese work as farmers. Agriculture is very common because the area of ​​Java has fertile volcanic soil. The main agricultural commodity is rice. In 1997, it was estimated that Java produced 55% of Indonesia’s total crop. Most of the farmers work in small-scale rice fields, with a percentage of 42% of them working and cultivating directly without employing other people.

 

2. The Samins

Samin tribe in Blora.

The Samin tribe is a group of people who adhere to the teachings of Saminism. This teaching comes from a figure named Samin Surosentiko who was born in 1859 in Ploso Kedhiren Village, Klopodhuwur, Randublatung, Blora. This teaching arose as a reaction against the Dutch colonial government which was arbitrary towards indigenous people.

Their resistance was carried out not only physically, but also in the form of opposition to all regulations and obligations that the people had to carry out towards the Dutch colonial government at that time, including refusing to pay taxes.

Samin people have a personality that is innocent and honest. That is, they are open to anyone, including people they don’t know. They consider everyone as brothers, so they always prioritize the attitude of togetherness. Everything that is done by society is never engineered. This is because honesty is one of the manifestations of the character of the Samin people from the teachings they adhere to.

The Samin people really hold ” salat ” which means solahing ilat (movement of the tongue). The tongue must be maintained so that it continues to speak honest words and never hurt others. The tongue is the source of all problems. Don’t hurt others if you don’t want to be hurt, don’t lie to others if you don’t want to be lied to, and don’t harm others if you don’t want to be harmed.

The Samin people generally communicate using plain Javanese or ngoko alus Javanese, which sometimes mixes with krama. Because of that, their conversation sounded a bit rough like the character of the East Javanese.

The Samin people embody life with social solidarity. Currently, the Samin people use a trick or strategy called kumumi , which is to remain silent and not fight the government, but still passively criticize it. In short, in life the Samin people never refuse any form of assistance from the government, but they also never ask anyone for help.

The presence of new technology is acknowledged to have helped them gain experience, especially in agricultural development and other development programs. The Samin community is currently experiencing a transition towards a modern society, which is manifested in the form of associative and dissociative interactions.

The impression of the Samin people is always identified with isolation and backwardness. However, the presence of modern electronic devices, such as radios, televisions, gadgets, washing machines, motorcycles, tractors, rice grinding machines, has now become part of their daily lives.

Some Samin people have even received education up to master’s degree and work as civil servants, police officers, health workers, midwives, and so on. The interesting thing about the current attitude of the Samin people is their persistence in their teachings, even though they have “opened up” to the outside world. They are still guided by the Saminis teachings, which are still upholding honesty, tolerance, togetherness, and mutual cooperation.

3. The Tenggerese

Melasti Ceremony performed by the Tengger tribe in Bromo.

The Tengger tribe or often also called wong Brama is a tribe that inhabits the highlands around the Bromo-Tengger-Semeru Mountains area, East Java Province. The inhabitants of this tribe occupy parts of Pasuruan Regency, Lumajang Regency, Probolinggo Regency and Malang Regency.

The environmental conditions of the Tenggerese who live at the foot of the mountain influence the people’s belief in the meaning of a mountain. For the Tengger tribe, Mount Bromo (local people call it Mount Brahma) is believed to be a sacred mountain. They believe that their ancestors are inside Mount Bromo, so many of the ceremonies they perform are part of ancestor worship which is performed at the foot of Mount Bromo.

There are many meanings contained in the word “tengger”. Etymologically, tengger means standing straight and still without moving (Javanese: calm ). When associated with customs and beliefs, the meaning of “tengger” is tengering nobility (a sign that its citizens have nobility).

According to legend, the origin of the Tengger tribe is closely related to the story of Rara Ateng and Jaka Seger. The name Tengger itself is taken from the names of the two, namely -teng from the ending Rara Anteng and -ger from the ending name Jaka Seger. The Tengger people believe that they are descended from both.

The legend tells that this husband and wife are eight years old and have not yet been blessed with children. They meditated for six years and changed direction every year. Sang Hyang Widi Wasa then responded to their meditation.

From the top of Mount Bromo, bursts of light emerged which penetrated the souls of Rara Ateng and Jaka Seger. There are pawisik (whispers) that say if they will be blessed with children, but the last child must be sacrificed in the crater of Mount Bromo.

 

4. The Osing Tribe

Three generations of Osing tribal women in Banyuwangi in the 1910s.

(Photo: Tropenmuseum )

The Osing tribe is a native of Banyuwangi who are also known as Laros (acronym for Lare Osing) or Wong Blambangan. They use the Osing language, which is still a sub-dialect of eastern Javanese and is related to the Javanese Arekan and Tengger languages.

This tribe occupies several districts in the central and eastern parts of Banyuwangi Regency. The majority are in Songgon District, Rogojampi District, Blimbingsari District, Singojuruh District, Kabat District, Licin District, Giri District, Glagah District, and some are in Banyuwangi District, Kalipuro District and Sempu District which mingle with the Madurese and Balinese ethnic communities.

The main arts of the tribe are Gandrung Banyuwangi, Patrol, Seblang, Angklung, Barong Dance, Kuntulan, Kendang Kempul, Janger, Jaranan, Jaran Kincak, Angklung Caruk, and Jedor.

 

5. The Bawean Tribe

A group of Bawean people in Singapore in 1901.

(Photo: National Archives of Singapore )

The Bawean tribe is also known as Boyan or Bhebien. This tribe was formed due to the mixing of Madurese, Malay, Javanese, Banjar, Bugis and Makassarese for hundreds of years on the island of Bawean. The Malay people of Malacca and Malaysia know this tribe better as Boyan than Bawean. In their view, boyan means “driver” and “gardener” ( kepbhun in the Bawean language), according to the livelihoods of some people from Bawean.

The Bawean people are a small group of Javanese people who come from Bawean Island. This island is located in the Java Sea, which is between Kalimantan Island to the north and Java Island to the south. The island is located about 80 miles north of Surabaya and is part of the Gresik district. The island consists of two districts, namely Sangkapura District and Tambak District.

According to joint research conducted by Muhammad Ihwanus Sholik and other researchers (2016) in a journal entitled Merantau As Culture (Exploration of the Social System of the Bawean Island Community) , the Bawean people migrate to meet economic needs. Residents of this tribe are said to often travel to various areas in search of work. They often travel to various regions in Indonesia and abroad, such as Singapore and Malaysia.

The desire to wander in this tribe has been instilled since childhood. This habit seems to have become a culture that is inseparable from the life of the Bawean tribe. Tarmizi (2017) in the Maulud Tradition of the Bawean Tribe Community in Sungai Datuk Village, Kijang Kota Village, East Bintan District, Bintan Regency also adds that the culture of migrating has been inherent in a man from the Bawean tribe since the 19th century.

The arrival of this tribe to Melaka is very difficult to ascertain because there is no strong historical evidence and documentation. The various opinions put forward cannot show timeliness. The first opinion says that someone named Tok Ayar came to Malacca in 1819. The second opinion says that the Bawean people came in 1824, around the time the British colonized Malacca.

Based on the records of the Singapore Colony Government in 1849, there were at least 763 Bawean people in Malacca and the number continued to grow, while the Malaysian Bawean Association recorded 3,161 Bawean people spread across Kuala Lumpur, Johor Bahru, Melaka, Seremban and Ipoh in 1891.

The third opinion says that the Bawean people were already in Melaka before 1900 and at that time there were already many Bawean people in Melaka. The Bawean people generally live in cities or areas close to cities, such as in Kampung Mata Kuching, Klebang Besar, Limbongan, Tengkera, and the area around the Melaka General Hospital. It is rare to find Baweans living in areas far from the city and their number in Malacca is estimated to not exceed a thousand.

Apart from Melaka, the Bawean people are also scattered in the Klang Valley, such as in the Ampang, Gombak, Balakong and Shah Alam areas. They bought land and built houses in groups. At least, there are two big families of the Bawean people in Gelugor, Pulau Pinang. They use the Malay dialect of Pulau Pinang to speak with people who are not from Bawean.

So, that’s a brief explanation of the Origins and Customs of the 5 Biggest Tribes in Java . The following are book recommendations from sinaumedia that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about tribes in Indonesia so they can fully understand them. Happy reading.

Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Author: Fandy Aprianto Rohman

• 4 Complete Theories of the Origins of the Indonesian Nation’s Ancestors
• List of Tribes in Indonesia and Their Social Institutions
• Papuan Traditional Clothing: Types, Uniqueness, and Philosophy
• Unique and Rarely Known Traditional Houses in Indonesia
• Maluku Traditional Houses: Names, History, Types, Uniqueness, and Pictures
• Papuan Traditional Houses: Types, Functions, Uniqueness, and Philosophy

The Meaning of Demanding Knowledge, Obligations, and Their Virtue – Knowledge is a key to all goodness and knowledge. Knowledge becomes a means to be able to carry out what Allah commands us to do. Faith will not be perfect and charity will not be perfect except with the primacy of a science. With knowledge Allah is worshiped, with it Allah’s rights are exercised, and with knowledge His religion is also spread.

This is what makes the need for knowledge greater than the need for food and drink, because the survival of religion and the world depends on knowledge. Humans will need more knowledge than food and drink. Because food and drink are only needed two to three times a day, while knowledge is needed every time.

Some of us might think that in law seeking religious knowledge is only a sunnah, which means that those who do it will receive a reward and there will be no sin for anyone who leaves it.

Even though there are many conditions where in law seeking religious knowledge is obligatory for every Muslim (fardhu ‘ain) so that those who leave it are sinful.

Definition of Demanding Knowledge

Seeking knowledge has the meaning of an endeavor or an effort in learning a science, both worldly knowledge and knowledge of the hereafter with the aim that this knowledge can be beneficial for oneself and also for others.

World knowledge serves to make it easier to live in the world, while knowledge of the afterlife itself is sought so that humans can have demands and not get lost in an evil. Because in humans the ultimate goal is the afterlife, and to be able to get the hereafter, of course, you need to study religion.

From Abu Dzar radhiallahu anhu, Rasulullah shallallahu alaihi wa sallam said,

“O Abu Dharr, in fact, when you leave in the morning to be able to learn one verse from the Book of Allah, it is better for you than you to pray one hundred cycles of prayer. And in fact, in going out in the morning to learn one chapter of a science, whether practicing it or not, it will be better for you than praying a thousand cycles of prayer.”

Obligation to Seek Knowledge 

There are not a few verses in the Qur’an and the hadith of the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wassalam which emphasize the obligation to study. Even in the position of a person who is studying knowledge is equated with a person who is engaged in jihad.

Quoting in the Class X Islamic Religious Education (PAI) book, take a look at the first revelation that Allah Subhanahu wata’ala sent down to the Prophet Muhammad Salallahu ‘alaihi wassalam which means:

“Read in (mentioning) the name of your Lord who has created. He is also the one who created humans from a clot of blood. Read, in the name of your Lord, the Most Honorable. Who teaches (man) with a pen. He taught man what he did not know” (Surah al-‘Alaq/96:1-5).

In that verse, there are a number of words that reinforce the commandments in learning and seeking knowledge, namely ‘Read’, ‘Those who teach with a pen’, and ‘Teach what is not known’. Seeking knowledge will not be limited to men only, because women also have the same rights in studying.

All genders have rights and obligations because they are both caliphs and representatives of Allah on earth, as well as being obedient servants.

As a caliph, of course humans will need knowledge to be able to uphold the Shari’a of Allah Subhanahu wata’ala. Likewise, as a servant, you need adequate knowledge so that you can become a good and obedient servant (‘abid).

It is impossible to become a caliph without sufficient knowledge to be able to manage and engineer life on this earth, so that one can carry out God’s laws.

For example, to pray alone, one needs knowledge of finding the Qibla, then finding the right time when to perform the five daily prayers, as well as knowledge in building the right mosque, as well as building a good place for ablution, and so on.

There is no limit to the place and time in the process of seeking knowledge, there is even an Arabic saying that says ‘Seek knowledge all the way to China’.

Islam, of course, also teaches ‘Seeking knowledge begins from birth to the grave’, so learn from childhood until the end of your age. Do not feel ashamed in learning even though you are old.

Law in Demanding Knowledge 

What kind of knowledge should and must be learned by Muslims? Certainly not a science that is not useful for the life of the world and the hereafter. There is knowledge that is not obligatory to learn, even if it is illegal and sinful to learn it.

For a science that is useful, then learning it will provide a reward consequence. The following are some of the laws demanding compulsory knowledge as reported on the kemdikbud.go.id page:

Fardu kifayah

This fardhu kifayah law applies to knowledge that is necessary among Muslims, so that not only non-Islamic people can master this knowledge. For example, such as medical science, falaq science, industry, linguistics, communication science, nuclear science, computer science, and others.

Fardu ‘Ain

This law will apply if the knowledge in question is forbidden to be abandoned by Muslims in all situations and conditions. For example, Islamic religious knowledge, knowledge of knowing Allah Subhanahu wata’ala with all His attributes, as well as knowledge of procedures for worship, as well as those related to obligations as a Muslim.

Adab studying in Islam

It means:

“Learn the science of adab before learning a science”

In the message, it can be seen that it is very important when studying a culture first before someone can study knowledge. The following are the manners that demand knowledge that we need to know:

1. Lillahi ta’ala’s intention.

When we want to seek knowledge, our main intention must be because of Allah. As in the word of Allah in surah Al Bayyinah verse 5:

It means:

“Even though they are not ordered except to worship Allah by purifying their obedience to Him while (carrying out) the straight religion, and so that they establish prayers as well as pay zakat; And that is the true religion.”

2. Always pray when studying.

Like the Prophet Muhammad who often prayed in seeking knowledge, as follows:

It means:

“O Allah, benefit from what You teach me, teach me things that are beneficial to me, and increase my knowledge.”

3. Be serious about studying.

When in studying we should be serious and always enthusiastic to be able to get useful knowledge. Demand knowledge as if you were never satisfied with all the knowledge you have, you should always wish to continue to increase your knowledge.

Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said, “There are two people who are greedy who are never satisfied: namely for people who are greedy for knowledge and are never satisfied with it and people who are greedy with the world are also never full with it.” (Narrated by Al-Bayhaqi)

4. Stay away from immorality.

It means:

From Abu Hurairah, from the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said, “A servant who makes a mistake, a black spot will be placed in his heart. If he leaves it and asks for forgiveness as well as repents, his heart will be cleansed. If he returns (to commit immorality), then the black dot will be added until it covers his heart. This is what is termed the name ‘ar raan’ which Allah mentions in His word (which means), ‘Absolutely not, actually what they always try to cover their hearts’.”

So that we can get knowledge that is useful and full of blessings, so that we must stay away from immorality, because it is immorality that will make it difficult for our brains to be able to concentrate so that the knowledge we capture will be difficult to understand.

5. Do not be arrogant when studying.

If you want to get a useful knowledge, we should be humble. Do not feel arrogant when we are satisfied with all the knowledge we already have, as Imam Mujahid said below:

It means:

“Two people who do not learn science, namely shy people and arrogant people” (Narrated by Bukhari muallaq)

6. Pay attention to the teacher when studying.

It means:

“And when the Quran is recited, then listen carefully, and pay attention quietly so that you will receive mercy.”

Listening to the teachings of the teacher or someone who is teaching us knowledge becomes an adab in studying knowledge. Don’t talk or do other things that are completely unrelated to the flow of lessons delivered when studying, meaning we need to focus on listening and listening.

Priority of Seeking Knowledge

In the Qur’an itself, Allah SWT says “So know for Allah’s knowledge! That there is no AIlah (god who has the right to be worshiped properly) except Allah and ask forgiveness for all your sins …” (QS Muhammad: 19).

Therefore, there are many advantages of seeking knowledge for everyone who is serious about doing it. Because in having very big and noble virtues, among them the virtue of seeking knowledge is

1. Knowledge is the legacy of the Prophets

Rasulullah SAW said: “And in fact the Prophets never bequeathed gold nor silver money, but for those who have passed down knowledge (ilm syar’i) whoever has taken over the inheritance then in fact he has taken part of it. a lot.” (Reported by Ahmad).

This shows that the virtue of studying is higher than money and gold which are material in nature. Because, when someone has knowledge and teaches it, then in that case it will be a charity that continues to flow even when that person has passed away.

2. Seeking knowledge is a way to heaven

Heaven is a dream for every Muslim. In fact, it has also become a promise from Allah SWT for the many good deeds that many Muslims do. So, when Allah SWT makes this knowledge the main way to the path of heaven, then this shows the great priority in seeking knowledge.

This has also got a syar’i basis, because based on a hadith when Rasulullah SAW said: “… Whoever follows a path in order to study knowledge, Allah will also make it easy for him to go to heaven…” (HR Ahmad).

3. Allah SWT Will Elevate Degrees

Related to the virtue of studying this one, in the Koran itself Allah SWT will say: “Allah raises the believers among you and those who are given knowledge by several degrees.” (Al-Mujjadi: 11).

Regarding the interpretation or meaning in this verse, Imam Syaukani said: “And the meaning of this verse is that Allah will elevate those who believe from those who do not believe, and raise several degrees for those who have knowledge (and believe) from those who are people who just by faith. So whoever combines faith and knowledge, Allah will raise him several degrees over his faith, then Allah raises his rank over all his knowledge.

4. Allah SWT wants to give good

It is a virtue of seeking further knowledge, regarding this matter in a hadith Rasulullah SAW said: “Whoever Allah wants for him goodness, Allah will make him understand his religion.” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

Shaykh Abdul ‘Aziz bin Baz interpreted: “Understand (implied meaning) from this hadith that a person who does not understand his religion means that person is one of those people whose goodness is not desired by Allah and we ask Allah for protection from something like that.”

5. Benefits that will continue to flow even after death

Rasulullah SAW said: “When Adam’s children and grandchildren die, his deeds will be cut off except by three channels: sadaqah jariyah, useful knowledge and pious children who will always pray for him.” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

Who doesn’t want to continue to be able to get rewards even though he has died. This will be obtained by people who have been serious when studying. Because, this knowledge is not only beneficial for himself, but also has an effect on others.

The priority in this knowledge should be because every Muslim is always enthusiastic and earnest in the journey of seeking knowledge.

Shaykh Az Zarnuji also said that among the important things in studying knowledge that need to be considered is fil jiddi or sincerity. If something is done with sincerity, then Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala will give success in it. In addition to sincerity (al jiddu), which also needs to be accompanied by an attitude of sincerity which is then continuous (al muwazobah) and commitment (al muzallimah) to study. These three attitudes must continue to exist within a student and go hand in hand, you cannot just live one of them.

It is obligatory for every student, who is serious, continuous, and committed, not stopping if his goals in studying knowledge can be achieved. As in the word of Allah QS. Maryam: 12 which means, “O Yahya, take the book firmly”, and in QS Al Ankabut: 69 which means, “And to those who struggle, to be able to seek our pleasure, surely We will show them the ways towards us”.

Az Zarnuji said, whoever is looking for something and does it with seriousness, they will definitely get it. And whoever knocks on the door continuously, can definitely enter. He also said that according to his sincerity, someone will definitely be able to get what he hopes for.

In the meaning of this seriousness, Az Zanurji explained that in the difficulties faced, a person will be able to finish in earnest, especially when the difficulties that have been faced during the learning process. Allah will be able to give help to someone if Allah wills. Difficulties can be resolved with sincerity to be a gift from Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala and in His power.

Seriousness in learning and deepening knowledge is not only from a student, but in this earnestness also requires the sincerity of three (3) people, namely students (students), teachers, and parents. If students, teachers, and parents are serious, God willing, this will be successful, difficulties in studying, learning will be completed.

Humans are commanded by God to learn and seek knowledge. It’s just that the quality of the human mind is with different capacities. Seriousness is the key. With such sincerity, something that is difficult will be made easy by Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala.

Related Book & Article Recommendations:

Impact of the Internet – The presence of the internet not only has many positive impacts, but also negative impacts, even though its use aims to make it easier for humans in all aspects of life.

The internet is also the widest network in information technology systems which then allows devices around the world to be connected to each other.

Because of the vastness of the internet network, this information technology also always has a positive impact as well as a negative impact on its users. The internet network can also be accessed by the public which then sends data using standard Internet Protocol (IP).

This information itself is spread on the internet and can be accessed via the World Wide Web (www) in the form of text, video, music, photos, or whatever. In its operational system, the web is also served by browsers such as Chrome, Opera, Safari, Firefox, and so on.

Quoting from The Guardian, Google also handles more than 40,000 searches per second and has 60 percent of the global browser market through Chrome. There are nearly two billion websites which then exist, most of which are not visited.

Information that can be accessed via the internet is very large and wide. How to measure the amount of information on the internet itself is about five exabytes a day. This amount is also equivalent to 40,000 films lasting two hours per second.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) website, the internet itself is defined as an electronic communication network which then connects computer networks and computer facilities. The connection between these two networks is organized around the world by telephone or satellite.

Meanwhile, in the Class IX Kemdikbud Information and Communication Technology book it is stated that the internet is a network of millions of computers around the world, connected via the TCP/IP protocol.

Initially, the internet as a computer network was formed by the United States Department of Defense in 1969 through the ARPA (Advanced Research Project Agency) project. Then, ARPA itself decided to conduct research on how to connect a number of computers so that they formed an organic network.

According to the Class IX Information and Communication Technology book which was later published by the Ministry of National Education’s Bookkeeping Center in 2010 and written by Mashadi and Arif Dwi Armawan, this research program became known as ARPANet.

They also linked several UNIX-based computers over long distances over telephone lines so that the computers could communicate with each other.

UNIX is a computer operating system that started with the Multics project in 1965. Then, this project itself designed how the network would look like, reliability, and how much data or information would be transferred from one computer to another.

The first network was then built by connecting four places, namely the University of California Santa Barbara (UCSB), University of Utah, University of California Los Angeles (UCLA), and Stanford Research Institute (SRI). Until 1972 the internet then has connected more than 20 computers. ARPANet itself is an internetworking backbone for educational institutions, research, industry, and contractors, especially those related to military networks.

Negative Impact of the Internet

1. Lack of face-to-face communication

It sounds very ironic when the lack of face-to-face communication is cited as one of the negative effects of the Internet because the Internet is supposed to bring people closer too.

But the reality is that somehow many people find it easier to communicate via the Internet than face-to-face.

The ease of communication offered by the internet will also make you prefer discussions through chat applications and messages available on the internet. This will also affect your personal relationships with friends and family.

Because somehow, the habit of liking and chatting online will separate you from real world life.

2. Lack of creativity

One of the important features of the Internet is that it is an unlimited source of information. This feature will also benefit users with quick access to the information they need later easily.

However, this will also make you less creative because whether you realize it or not, the ease of getting all the information you need from the internet itself will increase plagiarism, which will lead to a lack of creativity.

3. Cyberbullying

Cyber ​​bullying is basically a term to describe bullying in using the Internet. The disadvantages alone can be considered as one of the most sinister negative effects of the Internet. Many people have become victims of cyber bullying.

Internet users are also more vulnerable to becoming victims of bullying because the method of bullying on the internet is also safer and easier than physical bullying because there are almost no regulations or laws to control the problem of cyber bullying.

Victims of cyberbullying may also feel humiliated or embarrassed by mean or bad comments and opinions. Negative effects will be worse in adolescents, especially in those who are in puberty with all the vulnerabilities and sensitivities they have.

There are several cases of victims of cyber bullying that will make the victim go crazy and eventually commit suicide.

4. Ignoring family and people around

Excessive use of something then always creates side effects, and the Internet is no exception. When you will use the internet too much, you will unconsciously ignore your family and those closest to you.

When you spend most of your time surfing the Internet, you also become insensitive to real life and the people around you, including your own family members. The original purpose of using the Internet is to open doors to new worlds, not to shut oneself off from real life.

For most teenagers and millennials, the internet is also the only friend they can have, while family and close friends are replaced by hours of browsing the internet.

This will also cause you to ignore your family and make you feel hesitant to talk or interact with the people around you.

Negative Impact of Internet on Children

Many benefits will be felt with advances in technology and with the internet. The functions of the internet in everyday life include facilitating and completing work, communicating with other people, or developing skills through various online training.

However, you must be aware of the positive and negative impacts of the internet, especially for children who are not yet filtering information. Following are the negative impacts of the internet on children:

1. Stretching social relationships

Children who are then addicted to gadgets tend to spend a lot of time in the room and lack interaction with other people. If allowed to drag on, the child will then find it difficult to get along with school friends or with family.

Even though with the positive impact of the internet then by making friends from cyberspace, direct social interaction in the real world is still very much needed for the growth and development of children.

2. Tend to isolate themselves

Along with the high amount of time spent with the device, the intensity of indoor activities continues to increase. Children will also become less concerned and responsive to the conditions around them. When you decide to buy a new gadget for your child, try to make rules that will protect their social life.

3. Being a grumpy person

When children have started to feel obsessed with gadgets, they will also overreact when their favorite electronic devices are kept away from them. They become irritable and often have tantrums.

Before children experience this, it is very important to be able to set the duration and make rules regarding the use of gadgets.

4. Got a bad influence

On social media, children will also interact with people with various characters. Without supervision, children can get various bad effects from parties with malicious intent.

In addition, shows that are not educational can also be the main cause of children having various bad habits, such as being happy to hit, shout, or being a rebellious child.

Steps to Deal with Negative Internet Impacts

How to prevent the negative impact of the internet? The amount of negative news related to internet use for children can then make parents worry when children spend more time with devices. In fact, these bad things will also be overcome by means of proper supervision.

1. Teaches the importance of privacy

There are still quite a lot of children who then do not understand the dangers of data misuse. So it is very important for parents to be able to teach the boundaries of privacy that can be shared in cyberspace.

Prohibit children from including various personal information such as telephone numbers, emails, home addresses and school addresses, as well as passwords, or certain photos. Also explain the various possibilities that can occur if someone uses their personal information, such as the case of kidnapping in the school environment that occurs by relying on photos from social media.

2. Applying restrictions on internet play

Also provide a list of any sites that they cannot access while playing the internet, such as pornographic sites, online games full of violence, gambling sites, or making acquaintances with strangers without their parents’ knowledge. Don’t hesitate to also discuss with the child the sanctions that will be received if they violate these limits.

3. Explain about cyber bullying

Playing social media will be fun for children because they can make friends with anyone. However, you also need to explain that they still have to be kind in cyberspace friendships.

Explain that in Indonesia there is an ITE Law that protects someone from bullying and will punish the perpetrator. Ask your child to be able to tell you a story when they were victims of cyber bullying. Establish a closer emotional connection with children so that they can be open to various problems they face.

4. Take advantage of parental control features

Also activate the parental control settings that are usually available on the device. This feature will assist parents in managing what sites children can display and watch. On search engines like Google, you can also activate safe search so that sites that are not child-friendly will be filtered out.

However, you also still have to carry out periodic checks regarding children’s internet use to ensure that there are no harmful messages or inappropriate viewing that accidentally escapes the settings.

5. Provide other activities

Usually, children who are dependent on gadgets begin with no interesting activities that they can do. So to overcome this you can prepare various activities that children like. The busier the children are with their activities, the less time they need to surf in cyberspace.

Internet Related Books

1. Watch out!! Evil Internet Stalking Your Child

This anxiety arises for parents who have children who are underage or teenagers at this time, because these negative sites and things can have a bad impact on them, especially if you can’t accompany your children all the time while they are using it. Internet.

In addition, of course you want your child not to tamper with important files on your computer. There is one way to outsmart is to use Parental Control. You can use the tips and tricks the Caution! Evil Internet Stalking Your Child like:

• Securing Your Important Data on Computer
• Install the Most Reliable Anti virus
• Web Browser Settings for Safe Use
• Installing Some Security Apps

2. Internet Business Classroom: Affiliate Marketing

If you are still thinking about renting a shop or getting up early just to catch up on attendance, you should read this book to see other opportunities in doing business in modern times. This book will introduce you to the fastest growing internet affiliate business today.

If you have physical or virtual products such as eBooks, videos, audio, software, scripts and the like, you can sell them by utilizing a global network throughout the world. Many networks are available for it.

If you don’t have a product to sell, you can use the affiliate network to get a variety of potential products that can give you up to 80% profit, just by placing your banner in a potential place.

Sometimes, you don’t even need to have a super busy website to do it. You just need a super precise strategy.

3. Awesome! Become a Billionaire with the Internet

The trick is to run an online business. This book describes the sundries of online business in full. You will be invited to realize the great opportunity to make exorbitant profits through online business, how to run it in a practical and easy way, as well as tips on dealing with various challenges in it.

So you have to absorb as much knowledge from this book as you can before you get into the online business world. After that, make sure you pursue an online business in full totality. As time goes by, you will definitely reap big profits that you never imagined before. Good luck!

Those are some of the positive and negative impacts of the internet that we need to be aware of. Sinaumed’s can read internet-related books that you can get at sinaumedia.com so you have #MoreWithReading information.

Getting to Know the History of the Origin of the Platter Dance and the Meaning of Each
Movement – ​​Do you know about plate dance? This time the author will explain
the history of the dance to the meaning in each of its movements. As we know, Indonesia has
many beautiful cultures that should be preserved. One of them is the dance culture.

There are more than 17,000 islands spread across Indonesia and within the islands there are 34 provinces
inhabited by various tribes. There are approximately 1,340 tribes spread across the islands in
Indonesia. Each tribe must have its own customs, uniqueness and culture, such as regional
songs, regional dances and many more. The existence of these diverse tribes is what makes
Indonesia rich in culture. This cultural wealth must be maintained and preserved so that it is
not lost and forgotten.

Each region must have cultural performances that are held regularly, this is done so that the younger
generation or today’s generation do not forget about their own identity and culture. They must
know that their country is a country rich in culture. Therefore, they should be proud and learn
about the culture in their area.

They can do performances such as their regional dance performances. Regional dance
performances are always the main attraction for a region. There are many types of regional
dances in Indonesia, one of which is the typical dance of West Sumatra province, the plate dance.

Origin of Plate Dance

The plate dance is a traditional dance originating from Minangkabau, traditionally it can be said that the plate
dance originates from Solok, West Sumatra

Definition of Plate Dance

The plate dance is a traditional dance originating from Minangkabau, traditionally it can be said that the
plate dance originates from Solok, West Sumatra. This dance displays the action of dancing
attractions using plates. The dancers will swing the plates in their palms in sync with the
accompaniment music and move quickly and regularly without letting go or letting any plates fall.
The plate dance movement is taken from the Minangkabau silat movement or commonly called
silek.

Plate dance was popularized by Huriah Adam. In modern times, the plate dance is usually used
as a greeting to welcome honored guests or is also usually used for the opening of a traditional ceremony.
The plate dance is very popular in Indonesia, along with other dances, such as the saman, jaipong,
and pendet dances which are often used as dances to welcome distinguished guests at several events and are
used as a means of promoting tourism and culture in Indonesia.

History of Plate Dance

As stated above, it is said that the traditional plate dance came from Solok, West Sumatra. We
quote this history from the Ministry of Education and Culture that it is estimated that plate dance has
existed since the 12th century. Very long isn’t it? In the past, Minangkabau
people still believed in gods. At first, the plate dance was used as a dance for worship by the
community to the Goddess of Rice every harvest season, the community did this as a thank you for the success
of their harvest.

The plate dance is also a form of traditional dance that is rich in high aesthetic values ​​and also has deep
ancestral cultural values ​​so that dance can be a form of thanksgiving and a picture of the people’s deep
gratitude to the gods who have fertilized and produced results. their harvest will not fail.

The ritual is usually carried out by the local community by bringing several offerings, usually the offerings are
brought in the form of food and then the offerings will be placed on a plate while taking steps with regular,
synchronous and dynamic movements.

However, since the arrival of Arab traders in Indonesia who brought Islam to Indonesia, the local people’s
belief in this plate dance slowly began to change. Not only the public’s belief in the dance,
but also the dance concept of this plate dance has also changed. Currently, plate dance is used
as a medium of entertainment such as for weddings, traditional events or even performances to receive
guests, as well as a means of education for the younger generation to get to know and learn about their
culture.

The plate dance has succeeded in breaking a world record, they danced the plate dance with more than 2,000
dancers dancing it. Everyone with various types of professions participated in breaking the
world record.

Every movement contained in the plate dance has a different meaning. The plate dance dancers
usually carry two plates placed on their palms. Then, the plates will be swayed to follow the
dance movements which are getting faster and faster.

Usually, at the end of the dance, the dancer will slam the plate on the floor until it breaks and scatters,
then the dancer will continue to dance on the broken plate. It is said that these plates have
been given a prayer so as not to hurt the feet of the dancers.

A dance without music seems like something is missing, so that it is more lively. The Plate Dance is
accompanied by typical musical instruments from West Sumatra, namely Saluang and Talempong. The
combination of the typical music of West Sumatra with the agile movements of the dancers makes the plate
dance even more amazing.

The Meaning of Plate Dance Movement

At least the plate dance has 20 movements performed by the dancers. The 20 movements have
different meanings, here are the names and meanings of each plate dance movement:

1. Pasambahan Movement

This movement is a movement to start the dance performed by male dancers. The Pasambahan
movement is interpreted as a form of gratitude to God and a form of request by the dancers to everyone
watching not to disturb the dance.

2. Singajuo Lalai Movement

The movements of the negligent singanjuo are performed by female dancers, the movements created from this
dance are gentle and graceful movements. This is because the movement of singajuo neglects to
be interpreted to symbolize the atmosphere in the cool morning.

3. Hoeing

As can be seen from the name, this movement symbolizes the movement of the dancers when cultivating their fields
in the plate dance.

4. Afternoon Movement

This movement is also taken from the activities of farmers in the fields, namely weeding.
Weeding itself is an activity of cleaning the fields from weeds or weeds. The dancers
also use these activities in plate dance movements.

5. Throwing Garbage Movement

This movement is a continuation of the farmer’s activities in the weeding movement, namely removing grass or
trash.

6. Sowing Movement

Furthermore, the sowing movement is also taken from agricultural activities in the fields. The
movement of sowing the plate dance is like sowing rice seeds to be planted.

As explained earlier, there are 20 movements in the plate dance that are exhibited when performing the plate
dance, then 14 movements, in addition to the six movements above in the plate dance, namely:

• Fencing movement
• The movement of removing the seed
• Resentment movement
• The movement of delivering prayers
• Paddy mowing movement
• Movement to take rice
• Paddy paddy movement
• Movement of aerating rice
• Paddy threshing movement
• The movement of pounding rice
• Mutual cooperation movement
• Rice winnowing movement
• The movement of stepping on broken glass

Properties used in the Plate Dance

The interesting thing about the plate dance is, of course, its main property, which is the plate, but of course
there are other properties that make the plate dance more attractive to many people, the following are the
properties in the plate dance:

1. Plate

As the name suggests, the main property of this dance is definitely the plate. The plate is
placed on top of the dancer’s pliers, each dancer carries two plates in his right and left hands.

2. Musical Instruments

Each dance must be accompanied by music, the musical instruments used are drums and are equipped with saluang and
talempong, namely natural music made of metal.

3. Resin

Another property of plate dance is resin. Damar is used by giving a hole so that the tips of
the middle fingers of the right and left hands can be inserted into the hole.
Then,
while dancing, damar is tapped on the plate according to the music. This was done to make
the plate dance more lively.

4. Costumes

The final property is of course the costume, the ancient plate dance costume such as the pencak silat
costume with black pants. However, to make it even more festive, the plate dance costumes are
colorful. This special costume has the name baju kuning made of velvet or satin with floral
motifs. The plate dance also uses a codek cloth similar to a sarong.

Thus the article about plate dance. Starting from its history to the meaning in every
movement. It is hoped that this article will make the reader aware of the plate dance movements
which have a different meaning from the movements which are mostly taken from the activities of farmers in
the fields, as well as the various properties that are added to enliven the plate dance.

Characteristics of Plate Dance

When talking about the culture that Indonesia has, it will never end. Including this one
culture, namely the plate dance or piriang dance. Every culture and art in Indonesia must have
its own characteristics. Where these characteristics will distinguish between one culture to
another culture.

As previously explained, the distinctive features of the plate dance are in the movements, costumes,
clothing, and also the music used. So that you understand more about the characteristics of
this dance dadi, let’s see the explanation below:

1. Clothing

Each dance in various regions has a distinctive dress or costume when the dance is performed.
Well, the clothes on the plate dance are divided into two kinds. The first is clothing
for female dancers and the second is clothing for male dancers.

Below is the clothing or costumes worn by plate dancers.

Male Dancer Clothing

The costumes worn by male dancers have different characteristics from the clothing worn by female dancers.
However, it still does not leave the characteristics of Minangkabau customs and culture.

For male dancer costumes, usually wear clothes that have long sleeves or can be called Rang Mudo clothes.

The clothes for male dancers are also equipped with accessories and gold lace decorations or commonly known
as missia decorations. While the lower area of ​​​​clothes uses pants which are referred to as
wave sizes. These pants are quite large in the middle.

The color of the pants is also adjusted to the top clothes. So that it looks harmonious and
similar.

Not only that, male dancers also wear a number of additional accessories such as cawek waist and sisimpek.
The waist cawek is a cloth that is shaped like a songket cloth and is tied at the waist.
This accessory is from waist to knee and is decorated with tassels. During the
performance, male dancers will wear head coverings. This headband or head covering is made of
songket cloth which is formed into a triangular shape.

Female Dancer Clothing

Usually, the costume worn by female dancers is the clothes of the brackets. This shirt is a
typical Minangkabau dress made of velvet and satin. Female dancers will also use decorations or
accessories in the form of scarves made of songket cloth and placed on the left shoulder.

Not only male dancers, female dancers also wear horn-shaped head coverings. This head cover is
usually also known as tikuluak horns Balapak. This head cover is made of songket cloth.

For additional decorations used in plate dance clothing, namely kaling gadang, earring, and tassel
necklaces. Subang is a typical Minang earring worn by female dancers. So that the
dancers will look more attractive, beautiful, and unique.

2. Dishes As Main Media

One characteristic of this dance is the use of plates as the main medium or property for dancing.
The plates used in this dance have their own meaning or philosophy. In addition, there
is an amazing thing about using this property, namely the plate that is brought for dancing never falls even
though it is swung.

Initially, the plates used as props in this dance used plates that came from China. The use of
plates originating from China is not without reason. So, the plate dance uses dishes from China
because these plates have their own aesthetics and are of good quality.

3. Dancing on Broken Plates

This is one of the characteristics of the plate dance that you may not know about. In the
performance, usually the dancers will perform attractions by dancing on broken plates. This
will generally be done at the end of the performance. The dancers will throw the plate on the
floor until it breaks. Then, the dancers will walk and step on and dance on the broken
plates.

Surely you are wondering, are the dancers not injured? Well, this is the hallmark of
Indonesian culture. There is always something amazing and beyond reason. So when
the dancers step on and dance on broken glass. They won’t be hurt at all. Even
their legs would look fine.

4. Ring Clink

In addition to using plates as the main medium in dancing. The dancers will also use the ring
to make a ringing sound which is the hallmark of this dance. The sound produced from rings and
plates will give a special impression. Where the tones and strains of music from rings, plates,
and other music will blend together.

5. Accompanied by Traditional Musical Instruments.

In addition to using the tone of the ring and plate clink. This dance also uses traditional
musical instruments as its accompaniment. Various musical instruments such as gongs, fiddle,
saluang, tambourine, talempong, and many other musical instruments make the musical accompaniment sound more
unique and have its own characteristics.

Each musical instrument used to accompany the dance has its own function. For example, the
gong serves as a guide for movement and determines the steps that need to be taken by the dancers.
Then the tambourine instrument will give a lively impression and increase the enthusiasm of the
dancers. Meanwhile, you can see saluang and talempong musical instruments in
Minangkabau.

Those are some explanations about the plate dance along with its history and characteristics of the dance.
As good citizens, of course we must preserve all the culture that we have from ancient times.
As the next generation of the nation, we must not neglect and forget the culture of our own
country.

Recommended Books & Articles Related to Plate
Dance

Get to Know the History and Characteristics of Magnets – Who has loved playing magnets
since childhood? Or does Sinaumed’s like to be surprised to see a magnet stuck to the refrigerator
at home? Why can a magnet attract metal?

Can all types of metal be pulled? So that Sinaumed’s is no longer confused by seeing magnets that
like to attract or push each other, consider the following explanation.

History of Magnets

Derived from the name of a region in ancient Greece, the terms magnet, magnetism, and magnetic appeared
around the 600s BC. The word magnet itself is actually taken from the Greek “magnitis lithos”
which means magnesian stone.

In a region called Magnesia, the Greeks discovered a natural stone that strongly attracted iron.
The object was then given the name magnetite according to where it was found.

Until now the general public knows him as a magnet. After being observed, it turns out that
the ability of magnetite or magnets is able to attract objects around it with magnetic poles.

Since 4,500 years ago, the Chinese have used magnets in everyday life. The Chinese nation
itself initially used magnets as a therapeutic tool for doing acupuncture.

A biomagnetic inventor Michaell Faraday conducted research on magnetic healing. In addition,
the Chinese used magnets as directions or compasses.

Its use is relatively easy, at that time a compass was made by floating a magnetic needle on the surface of
the water. Since then, the use of magnets as a direction guide has continued to grow to
Europeans.

Objects that are able to attract other objects around them with special properties are called magnets.
Magnets can also be interpreted as any material that can attract iron metal. Each
magnet certainly has magnetic properties.

What is the property of magnetism? What is meant by magnetic properties is the magnetic force
with its ability to attract other objects around it. Magnets as we know them can be made of
iron, steel, or a mixture of other metals.

Magnets that can attract certain objects are often known as sembrani iron. The two ends of the
magnet have the strongest attraction and the center of the magnet has no magnetic attraction or is
neutral.

The two poles of such a strong magnet are called the positive pole and the negative pole. The
north pole of a magnet will always face north of Earth and the south pole of a magnet will always face south
of Earth. Hmm, why is that? It all happens because of the influence of the earth’s
strong magnetic field.

A leading English scientist discovered the earth’s magnetic field in 1600. The scientist put
forward a theory that the earth affects all magnetic bodies as a giant bar magnet.

Reporting from NASA, the earth’s core is in the form of a solid electromagnetic surrounded by a liquid core
(liquid nickel and iron) that conducts electric current. Well, an electric current in the
molten core will cause the Earth’s magnetic field to be strong. The magnetic field covers the
entire earth and outer space around it.

Illustration of a Magnet (source: m.tribunnews.com)

How many forms of magnet do you know? There are irregular shapes of magnets and some that have
been adjusted. Irregular magnets you can find in a mine. Meanwhile, customized
magnets are magnets that are made according to the needs.

Magnets come in various forms, namely bar magnets, horseshoe magnets, needle magnets, cylindrical magnets,
and ring magnets. As the name implies, bar magnets are magnets that are shaped like rods,
blocks, or small cubes.

Magnets of this shape are often used for door locks on glass cabinets and wooden cabinets. In
addition, Sinaumed’s can find magnets of this shape as covers for objects, such as gift boxes, pencil cases,
and so on.

Then the horseshoe magnet is a horseshoe-shaped magnet or a horse’s sole. This U-shaped magnet
is useful for lifting magnetic objects.

Furthermore, a needle magnet is a flat magnet, elongated, and tends to be sharp. Magnets of
this shape are often used as compass directions.

A cylindrical magnet will appear round and flat. Magnets of this shape are almost similar to
bar magnets. Cylinder magnets are commonly used for glass cabinet door locks, wooden cabinets,
pencil case covers, gift box covers, and so on.

While the ring magnet has a circular shape with a hole in the middle. Magnets of this shape
are often used in making loudspeakers or speakers on radios, cinemas and cell phones.

In addition, ring magnets are also commonly used in electric motor engines. Despite being made
in a variety of sizes, shapes, and strengths, magnets always have two poles. The existence of
the two poles (north and south) is inseparable from the existence of a magnetic domain .

Sinaumed’s must have often wondered, where do magnets actually come from? When viewed based on
its origin, magnets are divided into natural magnets and artificial magnets. Let’s discuss them
one by one.

First, scientifically created natural magnets have had magnetic properties since they were discovered.
This type of magnet is usually in the form of rocks that have permanent properties.

When found, this naturally formed magnet already has the ability to attract objects around it.
Second, artificial magnets are one of the man-made magnets.

The ever-increasing need for magnets has driven the manufacture of magnets. Over time, humans
began to be able to make artificial magnets. These magnets are made of strong magnetic
materials such as steel and iron.

Characteristics and Properties of Magnets

Magnets of any shape and type will always exhibit the same properties. The overall nature of
the magnet becomes a natural law that applies to all types of magnets.

Magnets with all their properties have been widely used by humans in everyday life. Then, what
are the properties of magnets? How is it implemented? Check out the following
review to the end, OK?

1. Can Attract Other Objects

You must be very familiar with the nature of this one magnet. The first characteristic of a
magnet is its ability to attract other objects around it. However, keep in mind that not all
objects can be attracted by a magnet.

Objects that can be attracted are only objects that have magnetic potential or are often known as magnetic
objects. Whether or not an object is attracted by a magnet is classified into three types,
namely ferromagnetic, paramagnetic, and diamagnetic.

• Ferromagnetic

Materials with ferromagnetic properties are strongly attracted by magnets, such as iron, steel, nickel and
cobalt. If you have a ferromagnetic type of object close to a magnet, the magnet will attract
it very strongly.

• Paramagnetic

Paramagnets are objects that have a weak magnetic attraction, such as aluminum, copper, tungsten, and platinum.

• Diamagnetic

Objects with diamagnetic properties cannot be attracted by a magnet at all, such as plastic, wood, and
gold. Diamagnetic are objects that repel magnets despite being very close to such a strong
magnet.

Through the explanation above, Sinaumed’s can see that objects that can be attracted by magnets are objects
with ferromagnetic (strong attraction) and paramagnetic (weak attraction) types. In everyday
life the magnetic properties that can attract other objects have been widely applied, for example in lifting
equipment and refrigerator doors that can be closed tightly.

2. Always Point North and South

The magnet known as celestial iron has a tendency to always point north and south. If Sinaumed’s
freely hangs a magnet by a string, the magnet will point north and south.

Why is that? As previously explained, the reason is none other than because magnets are
directly related to the earth’s magnetism. As is known, the earth is seen as a magnet that has
two poles with a force of attraction between the magnet and the poles of the earth.

3. Always Have Two Poles

The third property, magnets always have two poles, namely north and south. That’s where the
magnetic force appears so strong. Whatever the shape or size of the magnet, these poles always
exist in pairs and are inseparable.

Even if it is cut into smaller pieces, the two poles will never disappear. If Sinaumed’s cuts a
bar magnet in half, the magnet will form two new poles.

Illustration of a Cut Magnet (source: physics.co.id)

4. Common Name Poles Repel and
Non-Name Poles Attract

Another magnetic property is that common poles (north-north or south-south) will repel and unlike poles
(north-south) will attract. The force of repulsion and attraction of the magnetic poles occurs
because they are in a magnetic field.

What is a magnetic field? The magnetic field is an area or room around a magnet that has a
magnetic influence in the form of repulsion or attraction. The strength of the magnetic field
is often indicated by lines of force leaving the north pole and lines of force entering the
south pole .

Illustration of Magnetic Repulsion (source: physics.co.id)

Illustration of Magnetic Attraction (source: physics.co.id)

If the two north poles are brought closer to each other, there will be a repulsive force because the
lines of force will not enter the other north pole. Vice versa, if you replace it with a
south pole ( south) the line of force coming out of the north pole will go straight
to the south pole.

It can be said that a magnet consists of small magnets that line up from the north pole towards the south
pole. Instead, the south pole will face the magnetic north pole.

These small magnets are often referred to as elementary magnets. In its application, this
magnetic property can be seen in maglev or magnetically levitated fast trains. The train will
move by floating a few mm above the rail due to the repulsive force between the rail and the train
base.

5. The Biggest Magnetic Force is at the Two
Poles

The latter property, magnets have the greatest repulsion or attraction force at the two poles.
Generally, the two poles are located at the ends of the magnet. The two poles are
believed to hold the greatest magnetic force.

Why so? Again, this is caused by the magnetic field lines of force leaving the north pole and
entering the south pole. The other parts of the magnetic body still have a force, it’s just
that the portion is smaller than the force that these two poles have.

The following are the conclusion points from the properties of magnets.

• Has the ability to attract other objects.
• Always point north and south.
• Always has two poles in pairs, namely north and south.
• Common poles repel each other and unlike poles attract each other.
• The greatest magnetic force is located at the two poles.

Well, now Sinaumed’s understands the meaning of magnets and their properties , right?
It turns out that magnets have an inseparable north pole and south pole. So, don’t
be surprised if there is a tug-of-war or repulsion between the magnet and certain objects.

Book & Article Recommendations

Functions of Water for Humans, Animals and Plants – All plants, animals and humans also need water to survive. In other words, there is no life on earth that does not need water. Why is water so important? This is because more than 60% of our body weight consists of water. In fact, the body also uses water in all cells, organs, and tissues, to help regulate body temperature and in maintaining other body functions.

Basically, our body will lose water through breathing, sweating, and digestion, it is very important to continue to rehydrate and replace water by drinking fluids and eating foods that contain water.

To find out what the functions of water are for humans, animals and plants, you can refer to this article, Sinaumed’s.

Functions of Water for Humans

1. Water as a Forming Cell and Body Fluid

Water is one of the main components of cells, besides fat. More or less there is about 70-85% water content in body cells, while fat then has a percentage of less than 10%. Not only being the main component of cells, but water can also be regarded as one of the main components of blood, which contains 82% water.

So, this implies that the function of water is to help form various body fluids. In addition, the function of water also plays a role in the formation of gastric juices, hormones, enzymes, and other fluids in the body. In fact, water is also present in the muscles of the body and has a function in maintaining muscle tone, so that the muscles are able to contract.

2. Water Regulates Body Temperature

Water also has a very important role in regulating temperature in the body. One of the functions of water is to produce, absorb, and conduct heat to all parts of the body and then maintain a stable body temperature. Apart from playing a role in producing, absorbing, and delivering heat to the body, water also functions to cool the body temperature through the production of sweat.

It should also be noted that most of the sweat that comes out of our bodies also consists of water and salt. Through the process of sweat production, it can be said that water in the body can cool the body temperature.

Besides being able to produce sweat, the function of water will also help the process of cooling body temperature through evaporation from the surface of the skin. In fact, this evaporation can also be interpreted as excess heat coming out of the body. The two cooling processes in the body, including sweating and evaporation of water from the surface of the skin, cause the temperature to decrease. That way, body temperature becomes more stable.

3. Water as a Solvent

The next function of water for the body is as a solvent. That’s right, this water is believed to be able to dissolve various nutrients that enter the body, as well as help the digestive process of the food we will consume. Therefore, water can help produce saliva when food arrives in the mouth, then dissolves the liquid, and can lubricate food so that it can enter smoothly into the esophagus.

Due to its nature as an inorganic substance, water can flow easily in the digestive process. This water can quickly pass through the small intestine where most of it is absorbed and then also functions as a component of mucus so that the remaining food substances enter the body which can then be excreted as feces. Apart from being a solvent, the function of this water also has a role as a reactant in biochemical reactions.

Large molecules, such as polysaccharides, fats, and proteins, are then broken down into smaller molecules. From the process of breaking these molecules in dire need of water. This is because water is also a major component in blood, saliva, urine, and lymph, water which also plays an important role in dissolving minerals, vitamins, glucose, and other nutrients so that these substances can be delivered to every cell and function properly.

4. Water As a Lubricant and Bearing

The next function of water for the body is as a lubricant or it can form fluid in the joints. Because water has a large percentage in the body, this fluid can make it easier for joints to move, so that the body becomes easier to move. In addition, water can also reduce friction between one joint and another.

For example, cartilage at the ends of long bones contains a lot of water which functions as a lubricant. When this bone contains enough water, the two joint surfaces can then shift smoothly and damage caused by friction is minimized.

Conversely, if the cartilage does not get enough water, then there is an increased possibility of damage due to friction, which can cause pain in the joint area. The function of water is also known as a shock absorbing fluid cushion in body tissues such as the brain, eyes, amniotic sac in the uterus, and spinal cord.

Meanwhile, as a cushion, the function of this water is to keep these organs from experiencing a lot of vibration so they can work properly.

5. Water Protects Tissues, Spine, and Joints

The benefits of water for life not only quench thirst and regulate body temperature, but water can also make the tissues in the body moist. Plus, water can keep the body hydrated and help it maintain optimal moisture levels in these sensitive areas, as well as in the blood, bones and brain. In addition, water will also help protect the spinal cord, and act as a lubricant and cushion for the joint areas.

6. Water helps the body get rid of waste

Adequate water intake allows the body to excrete waste through sweat, from urination, and during bowel movements. According to the National Kidney Foundation , the benefits of water for life, apart from helping the kidneys remove waste from the blood, are also to keep the blood vessels that will flow to the kidneys then open and filter it.

As reported by the University of Rochester Medical Center. In fact, water is also very important in helping prevent constipation. However, as studies have noted, there is no evidence to suggest that increasing fluid intake will subsequently cure constipation.

7. Water Prevents Dehydration

According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention , the body will lose fluids when you do strenuous exercise, sweat in hot weather, or contract an illness which will then cause vomiting or diarrhea. If you lose fluids for one of these reasons, it is very important for you to restore fluids properly, so you can avoid dehydration.

The doctor may also advise you to drink more fluids so that it can help treat other health conditions, including bladder infections and urinary tract stones.

Meanwhile, if you are pregnant or breastfeeding, you should consult with your doctor about fluid intake. This is necessary because the body will use more fluids than usual, especially if you are breastfeeding.

Functions of Water for Animals

After discussing the function of water for humans, the next discussion is the function of water for animals. The following is the function of water for animals.

1. To Smooth Digestion

The first function of water for animals is to facilitate animal digestion. As with humans, animals also need adequate fluid intake so that digestion runs smoothly. Therefore, when animals have difficulty getting clean water, they can get sick or even die.

2. Maintain Body Temperature

Apart from improving digestion, the next function of water for animals is to maintain body temperature. With the presence of water, animals can feel cold when they are in very hot air. For example, when the temperature is hot, the animal will soak in the water. In fact, water can maintain the body, so that animals avoid disease.

3. Milk Production

The next function of water for animals is to help the mother produce milk. That way the milk needs of the mother are still fulfilled.

4. Drink

It is common that the function of water for animals is to drink. By drinking enough water, animals can avoid dehydration. The amount of water needed by the animals themselves varies depending on the body weight of each animal.

5. Water serves as a place to live

For some animals, water serves as their natural habitat, such as fish, shrimp, clams, whales, and so on.

6. Water Serves As A Cleaning Tool

Water for animals also serves to cleanse the body. Like humans, animals also need water to clean their bodies. For example, in buffalo animals that clean the body by entering the water.

Functions for Plants

One of the living things that should not be forgotten is the plant. In fact, the plant itself needs water to survive. The following is the function of water for plants.

1. For aquatic plants serves as one of the main components for the process of photosynthesis. In fact, you could say that water is a source of energy in the process of photosynthesis. There is a lot of energy which is then used in the process of photosynthesis, so that the need for water for plants becomes higher.
2. Water functions for the formation of protoplasm.
3. Water functions as a nutrient solvent when the process of entering minerals from the soil into plants which then distributes them to all parts of the plant body.
4. Water also functions as a compound that is utilized for plant metabolic reaction processes.
5. Water can work as a reactant that affects various reactions in metabolic processes.
6. Water functions as a producer of mechanical energy during the process of enlargement and cell division.
7. Water will maintain the turgidity of the cells and keep them in good condition.
8. Water functions as a compound that can be used to regulate the mechanism of movement of opening or closing stomata in plants.
9. Water functions to extend plant cells and also as a material for various plant growth and development activities.
10. Water functions to help the process of respiration in plants.
11. Water functions as a transport medium that can move the results of the photosynthesis process.
12. Water is used as a medium in the process of biochemistry, because water is also an excellent solvent in biochemical processes.
13. Water has a function to regulate the temperature in plants to remain stable, because it has high heat and can regulate heat in plants.

Closing

From all the explanations above, it can be said that water is very useful for the life of living things in this world. It’s hard to imagine what will happen when there is water again, surely it will be difficult for living things to live. With the presence of water, living things with one another can complement each other.

Therefore, we should all keep our water clean. This must be done so that the life of every living creature can last longer. Not only that, with sufficient clean water, we humans can be healthier and definitely fresher.

In fact, humans themselves need approximately 2 liters in one day. That way, the human body becomes cleaner and definitely healthier.

This is an explanation of the function of water for humans, animals and plants. So, how many liters of water have you drunk today?

Recommended Books Related to the Functions of Water for Humans, Animals and Plants

To get a more complete insight into the function of water for humans, animals and plants as well as the science of water in general, let’s read the recommendations for the best books below.

1. Come on, Get to Know Water Closer

Did you know that March 22 is World Water Day? Precisely in 1992, in its 47th session in Rio Jeneiro, the UN has set this date as the world “Water Day”. This is done to remind us of how important water is as a source of life.

Water is very necessary for the continuation of human life on planet earth. Humans cannot live without water. So do other creatures, such as animals and plants. Well, this book discusses water which is the source of life for living things.

2. I’m a Great Boy: The Importance of Clean Water

When Sani wants to take a shower, water doesn’t come out of the tap. Sani shouted for Father. Then, Father brought clean water for Sani to bathe. Mother also told me that the water that came out of the sink faucet was cloudy and smelled a bit. Is that cloudy and smelly water dangerous?

The advantages of this book include: 1. The author has been in the world of early childhood for a long time 2. Tells stories and introduces education on the importance of clean water for eating, bathing and cooking activities. 3. Children will love the funny stories and interesting illustrations. 4. Packed with important facts and education for parents and teachers. Target consumers: 1. Children (Ages 4+) 2. Parents – Teachers.

3. Harvesting Rainwater: A New Source of Drinking Water

The idea to write this book was sparked when Indonesia was hit by many problems, especially those caused by heavy rains. Flash floods occur everywhere, but then give way to prolonged dry seasons, forest fires and drought.

Communities find it difficult to obtain water, both for agriculture and for daily drinking water needs. Rainwater that falls abundantly for free is allowed to pass, even though this is a golden opportunity to be harvested. If all Indonesian people were willing to get used to using water and were more enthusiastic about harvesting rainwater and processing it for their daily needs, especially drinking water for the family, great benefits would certainly be obtained.

4. Water Governance in Paris

In 2010, Paris ended its 25-year water privatization contract and returned water management to the city government. This bold move that was initially viewed with skepticism by many parties turned out to be a success story that was used as a reference by other cities in the world. From a political decision taken by the Mayor to become a reality that went well,

Paris has gone through major technical, economic, social and cultural transformations. This book traces back the steps taken by Paris to achieve the provision of water services that are accountable, affordable and accessible to all of its residents—which is also the aspiration of the Indonesian people.

5. Water Philosophy

As a human with the majority of his body composition being water, humans should return to the origins of the purpose for which humans were created. What are the properties of that water? How much compatibility is there between the water character and the human character? What is the ideal human character or attitude? How do you respond to the reduced composition of water in the body, as a person ages?

This book aims to inspire readers to return to the khittah of the origins of human purpose. Balancing between body and mind, forgetting about weaknesses and focusing on strengths or talents. Next, try to utilize the abilities bestowed by the Creator to take care of the universe.

Hopefully the presence of this book is useful. Enjoy! “This paper about water really needs to be widely read by the public. Water is a source of life that is not only very important, but also determines the continuity of existence of all living things on earth. Happy.” – Prof. Dr. H. Ahmad Syafii Maarif, teacher of the nation.

Thus the discussion about the function of water for humans, animals, plants. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for you and it is hoped that you can participate in keeping the water clean.

If you want to find a book about water, you can get it at sinaumedia.com. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Functions of Political Parties – The existence of political parties is something that cannot be avoided in a modern society with a complex structure. This is because political parties are considered to have the ability to channel complex societal political participation. The more complex a society is, the existence of political parties will be increasingly needed as a channel for aspirations and for channeling people’s political participation.

In a book entitled Fundamentals of Political Science written by Miriam Budiarjo, she defines a political party as an organized group and its members have the same values, orientation and aspirations to achieve. The main purpose of political parties is to gain political power and to seize political positions.

Then, what is meant by a political party? What is the function of political parties? To find out, Sinaumed’s can read this article to the end!

Definition of Political Parties

Political parties or commonly referred to as political parties are one of the components or organizations that have an orientation towards power. Therefore, political parties have a fairly important role in terms of politics in a country. Without political parties, the political system will not run well.

The merits of the political system of a country can be determined from the performance of the political parties themselves. The political system itself can be interpreted as a mechanism of a set of functions, where all of these functions are attached to a political structure in order to implement and make policies that bind the people of a country. So, establishing a political party is one of the rights of Indonesian citizens.

Definition of Political Parties According to Experts

In order to better understand the meaning of political parties, here are the definitions of political parties explained by experts.

1. Miriam Budiarjo

According to Miriam Budiarjo, a political party is an organized group and its members have the same values, orientation and aspirations with the aim of being able to gain political power and win political positions. To achieve this goal, usually political parties will try to achieve it by constitutional means to implement their policies.

2. Carl J. Friedrich

Friedrich expressed the opinion that a political party is a group of people who are organized in a stable manner with the aim of seizing or maintaining control of the government for their party leaders. Based on the mastery obtained by a political party, it can provide party members with benefits that are both material and ideal.

3. H. Soltou

The definition of a political party according to H. Soltau is a group of citizens who are more or less organized and act as a political unit by utilizing the power to vote. This power aims to control the government and carry out public policies designed by the party.

4. Sigmund Neumann

Political parties according to Sigmund Neumann are organizations of political activists who seek to control government power and win support on the basis of competition against other groups that do not share the same understanding.

 

The Purpose of Political Parties in Law

In Law Number 31 of 2002 Concerning Political Parties there is a purpose for the formation of political parties listed in Article 6, which reads.

Paragraph 1: The objectives of the general party are:

• Realizing the national ideals of the Indonesian nation as referred to in the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia;
• Developing democratic life based on Pancasila by upholding people’s sovereignty in the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia; And
• Realizing prosperity for all Indonesian people.

Paragraph 2: The specific objective of political parties is to fight for their ideals in the life of society, nation and state.

Paragraph 3: The goals of political parties as referred to in paragraphs (1) and (2) are realized constitutionally.

From the political goals based on Law Number 31 of 2002 Article 6 Concerning Political Parties, it can be said that political parties themselves have general goals and specific goals. The general objective is to realize the ideals of the Indonesian nation in accordance with the 1945 Constitution, develop democratic life based on Pancasila, and realize prosperity for all Indonesian people.
Meanwhile, the specific purpose of political parties is to fight for ideals in the life of society, nation and state.

 

History of Political Parties

In the beginning, political parties were born in countries in Western Europe because there was an idea that the people should play a role and determine in the political process. Therefore, government power in the world of politics will not be too dominant and will not forget to prioritize the interests of its people. In essence, at that time the people wanted the aspirations of the people to be heard by the authorities.

Then, due to the influence of globalization, eventually Indonesia also co-founded political parties. The history of political parties in Indonesia is then divided into three periods, namely the Dutch colonial period, the Japanese occupation period and the period after the Proclamation of Independence. Here’s an explanation.

1. The Dutch Colonial Period

The Dutch colonial period is also known as the first period of the birth of political parties in Indonesia or at that time it was called the Dutch East Indies. The birth of political parties marked the presence of national awareness in society at that time.

At that time, all organizations, both those with social goals such as Budi Utomo and Muhammadiyah or those based on religious and secular politics such as the PNI, Islamic Unions and Catholic Parties also played a role in the national movement so that Indonesia could achieve independence.

The presence of political parties during the Dutch colonial period was a manifestation of national awareness to be able to achieve independence for the Indonesian nation. After the establishment of the People’s Council, this movement by several political parties was then continued within the People’s Council.

Around 1939, there were several factions in the People’s Council, including the National Fraction led by M. Husni Thamrin, the Association of Bestuur Bumi Putera Employees (PPBB) under the leadership of Prawoto and the Indonesische Nationale Groep under the leadership of Muhammad Yamin .

2. The Japanese Occupation Period

The second period of political parties is the period of the Japanese occupation. At this time, all political party activities were banned and only Muslim groups were given the freedom to form parties, namely the Indonesian Muslim Syuro Council Party (Masyumi Party). This party is more active in the social field than the political field.

3. The Post-Proclamation of Independence Period

The third period is the period after the Proclamation of Independence, namely several months after the Proclamation of Independence. At this time, there was ample opportunity to establish political parties, so that other Indonesian political parties began to appear. Thus, Indonesia returns to the pattern of a system of many political parties.

Elections in 1995 gave rise to four major political parties such as Masyumi, NU, PNI and PKI. Then, from 1950 to 1959, it is often referred to as the heyday of political parties. This is because political parties play an important role in the life of a state with a parliamentary system.

Then, the multi-party system did not work properly. Political parties cannot carry out their functions properly, so that the cabinet falls up and down and is unable to carry out its work program. As a result, development does not run smoothly and well. Then, during the democratic period, parliamentary ended with the Decree of July 5, 1959 which represented the period of guided democracy.

Then, after Indonesia’s independence, Indonesia also adopted a multi-party system, so many political parties began to form. Then, when entering the New Order era, namely around 1965 to 1998, political parties in Indonesia only numbered three parties.

The three political parties are the United Development Party, Golongan Karya and the Indonesian Democratic Party. During the reform period, Indonesia then returned to adopting a multi-party system. Then, in 2012, the People’s Representative Council (DPR RI) revised Law Number 2 of 2008 which discussed political parties.

The Functions of Existing Political Parties in Indonesia

In accordance with the contents of the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution and the Body of the Constitution which explains that Indonesia uses a multi-party system, namely a system in which the election of the head of state or people’s representatives is through general elections followed by many political parties.

This multi-party system is embraced by Indonesia, because of the diversity possessed by Indonesian society as a large archipelagic country. In it, there are various differences ranging from religion, race, ethnicity to social groups. Therefore, multi-party is embraced by Indonesia to be able to distribute racial ties or also known as primordial in Indonesia in one container.

In the existing democratic system in Indonesia, the formation of political parties has several functions. Here’s an explanation.

1. Parties as a Means of Political Communication

A political party has several tasks and one of them is to channel a wide variety of people’s inspirations and opinions and regulate differences of opinion in society, so that these differences can be reduced.

Community opinions that have been channeled will then be accommodated and put together in order to create a common goal. The process of combining opinions and inspiration is known as merging interests.

On the other hand, political parties are the subject of discussion to disseminate a decision and policy from the government. Political parties also function as intermediaries between citizens and their governments. In this case, the intermediary acts as a listener for the government and a loudspeaker for the people.

2. Parties as a Means of Political Socialization

Political parties have a role as a means of political socialization. According to political science, political socialization is a process in which a person acquires an attitude and orientation towards political phenomena and usually applies in the community that lives in an area.

In general, the process of socialization runs gradually from childhood to adulthood. In this case, a political party can be regarded as a means of political socialization. To control the government through victory with general elections, political parties must get the widest possible support.

3. Parties as a Means of Political Recruitment

Political parties have the function of finding and inviting people who have talent to participate in political party activities as party members or what is called political recruitment.

That way, political parties will participate in expanding political participation. Through personal contact, persuasion and others, political parties also function to educate young cadres to be able to replace old cadres.

4. Political Parties as Political Participation

Political participation is an activity of ordinary citizens and will influence the process of making and implementing public policies and will also determine the implementation of government. Therefore, political parties have a role to increase political participation in an election.

5. Parties as a Means of Managing Conflict

In an atmosphere of democracy, competition and differences of opinion in society is a natural problem that occurs. If a conflict occurs, political parties must try to overcome the problem properly.

Party System

As additional information, in addition to the multi-party system adopted in Indonesia, the party system is divided into three, namely multi-party, single party and two-party.

1. Single Party System

The single party system has a non-competitive nature, because all groups must accept the party leadership and may not compete with that leader, competition in a single party system is considered a form of betrayal.

2. Dual Party System

Meanwhile, dual party is a political party system in which two parties are dominant in gaining voting rights. There are three conditions for this dual-party system to run smoothly, namely that society is homogeneous, society has a sufficiently strong consensus on socio-political principles and goals, and there is historical continuity.

3. Multi-party system

According to experts, the multi-party system adopted by Indonesia is considered the most effective party system, especially for representing the various wishes of the people.

 

 

Political Infrastructure Elements

The following will explain the elements of political infrastructure consisting of bureaucratic groups, mass groups and interest groups.

1. Interest Groups

Interest groups are groups that have the goal of fighting for interests and influencing political institutions, so that they will get profitable decisions while avoiding all decisions that can be detrimental.

This interest group will not try to determine their representatives in the DPR, but will simply influence one or several parties within it or even government agencies or ministers who have authority, in order to obtain favorable decisions as expected.

2. Bureaucratic Group

The bureaucratic group is a group that has a role in the process of creating a general policy that has been taken from the bottom up or from the top down which has become a useful decision.

An example is making SKCK, where the process for making it starts from the smallest level first, namely RT, then RW and continues to Kelurahan before finally SKCK is handed over to the Polsek or Polres.

3. Mass Groups

A mass group is a group of people who participate in a process of electing political leaders and participate directly or indirectly in the formation of a general policy which is the goal of forming a political party.

An example of this mass group can be seen in the elite group. Elite group is an organized group and its members have the same ideals, orientation and values. The goal is to gain political power and seize political positions, usually this goal can be obtained by constitutional means.

Usually, groups from the political elite have cadres in them. The group’s cadres will later be elected through the election of the general chairman of the party. To elect these cadres, all registered members have the right to vote on the cadres they wish to elect.

This is an explanation of the functions of political parties, understanding, history and the party system adopted in Indonesia. If Sinaumed’s is interested in finding information and adding insight into political science, then Sinaumed’s can get books on politics at sinaumedia.com

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always supports Sinaumed’s who want to add insight by reading books. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information. Don’t hesitate to buy books at sinaumedia.com because quality and original books are guaranteed!

Author: Khansa

12 Cranial Nerves – Cranial nerves or also called Cranial Nerves in Latin are 12 pairs of nerves that exist in humans and stick out directly from the human brain. The 12 cranial nerves are different from the prominent spinal nerves in the human spine. Pairs of cranial nerves are marked by numbers according to the position of the nerves from front to back.

The 12 cranial nerves are part of the peripheral nervous system arrangement which are attached to the central nervous system or SPP. These nerves are primarily connected to the structures of the human head and neck, such as the nose, eyes, ears, mouth and tongue. So that the 12 cranial nerves can regulate the abilities of the five human senses such as hearing, sight, smell and also expression.

To find out more about the 12 cranial nerves, see the explanation to the end in this article!

Definition of 12 Cranial Nerves

According to a study published in 2019 in the journal Insight into Imaging, the human body is known to have 12 cranial nerves that function to control motor and sensory functions in the head and neck.

The anatomy of the 12 cranial nerves is quite complex and their dysfunction can be caused by tumors, infections or traumatic injuries. To get a complete imaging picture of the 12 cranial nerves, Sinaumed’s can use Magnetic Resonance Imaging or MRI and Computed Tomography or CT procedures.

The human brain consists of 12 cranial nerves that have names according to their function and structure. These nerves will help a person to taste, hear, smell, see and other abilities.

Even these 12 cranial nerves can also help a person to make facial expressions such as winking, moving the tongue or smiling.

 

 

What Are the 12 Cranial Nerves?

Each part of the 12 cranial nerves has a roman numeral from I to XII. the numbering of the 12 cranial nerves has been adjusted according to the location of these nerves which are from the front to the back of the brain.

The function of each nerve is to regulate sensory function as well as motor function. Sensory nerves have a relationship with the senses, for example the sense of hearing, the sense of smell and touch.

Then the motor nerves function to control movement and function of muscles and glands. The following are the types of cranial nerves and the function of each nerve.

1. Olfactory nerves

The first part of the cranial nerve is the olfactory nerve. The olfactory nerve can send sensory information to the brain related to odors entering through the nose.

When a person inhales aromatic molecules, the odor enters the olfactory epithelium. This can stimulate receptors that generate nerve impulses in the olfactory department. Then, signals will be sent to the brain related to memory and smell recognition.

2. Optic nerve

The second cranial nerve associated with vision is the optic nerve. Light will enter the eye and come into contact with the receptor. Information received by these receptors will be transmitted from the retina to the optic nerve.

Then, impulses from the optic nerve will reach the visual cortex which is capable of processing information related to vision. The visual cortex is located at the back of the brain.

3. Oculomotor nerve

The third nerve from the cranial nerves is the oculomotor nerve which can help control the movement of the eye muscles. This third nerve is at the front of the midbrain and part of the brainstem.

The oculomotor nerve has two distinct motor functions, such as muscle function and pupillary response. The following is an explanation of its functions.

• The muscle function of the oculomotor nerve can provide motor function to four of the six muscles around the eye. This muscle will help the eye to be able to move and focus on the object it sees.
• Pupillary response is the part that can help to control the size of the pupil that responds to light.

4. Trochlear nerve

The fourth of the 12 cranial nerves is the nerve that controls the superior oblique muscle, whose function is to move the eye. The trochlear nerve is the same as the oculomotor nerve, but the trochlear nerve originates from the back of the brain.

With the fourth nerve, the strength of the oblique muscle will make the eye able to see in the desired direction.

5. Trigeminal nerve

The fifth nerve of the cranial nerve is the largest nerve compared to the other nerves. The trigeminal nerve has sensory functions as well as motor functions. The motor function of the trigeminal nerve is to help chew and clench teeth.

This nerve has three arrangements, which are as follows.

• Ophthalmic which functions to give sensation to various parts of the eye, including the mucosa in the nose, eyes including the cornea, eyelids to the forehead.
• The upper jaw is the part that functions to communicate sensory information to the central part of the face, for example the upper cheeks, upper teeth, lower eyelids and nasal cavities.
• The mandible is the part that can provide sensation to the lower third of the face, lower teeth and tongue.

The most common and prone disorder of the trigeminal nerve is trigeminal neuralgia. This problem can cause intense pain and facial tics on the face. Facial tics are sudden movements that occur repeatedly and occur on the face, neck or head.

6. Abducens nerve

The sixth nerve is the part of the cranial nerves that controls the lateral rectus muscle. The lateral rectus is part of the extraocular muscles or the main muscles that move the eyeball.

This muscle is involved in outward movement of the eye, such as when the eye moves sideways.

The abducens nerve begins in the pons of the brainstem, then enters an area called Dorello’s canal, then passes through the cavernous sinus to finally the lateral rectus muscle in the bony orbit.

7. Facial nerve

The facial nerve is part of 12 cranial nerves consisting of 4 nuclei with different functions, which are as follows.

• Muscle movements that function to produce facial expressions.
• Movement of the lacrimal, submandibular and submaxillary glands.
• Sensation in the outer ear
• Sensations related to taste.

One of the most common disorders of the facial nerve is Bell’s palsy. This disorder can cause paralysis on one side of the face and even loss of sensation.

8. Vestibulocochlear nerve

The eighth cranial nerve is related to one’s hearing and balance.

There are two components of the function of this eighth nerve, namely as follows.

• Can help the body to feel changes in the position of the head related to gravity in order to maintain balance.
• The cochlear nerve in this eighth nerve can help hearing. The hair cells in the ear will vibrate in response to sound and determine the frequency as well as the amount of sound.

9. Glossopharyngeal nerve

The glossopharyngeal nerve is the fifth nerve which has a function related to the sense of taste and a person’s ability to swallow. Some of the motor as well as sensory functions of this nerve include the following.

• Transmits sensory information from the sinuses to the back of the throat, the inner ear and the back of the tongue.
• Gives taste to the back of the tongue.
• Stimulates the movement of a muscle at the back of the throat called the stylopharyngeus.

The ninth nerve is located in a part of the brainstem called the medulla oblongata. This section can also extend to the neck and throat area.

 

10. Vagus nerve

The tenth nerve section of the cranial nerves has sensory functions as well as motor functions, such as:

• Able to communicate sensational information from the ear canal as well as parts of the throat.
• Able to transmit sensory information from organs such as the chest and trunk, such as the heart and intestines.
• Allows to control the motor muscles in the throat.
• Stimulates the muscles of the organs in the chest and trunk, including those that move food through the digestive tract or peristalsis.
• Gives a close taste to the root of the tongue.

Of the 12 cranial nerves, the vagus nerve has the longest pathway. This nerve extends from the head in a part of the brainstem called the medulla to the abdomen.

11. Accessory nerve

Accessory nerves are part of the cranial nerves that control the muscles in the neck. This muscle is capable of flexing, rotating and extending the neck and shoulders.

The accessory nerve is divided into two parts, namely the spine and the skull. The two parts of the accessory nerve briefly touch before part of the spinal nerve moves to supply the muscles in the neck, meanwhile, the cranial part follows the vagus nerve.

12. Hypoglossal nerve

The last cranial nerve is the hypoglossal nerve which functions to move most of the tongue muscles. This section starts from the medulla oblongata then moves down to the jaw until it reaches the tongue.

If the hypoglasic nerve is disturbed, paralysis of the tongue can occur and most often occurs on one side.

That’s 12 types of cranial nerves. When read carefully, it can be seen that the cranial nerves are nerves that are located near the brain and are divided into 12 pairs of nerves. The 12 nerves pass through the cranium, so these nerves are called cranial nerves.

Cranial Nerve Function

The cranial nerves are named according to the order from top to bottom and the main function of the cranial nerves is to regulate all the functions of the organs in the head. From awareness, communication function, chewing function to swallowing function.

In general, the function of the cranial nerves can be divided into three types of functions, namely sensory, motor and autonomic. One of the functions of the cranial nerves is to allow a person to swallow as well as speak.

1. Swallow

When a person chews or drinks, the food and drink will pass posteriorly from the tongue, the muscles innervated by the Vagus or X nerve and the glasopharyngeal (IX) will push the food down and back towards the hypopharynx, then through the cricopharyngeal sphincter to the esophagus.

The nasopharynx is covered by palatal muscles which are innervated by the fine and trigeminal nerves. While the eustachian tube will open. The laryngeal orifice narrows with elevation of all the laryngeal bones by all the muscles attached to the bones from above and the opening of the cricopharyngeal sphincter. The tongue muscles which are innervated by the hypoglossal nerve (XII) also have an important role in this process. Most of the pharyngeal muscles are innervated unidirectionally via the vagus nerve.

2. Speak

The process of real speech goes through various processes so that a complete sentence is formed. There are three speech processes, here are the explanations.

a. Production of sound through a phonation

During phonation, the vocal cords create a narrow slit which allows air to pass directly through to produce sounds such as those of a flute or an organ pipe. The muscles that move the vocal cords are innervated by the recurrent laryngeal nerve which is part of the vagus nerve.

b. Making understandable sounds through an articulation

The pharyngeal muscles (X) of the tongue, facial excretory muscles, mandibular and palatal movements all have a role to make meaningless sounds more understandable.

c. pitches

Pitch is modulated by contracting the cricothyroid muscle and relaxing the vocal cords. All movements of the vocal cords are controlled by the nucleus ambiguus via the superior and recurrent laryngeal nerves. Lesions in this nucleus can lead to swallowing and speech abnormalities commonly referred to as bulbar and pseudobulbar palsy.

12 cranial nerves can be examined in several ways, for example the olfactory nerve can be examined by closing the patient’s eyes, then the patient is asked to distinguish between several odors. While the optic nerve can be examined through the snelend card and check the eyesight.

The oculomotor nerve can be examined by rolling the eyeball, moving the conjunctiva, pupil reflex and inspecting the eyelids. The trochlear nerve can be examined by rolling the eyeball, moving the conjunctiva.

The trigeminal nerve can be examined by moving the patient’s jaw throughout the jaw area or by closing the eyes or touching the forehead or cheek with cotton.

The abducens nerve can be examined by rolling the eyeball, pupil reflex and inspecting the eyelids. The facial nerve can be examined by smiling, raising eyebrows and so on. The verstibulocochlear nerve can be examined with the Weber or Rinne test.

The glossopharyngeal nerve can be differentiated by distinguishing sour and sweet tastes, the vagus nerve can be examined by touching the posterior pharynx, the accessory nerve is examined by moving the shoulder, finally the hypoglossal nerve can be tested by sticking out the tongue and moving the entire mouth area.

That’s a review of the 12 cranial nerves along with their functions and how to do the test. Sinaumed’s can find out more about nerves or other parts of the body by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides useful and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Khansa

Function of the stigma of the stigma – Hello friends , Sinaumed’s , surely many of you
think that flowers are just decoration or a sweetener for plants. Even though flowers
actually have a very important and vital function for the plant itself. It can be said that
flowers are very important organs because flowers are one of the reproductive organs with the main
function for the process of plant reproduction.

A flower is said to be complete if its organs are complete. The organs normally present in
perfect flowers are the corolla, petals, pistils, and even the stamens. Meanwhile, imperfect
flowers usually do not have all four parts.

Flowers that do not have one of these organs can interfere with the reproduction of the plant itself.
Indeed, each flower organ has its own function. The following is a complete
explanation of the function of the stigma and other organs in flowers!

Definition of pistil head

The stigma is one of the components of the pistil or female genitalia in flowers. In the
flowers of the female genitalia in pollination, among others: stalk, pistil, stigma and ovary.

According to the book Easy Ways to Face Final Exams 2007 Matrix Media Literata Team (2007), during
pollination, pollen grains fall on the stigma. Pollination is followed by fertilization.
Fertilization is the process of fusing sperm (male) with an egg (female). Pollen that
falls on the stigma will form a tube through the stigma to reach the ovule.

The result of this fertilization is a zygote or biological institution. The zygote and bladder
will grow into seeds. The seeds that are planted will fall to the ground and grow roots or
sprouts

Flower Function

The function of flowers is to attract pollinators to pollinate plants to help pollinate plants to produce
seeds. Bright colors, strong scents and sweet nectar combine to attract birds, bees and other
insects that transfer pollen from one flower to another. After pollination, the flowers turn
into seeds. There are at least 4 functions of interest that you should know, namely:

• The most important and vital function of flowers is as a means of reproduction.
• The second function of flowers is to attract birds, insects and bees to the ground and
  pollinate them.
• The function of the third flower is to accommodate or function as a place for the fusion of
  male and female gametes.
• The fourth flower function is to produce seeds.

Of course, in addition to these four functions of flowers, you can also add that humans can appreciate flowers
for their beauty. The most important thing is that you humans don’t damage them and don’t prevent flowers from
reproducing.

In addition, the function of flowers as genetic reproduction can be broken down into 4, namely:

1. Plant Reproductive Organs

The function of the flower itself is to combine or combine the fusion of sperm or male gametes with ovum or
female gametes. With this, seed production will be realized. The arrangement or
arrangement of flowers in one stem can be referred to as flowering. The reproductive organs of
flowers are called stamens and pistils.

2. Attracts Polinators

As we know there are animals whose main food is nectar. During this time, the flowers have
nectar or a sweet liquid. If you use symbiosis, nectar will be taken as food, where pollination
of flowers takes place.

During pollination, pollen moves from the male flower head to the female stigma. Thus, the
meeting of pollen and pistil will cause gamete lysis in plants.

3. Producing Nectar or Flower Sarees

Flowers always give honey. Nectar has a very high sugar content, which is why it is called the
sweet floral liquid. This sweet liquid is produced when the plant is in flower.

When the flowers bloom, that’s when the nectar-eating animals will be attracted to the flowers.
The more animals that are attracted, the faster the pollination process.

4. Beautiful Parts of Plants

Not infrequently flowers become an integral part of plants. So that the flowers are always
brightly colored and attractive shape. If the plant doesn’t flower, it may be less attractive
to look at. Bright colors and varied shapes make flowers a very popular ornamental plant.
So far, flowers are still preferred by many people to be planted as ornamental plants in their yard
gardens.

Pistil Head Function

The stigma is the part that is at the very top of the pistil. The main function of the stigma
is as a place to receive pollen during the pollination process.

Function of the stigma in Pollination

Any reproduction of flowering plants is always accompanied by pollination. Pollination is the
process by which pollen reaches the pistil through the threads. Pollination is divided into
three types of pollination, namely self-pollination, cross-pollination and cross-pollination.

1. Self Pollination

Self-pollination can only occur in flowering plants of the same type or in flowering plants of a different
type, but always of the same type. Self-pollination can be observed in barley, long beans,
sesame, rice, chickpeas and others. However, self-pollination has its drawbacks, namely the
seeds obtained from this pollination cannot germinate.

Self pollination is further divided into two categories: natural self pollination and artificial self
pollination. Natural self-pollination is pollination that occurs when flowering plants have
complete reproductive organs.

Complete reproductive organs consist of stamens and pistils which are located inside the flower.
In other words, flowering plants that do not have complete reproductive organs cannot
self-pollinate naturally.

Artificial self-pollination is the process of pollination through human intervention.
Self-pollination assisted by human intervention is known as self-crossing or self-fertilization.
The way pollination works, for example, humans collect the available pistils on the stamens and
then the pollen is placed on the stigma of the same flowering plant.

2 . Cross Pollination

Having discussed self-pollination, we will now discuss cross-pollination. Cross pollination is
the pollination of the stamens and pistils that occurs in two different plant species.

An intermediate is needed during cross pollination. This intermediary aims to transport pollen
from one flower to another. You can see cross-pollination mediators in insects, such as
butterflies, wasps, hummingbirds, in the wind.

These nectar-eating animals really need flowers as a food source because flowers contain nectar.
As these animals forage on one flower and another, some of the pollen grains attach to the pistil
and this is where cross pollination takes place.

It is important to emphasize during cross pollination that not all flowers are valued by insects.
In general, these insects only like striking flower colors and pungent odors. However,
with butterflies it is different. Flowers also contain honey, butterflies love flowers.

Meanwhile, pollination with the help or wind usually occurs in flowering plants without heads and flower petals,
such as weeds.

3. Pollination of the Bastar

Pollination occurs when pollen from one flower lands on the stigma of another flower of the same but
different type. Pollination is usually assisted by animals such as bees, beetles and
butterflies or birds such as hummingbirds, starlings and sparrows, but some are assisted by wind, water and
humans.

Wind-assisted pollination occurs in flowers that have the following characteristics:

• There are many of them and they gather to form groups
• Dry pollen, numerous, small and light
• Small crown or no crown
• Large anther shape
• Long stalks
• The stigma is hairy and sticks out

Functions of Other Flower Components

1. Flower stalks

The first part of the flower is the flower stalk. Flower stalks are located at the bottom of
the flower. The flower stalk acts as a link between the flower and the branch. In
addition to the connecting function, the flower stalk also has a function as a flower support.

2. Flower Base

The second part of the interest rate is the interest base. The base of the flower is located
at the bottom of the flower, just above the stalk. The floral base serves as a place to fix the
wreath.

3. Petals

The third part of the flower is the petals. Petals are located on the outside of the flower.
The petals protect the petals while they are still buds and will open when the petals are in full
bloom.

Petals usually match the color and shape of the leaves. Each petal is called a calyx.
In some flowers, besides the petals, additional petals grow or what is commonly known as
epicalicia.

4. Flower Crown

The fourth part of the flower is the flower crown. The flower crown is located in the second
layer and is adjacent to the flower petals. Flower crowns are used to attract insects and/or
other animals to live, which will help pollinate.

In addition to the main function of attracting insects and/or other animals for pollination, flower garlands have
another function, which is to protect the genitals of flowers before pollination occurs.

The corolla is the most beautiful and often brightly colored part of the flower. Flower crowns
are also commonly referred to as floral ornaments. Each flower crown also has its own name,
namely petal.

5. Stamens (Male Genitals)

The fifth part of the flower is the stamen. The stamens are usually in the center of the
corolla. The main function of the stamens is as a means of reproduction (male genitalia) of
plants.

The stamens are divided into 3 parts, namely the anther, the anther and the connecting rod.
The stamen is the filiform part which is usually round in cross section while the anther is the
part of the stamen which is located at the end of the stamen.

The function of the stamens can be divided into three parts, namely:

a. Sari stalk

The stamens are part of the stamens which have the function of making the anthers position high enough from
the flower crown. The stamens are thread-like in cross section and generally round in
shape.

b. Head Sari

The anther is the part of the stamen that functions as a reservoir for pollen. The location of
the anther is above the anther stalk. The anthers inside have two juice compartments.
Inside the pollen chamber there are pollen grains.

Pollen is a male cell multiplication tool. This powder is attached to the anthers.
This powder will also be carried by insects and other animals and will stick to other
flowers.

c. Sari Room Liaison

The liaison of the sari chamber is the stem or stalk of the sari gang which has a function as a liaison between
the two parts of the anther which are on the right and the left.

6. Pistil (Female Genitals)

The sixth part of the flower is the pistil. The pistil is usually located in the center of the
flower. Pistils are the main function of reproductive (female) plants.

Pistil also has its own parts, namely:

a. Pistil Head

stigma (stigma), the stigma is located at the very top of the pistil. The stigma is generally
sticky because the stigma is a place for pollen to attach.

b. Pistil stalk

The pistil stalk is the part that connects the pistil to the ovary. Apart from functioning as
a binder, the stalk also has a function as a force support so that it can stand upright, steady and stay in
place. The pistil has a pollen tube which functions to support the fertilization process by
providing an ovary.

c. Ovary

Will fruit or can also be referred to as ovary / ovary is one part of the pistil that rests on the base of
the flower. The fruit will enlarge when the pollination process is complete. In
the ovary, there is also a carpel/carpellum. Carpell/carpellum is a fruit leaf where each fruit
leaf contains an ovule or what can also be called an ovule/ovulum.

d. Seed

Ovule also known as ovule, is the structural part of the seed plant, which protects and stores the ovum.
The seeds will then develop into seeds after fertilization is complete. The ovule is easily visible
in plants with open seeds and in flowering plants the ovule is covered with ovule.

Flowers are also one of the plant organs that require nutrients for their survival. Therefore,
in each flower you can find different transporters that serve as food for that flower.

Things That Help the Generative Pollination
Process

There are several things that can affect plant pollination. These elements can come from
natural activities or from other living organisms. The following are things that can help the
success of plant pollination.

1. Generative Reproduction with the Help of
the Wind

The process of pollination or the method of propagating plants with the help of the wind is often called
anemogamy. The feature of this reproductive process is that it often occurs in plants that live
in places where there is not too much water and tends to be arid. In addition, the pollen
produced is usually dry and the crown size is relatively smaller.

During this pollination, the wind moves the stem causing the stamen to fall onto the pistil and pollination
occurs in the plant. Examples of plants that reproduce or pollinate are often assisted by the
wind, namely grass and corn.

2. Generative reproduction with the help of
animals

Reproduction or the process of pollination with the help of animals, can also be called zoidiogamy.
The main characteristics of plants that reproduce in this way are that these plants usually produce
nectar which is brightly colored and has an odor or fragrance that animals like.

During this pollination, the plant will emit characteristics such as bright colors or attractive smells to
attract animals. Then the animal will land causing the pollen to stick to the animal.
The animals then latch on to other flowers and spread the sticky pollen onto their bodies for a
smooth pollination process.

An example of a plant that relies on breeding or pollination in this way is the rafflesia arnoldi flower.
Rafflesia arnoldi flowers will emit a very pleasant smell, attracting flies to perch.
The flies will then go to other Rafflesia Arnoldi flowers and fix the pollen from the previous
flower, which will accelerate the pollination of the Rafflesia Arnoldi flower.

3. Generative propagation with the help of
water

Generative reproduction can also occur using water, also known as irrigation. Vegetative tangs
reproduce in this way, often with special traits, namely; The entire tree trunk is covered in
water, the tree’s habitat is also in the water, the tree acts as a producer of food for the animals around
it.

This reproduction usually occurs in plants such as algae or seaweed. Pollination in algal
plants occurs when water washes over the stamens and accidentally attaches them to the pistils of other
algae.

4. Generative Reproduction with Human
Assistance

In addition to pollination with the help of wind, animals and water, there are also breeding plants that
develop only with human assistance. This process of human reproduction is also commonly
referred to as anthropogamy.

Examples of plants propagated by cloning include vanilla, salak and even orchids. In orchids,
pollination with the help of humans is necessary because these plants have only one sex organ per flower.
Therefore, the resumption of stamens with pistils requires human assistance.

Social shaping factors – Humans have an instinct to live with other humans and form groups. That is, no human being can live without having a social group. In fact, by nature, humans have been members of social groups, families, since birth.

The interactions built by humans in their development are not only limited to the family. We interact with individuals and other social groups to form systems within the most related social groups.

At least, there are two main desires that drive humans to live in groups. First, humans always want to join with other humans around. Second, humans want to unite with the natural situation around them (Abdulsyani, 2012:103).

Not only that, humans also tend to live in groups in order to facilitate work or have common interests. Every member in a social group works together to meet their needs, to get protection, to get a sense of security.

Definition of Social Groups

According to Soerjono Soekanto (2014: 88) as written in the book “Social Groups”, humans are creatures that have two desires from birth, namely to unite with other humans and unite with nature. Therefore, humans always live in groups and form social groups for the sake of survival.

So dynamic is human life and its social groups according to the process of interaction that we establish in the social groups in which we live.

There are a small part of our life needs that can be met only by our own abilities. Even so, most of the necessities of life must be cultivated jointly with other people. For this reason, humans are called social beings.

As social beings, we interact with others, which results in the formation of various groups in society.

Humans as social beings are part of society. We will form laws, compile rules of behavior, to work together in larger groups in social life. Social groups must also help each other in this development because human progress is based on our ability to work together.

In social groups, humans also need affection, understanding, self-esteem, and recognition. Meanwhile, emotional responses like this can only be obtained when we relate and interact with other people in the order of social life.

In essence, a social group as Soerjono Soekanto (2014: 102) calls a set or unit of people who live together because of the relationship between them. This relationship, among other things, involves mutual influence and awareness to help each other.

Social Group Forming Factors

 

From human beings, there are three factors behind us forming a group:

1. There is a shared belief in the importance of grouping and purpose.
2. The expectations of the members.
3. The ideology that binds the members.

Meanwhile, group formation or joining a person in a group is caused by similarities and closeness factors. Here are the details:

1. Similarity Factor 

The similarity factor among members means that it has become a habit when other people like to associate with other individuals who have similarities with themselves: whether it’s in terms of interests, beliefs, values, age, level of intelligence, to other personal characteristics.

2. Proximity Factor

Proximity factor, namely the proximity of the place of origin or place of residence. The closer geographic distance two people are, the more likely they are to see, talk, and socialize.

So, physical proximity can increase opportunities for interaction and joint activities. This allows the formation of social groups. In fact, when someone travels and meets people from the same area, they will feel that they have an inner bond even though they didn’t know each other at first.

 

Factors Driving Human Forming Social Groups

 

There are a number of factors that encourage humans to form or join a social group. The following are the driving factors:

1. The urge to sustain life

By joining or forming social groups, we are indirectly trying to survive. This is due to the needs of human life that cannot possibly be fulfilled by living alone.

Human relations will expand so that wherever you go you will always feel safe, with social groups.

2. The urge to continue the descent

All living things must have the same nature, namely to continue their descent. One can find each other’s partner through social groups. That way, this encouragement can be achieved.

3. Encouragement to increase work efficiency and effectiveness

As for what can be seen that currently humans are required to be able to do work effectively and efficiently in order to obtain maximum work results. The presence of social groups can increase both of these things.

For example, work can be completed more quickly and the results can be better with the division of tasks.

Social Group Functions

One of the reasons individuals join groups is to benefit from the existence of certain groups. Social groups are formed so that their members can work together to meet the needs of life.

Following are the functions of social groups according to sociologists and individuals:

According to the Sociologist

Social groups can provide benefits for individuals, organizations, and society. According to Darwin Cartwright and Alwin Zander, the following are the functions of social groups:

1. Bridging and coordinating social gaps that arise in groups. Cooperation is carried out by members to overcome social inequalities through intensive interaction and communication.
2. Provide important information to group members. Members who receive information must convey it to other members so that group cohesiveness can be maintained.
3. Growing and developing the work of members so that other works that are beneficial to society can emerge.
4. Disseminate the work of group members to the community so that it benefits others.
5. Give satisfaction in the form of material or immaterial to group members.
6. Create clear goals to meet the needs of members. This clear goal will encourage the performance of the group members.

According to Individual

When someone joins a group, he is expected to live within the rules of the group. The group will direct its members to become the expected person.

At the same time, members will be given the opportunity to develop themselves according to their capacity. Through the group, someone is expected to be able to achieve the best quality.

Not only that, another role of the group is to accommodate the aspirations of community members. The reason is, everyone needs a place to express their aspirations and the group is expected to make it happen.

By Organization

Basically, a group is a collection of individuals who are in an organization. Members in the organization also depend on each other in carrying out their performance in a structured manner.

The function of a group can be positive or negative for the organization. Positively, social groups can enhance teamwork and group productivity in organizations. However, on the other hand, groups can have a negative impact if they limit the level of organizational productivity.

According to Society

For society, social groups have functions, both at simple and complex levels. This is because society consists of various forms of social groups. Community members can meet their needs with the existence of social groups.

Simultaneously, an individual can join in more than one social group with different roles, statuses, and positions. In this case, the individual may experience role conflict or even become an adaptable person.

Characteristics and Terms of Social Groups

Not everyone who gathers physically can be called a group. According to the book “Social Groups”, sociologists formulate the existence of a number of characteristics and conditions that indicate the existence of groups in society.

Apart from being understood by looking at the differences, we must also see the group through its internal structure as a whole system.

Characteristic features

Following are the characteristics of social groups according to Wila Hulky (2012: 99-100):

1. At least two people
2. Have intimate interaction and communication
3. Group members influence each other
4. The group is considered ended if the relationship in the minds of its members ends
5. There is a transfer of culture from generation to generation
6. Shared interests and interests form the color of the group
7. The formation of groups can be based on various situations, namely situations that require humans to unite

There are also other opinions related to the characteristics of social groups according to Muzafir Sherif (Santoso, 1999:48), namely as follows:

1. There is the same drive or motive in each individual until there is social interaction with each other and agree on a common goal
2. There are different reactions and skills between one individual and another as a result of social interaction
3. Formation and affirmation of a clear group structure, consisting of roles and positions that develop by themselves in order to achieve goals
4. The presence of norms that govern the relationship between members of the group

Condition

We often see crowds of people in various places in life, such as at bus stops or ticket queues. However, it was not a social group despite being a collection of humans. There are certain criteria that must be met for a group of people called a social group.

The following are the requirements for social groups according to Soerjono Soekanto (2014: 99):

1. There is awareness of every member of the group that he will be part of the group.
2. There is a reciprocal relationship between one member and another
3. The presence of certain similarities, such as background, fate, goals, or ideology which then creates a sense of solidarity among group members
4. Rule, structured, and have a pattern
5. Regeneration of social groups in order to maintain the sustainability of the group

Multiple Membership in Social Groups

Each individual must be part of a particular social group. Not only being a member of a group, we will also generally join other groups. For example, children have playgroups, both at school and at home.

Various social groups continue to be created and increased in society because of the ease of formation and the process of joining. Each individual will not only be a member of one social group, but can also be part of another social group at will, such as in formal, informal, primary, secondary, and other groups.

The term multiple membership in the book “Social Groups” denotes individuals who belong to more than one social group. This is triggered when we are faced with a situation when we have to join a social group, but our current social group cannot answer the problem at hand.

For example, we have to work on assignments that are done in groups at school, so that the family group is not involved. Optionally, we can add to the group by forming or joining an existing group.

Meanwhile, dual membership also has consequences related to our activity level. The reason is, membership can hinder or actually accelerate social processes if it can fulfill every role we have to carry out.

Forms of Social Groups

 

In the midst of social groups humans live, starting from the family, community, school, to the work environment. Humans also interact intensively in their social groups. The following are the forms of social groups according to the book “Social Groups”:

1. Primary group

Primary group is a type of social group that has relatively few members, more intimate social relations, is familial, and has intensive social interaction. So, the orientation built by the primary group is the social relations within it.

2. Secondary Group

There is also a secondary group which is a large group consisting of many people, the relationship between its members does not need to be based on personal recognition, and its nature is not very lasting. For this reason, the closeness of its members is not so close and only temporary.

3. Formal Groups

Groups that have strict rules and are created intentionally by their members to regulate relationships between people are called formal groups or formal groups . The relationship system in this group is functional. Its formation is done for the sake of achieving certain goals, so formal groups have a clear work system.

4. Informal Groups

Informal groups have personal, close, and intimate relationships based on the system of relationships they build. Not only that, this group also does not have a specific organizational structure. Unofficial nature, not bound by certain legal rules. The orientation in it aims for common interests and is based on shared experience.

5. Reference Group

The reference group according to Paul B. Horton (1993: 221) is a group that becomes a reference when making an assessment or a group whose assessment is the same as our group. This group is able to influence behavior, attitudes, and personality.

6. Group Membership

Group membership or membership group is a group in which there are individuals who join as members of the group physically. To determine group membership , the main measure is the process of interaction within the social group.

7. In-Group Group

Social dynamics in social groups must occur and this can have an impact on the level of group solidarity. Social dynamics in some cases can increase the solidarity of the group. For example, a feeling of kinship within a person can increase the closeness between group members, and this is one indicator of the formation of an in-group .

In-group is a social group that is well identified by each member so that they consider the group as part of life.

8. Out-Group Group

The diversity of backgrounds that exist in Indonesia gives rise to very diverse social groups, for example groups based on religious backgrounds. Of course, every member of this social group is unlikely to join another religious group.

Sinaumed’s, another group that we cannot join because we belong to another group, for example in terms of religion, is called an out-group . Richard T. Schaefer, an American sociologist, calls out-groups a social group whose position is outside the individual, or we are not members of that group.

Conclusion 

Social groups are of course very important, that’s why we also have to understand the factors that form social groups well. As social beings, we must belong to each other in groups and must learn from each other for closeness among group members and a better sense of solidarity.

To increase your knowledge, read more and do literacy activities. Today, there are so many books related to sociology and various other knowledge that are worth studying.

With sinaumedia.com , you can get the most up -to-date and high-quality books from the biggest online bookstore in Indonesia! To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

 

Author: Sevilla Nouval Evanda

Digital book reference (Accessed 15 Dec 22):

• Social Groups

Every country certainly has a central bank where the task of the bank is to maintain the stability of the
currency of a country. Then, actually, what is meant by a central bank? You can
find the answer in this article, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Central Bank

A bank is a place where a person or group of people save their money in a safer, more organized and of
course useful place. Every country certainly has a central bank, where the central bank becomes
a financial institution or agency that is responsible for making and implementing monetary policy to create
stable economic activity in a country.

Some of the tasks of the central bank include maintaining the stability of currency values, inflation
rates, and others related to a country’s financial system. In Indonesia, the duties and
functions of the central bank are carried out by Bank Indonesia. Bank Indonesia is an
independent government-owned institution that has been established since 1953.

The formation of Bank Indonesia was based on the Basic Bank Indonesia Act on July 1, 1953. As for the
initiator, namely the first President of Indonesia, Ir. Soekarno founded this Indonesian bank
to nationalize everything about banking in Indonesia. So, Bank Indonesia is the parent bank of
all banks in Indonesia.

Bank Indonesia is committed to achieving and maintaining stability in the value of the rupiah through the
management of the Monetary, Payment System and Financial System Stability sectors. The
management of these three fields is implemented through policies issued by Bank Indonesia and operated
through various instruments in accordance with the related task areas.

This institution is owned by the government, and has the duty to ensure that the activities of financial
institutions within the country can improve and stabilize the country’s economy nationally.
According to Law No. 23 of 1999, Bank Indonesia is an independent institution established with the
aim of maintaining stability in the value of the rupiah, both the exchange rate for goods and services and
for foreign currencies.

Bank Indonesia is also a legal entity. Not only that, the central bank is also one of the
learning resources for banks, in order to carry out community programs regarding the fields of banking
duties in Indonesia.

History of Bank Indonesia

Sinaumed’s, before the existence of Bank Indonesia, all activities in managing monetary policy were still centered
on De Javasche Bank which was a heritage from the Netherlands since around 1800. After Indonesian
independence, the Indonesian economy still used the structure owned by De Java Bank.

Because a system like this is considered not suitable for Indonesia in the future, the public’s desire arises to
have an institution that is more compatible with national interests in regulating monetary policy.

In general, De Java Bank and Bank Indonesia have the same duties. In 1968, the Law on
the Central Bank was issued which regulated the duties of Bank Indonesia and how this institution was
separated from other banks that usually fulfilled commercial functions.

Bank Indonesia also cooperates with the government as a development agent. Bank Indonesia also
participates in promoting smooth production and economic development to improve the people’s standard of
living.

After the crisis that occurred in 1998, the government set the sole objective of Bank Indonesia.
Bank Indonesia’s work is focused on maintaining the stability of the value of the Rupiah.
However, in 2008 the regulation was again amended through Perppu No. 2 of 2008. It was stated that
Bank Indonesia also had the function of increasing the resilience of the Indonesian banking system so that
it would be able to withstand the global crisis that year.

Bank Indonesia also continues to develop and exist today. Apart from Bank Indonesia, there is
also the Financial Services Authority (OJK) which carries out its duties as a supervisor of banking
activities, a task previously carried out by BI.

Central Bank Duties

Bank Indonesia is an institution that holds monetary authority. The task of the central bank
is to make and carry out a country’s monetary policy in order to achieve and maintain currency
stability.

These policies can influence and consider many things, for example the rate of inflation, economic
development, and so on. There are monetary policies for the short, medium and long term.
In Indonesia, these tasks are carried out by the central bank, namely Bank Indonesia.
In addition, there are several other duties of Bank Indonesia, namely:

1. Establish and Implement Monetary Policy

Bank Indonesia makes monetary policy and implements it to control the amount of money circulating in
society. This is very important because the price of products in the form of goods and services
remains under control and is in accordance with people’s purchasing power.

The monetary policy must aim to encourage the growth of the national economy. Therefore, Bank
Indonesia usually cooperates with the government, so that the policy is in accordance with other economic
and fiscal policies as a support.

2. Regulate and Maintain the Smooth
Payment System

There are two payment systems within the central bank, namely Bank Indonesia as we know it, namely the cash
payment system and the non-cash payment system.

If in the past the use of non-cash payment systems was still limited, now technology has made it easier for us to
make non-cash transactions only through gadgets . Playing a full role and developing a
series of standards, rules, procedures and agreements on this payment system is the task of the central
bank.

3. Manage and Supervise the Bank

The central bank’s next task is to regulate and supervise the banks under it. In this case,
Bank Indonesia is in charge of regulating and supervising the banks under it.

4. Maintaining Financial System Stability

The task of the central bank is to carry out overall supervision of a country’s economic activity.
This aims to maintain the stability of the financial system. Macroprudential policies
are also very important to monitor.

Macroprudential policy is a policy established to limit the costs and risks of a crisis, so that the balance of
the financial system is maintained.

Authority of Bank Indonesia

In the context of establishing and implementing monetary policy, Bank Indonesia has the authority to:

1. Setting monetary targets by taking into account the inflation rate target, which is set.

1. Carry out monetary control by using methods, which include but are not limited to:

1. Open market operations in the money market, both rupiah and foreign currency.

1. Determination of the discount rate. Discounts are deductions or interest that must be
   paid by people, who sell notes (trade notes) that are cashed prematurely.

1. Determination of minimum mandatory reserves.

1. Credit or financing arrangements.

Legal Basis for the Establishment of Bank Indonesia

The establishment of Bank Indonesia was preceded by the nationalization process of De Javasche Bank NV
(DJB) which was carried out in December 1951 based on Law (UU) Number 24 of 1951 concerning the
Nationalization of De Javasche Bank NV. After DJB was nationalized, the Republic of Indonesia
established Bank Indonesia based on Law Number 11 of 1953 concerning the Stipulation of the Basic Bank
Indonesia Law which was ratified on 19 May 1953, announced on 2 June 1953 and came into force on 1 July
1953.

The date of entry into force of the Act is also commemorated as the birthday of Bank Indonesia.
In addition, the law stated that Bank Indonesia was established to act as Indonesia’s central bank.
In its journey, the role of Indonesian banks has changed in accordance with economic, social and
political dynamics both nationally and globally.

In line with this, the law which became the legal basis for the existence of Bank Indonesia underwent
changes and improvements. The current law which forms the legal basis for Bank Indonesia is Law
Number 23 of 1999 concerning Bank Indonesia (which has been amended several times, most recently by Law No.
6 of 2009).

Not only at the statutory level, but fundamental changes have also occurred at the constitutional level.
The Fourth Amendment to the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia (UUD 1945), inserts a
new article, 23D, which reads, “The state has a central bank whose composition, position, authority,
responsibility and independence are regulated by law.”

Status and Position of Bank Indonesia

1. As an Independent State Institution

A new chapter in the history of Bank Indonesia as an independent Central Bank began when a new law, namely
Law no. 23/1999 concerning Bank Indonesia, declared effective on 17 May 1999.

This law gives status and position as an independent state institution and free from interference from the
government or other parties. As an independent state institution, Bank Indonesia has full
autonomy in formulating and implementing each of its duties and authorities as stipulated in this
law.

Outsiders are not justified in interfering with the implementation of Bank Indonesia’s duties and Bank
Indonesia is also obliged to refuse or ignore intervention in any form from any party. To
further guarantee this independence, this law has given a special position to Bank Indonesia within the
constitutional structure of the Republic of Indonesia.

As an independent state institution, the position of Bank Indonesia is not equal to that of the State
Higher Institutions. Besides that, the position of Bank Indonesia is also not the same as the
Department, because the position of Bank Indonesia is outside the Government.

This special status and position is required so that Bank Indonesia can carry out its role and function as a
monetary authority more effectively and efficiently.

2. As a Legal Entity

The status of Bank Indonesia, both as a public legal entity and as a private legal entity, is stipulated by
law. As a public legal entity, Bank Indonesia has the authority to stipulate legal regulations
which are the implementation of laws that are binding on the entire public at large in accordance with their
duties and authorities.

So, as a civil legal entity, Bank Indonesia can act for and on behalf of itself both inside and outside the
court.

Central Bank Functions

Bank Indonesia as the central bank in Indonesia also has several functions that complement the tasks we
have discussed previously. In the monetary structure, the function of the central bank is to
control the circulation of money. The following functions of the central bank are as follows,
namely:

1. Circulation Bank

The function of the central bank is the holder of the sole right (octroation right) in the circulation of
banknotes and coins as legal means of payment. This was determined in order to avoid
discrepancies in the price of different currency values ​​for each region.

2. Banker’s Bank, Government Agents and Advisors

As a banker, the function of the central bank in Indonesia is to carry out transactions related to buying
and selling foreign exchange. Then Bank Indonesia became the institution that received tax
payments from the government and also assisted government payments from the center to the regions.

As a banker, Bank Indonesia and Merta aim to help circulate government-owned securities and help analyze
national economic data. As an agent and advisory bank for the government, Bank Indonesia’s
function is to manage and manage all administration related to national debts.

In addition, Bank Indonesia must provide interest payment services on these debts. Bank
Indonesia also provides advice and information regarding the current state of the money market and capital
market to the government. The function of the central bank is to banker the various banks.
This means that the central bank is a source of funds for other banks.

3. Final Level Lenders

The central bank or Bank Indonesia is the lender at the last level, known as the lender of last resort.
This means that the central bank can provide loans to lower banks in the form of emergency
liquidity credit facilities.

4. Establish and Implement Monetary Policy

Monetary policy is a decision taken in order to support economic activity through various matters related
to determining the amount of money circulating in society. The function of the central bank is
to set and implement monetary policy.

The authorities of the central bank relating to the setting and implementation of monetary policy are:

• Setting discount rates, minimum reserves of commercial banks, arranging credit or financing.
• Setting monetary targets by taking into account the target inflation rate.
• Carry out monetary control without being limited to open market operations in the money market, both in the
  form of rupiah and foreign currency.
• Establish and implement monetary policy to achieve and maintain stability in the value of the rupiah.

5. Manage and Maintain the Smooth Payment
System

The next function of the central bank is to facilitate payment traffic. Bank Indonesia, in
this case, organizes clearing and duplicates currency circulating between commercial banks.

In order to carry out its function of regulating and maintaining payment traffic, Bank Indonesia has
received several authorities from the government. One of these powers is to give approvals and
permits, as well as carry out the operation of various payment system services.

Therefore, Bank Indonesia must require payment system service providers to submit reports on their
activities. Bank Indonesia also has the authority to determine the use of exchange/payment
instruments. One of the other functions of the central bank is to regulate and maintain the
smooth operation of the payment system.

In order to carry out this function, the authority of the central bank includes:

• Determine the use of tools or payment instruments.
• Carry out and provide approval and permits for the operation of payment system services.
• Requiring payment system service providers to submit reports on their activities.
• The central bank is the only institution authorized to issue and circulate rupiah currency and revoke,
  withdraw and destroy money from circulation.

6. Maintaining Financial System Stability

Maintaining financial system stability is the next task of Bank Indonesia, which is a condition that allows the
national financial system to function effectively and efficiently and is able to withstand internal and external
vulnerabilities.

So that the allocation of sources of funding or financing can contribute to the growth and stability of the
national economy. A financial system that is not functioning properly will reduce the
effectiveness of monetary policy, disrupt the smooth running of economic activities and result in a slowdown
in economic growth.

The central bank or Bank Indonesia also has an interest in maintaining financial system stability related to its
function as a Lender of Last Resort or LoLR, namely the authority authorized to provide liquidity during a
crisis.

Bank Indonesia in exercising its authority to maintain financial system stability, the central bank has a legal
umbrella, namely:

• Law Number 21 of 2011 concerning the Financial Services Authority.
• Law Number 9 of 2016 concerning Prevention and Management of Financial System Crisis.
• Bank Indonesia Regulation Number 16/11/PBI/2014 concerning Macroprudential Regulation and Supervision.

7. Maintain State Treasury Reserves

In this case, the function of the central bank is not only cash reserves from commercial banks but also
foreign exchange. Bank Indonesia can increase or decrease the amount of money circulating in
society.

This is done by increasing or decreasing the minimum reserves that must be met by commercial banks in
granting credit and circulating money. By increasing the state treasury reserves, Bank
Indonesia intends to reduce the amount of money in circulation.

Meanwhile, reducing cash reserves means that the central bank wants to increase the amount of money in
circulation. This is interconnected because the higher the cash reserve, the bank of course has
to hold more money and can’t just circulate it.

Bank Indonesia does not only function as an internal reserve, namely managing domestic money circulation.
This central bank also functions as an external reserve, which regulates all matters related to
international payments.

In addition to the above functions, Bank Indonesia also used to supervise banks and various companies
engaged in the financial sector. However, now this task has shifted to the authority of the
Financial Services Authority (OJK).

This is a discussion of the meaning and duties of the central bank. Hopefully all the
discussion above is useful as well as add to your insight. Sinaumed’s can get more knowledge about
the duties of a central bank by reading books available at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. Reading lots of books and articles
will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Know the Differences between Climate and Weather, Their Roles and Elements –

Weather is a state of the air at a time and in a certain area that is relatively narrow and for a short period of time.

Weather is formed from a combination of weather elements and the duration of weather can be only a few hours. For example: morning, afternoon or evening, and conditions can vary for each place and every hour.

Whereas

climate is the average weather condition within one year which the investigation is carried out for a long time (minimum 30 years) and covers a large area.

Check out a more complete explanation about the two below, Sinaumed’s!

Definition of Climate and Weather

Weather is a condition or state of the air that occurs in an area or region within a certain period of time.

The weather can change in a short time, which is only a few hours and is marked by the difference between day and night.

Weather occurs because of differences in temperature and humidity that occur between one place and another. The science used to study the weather is meteorology. In Indonesia, there is an agency that specifically observes the weather, namely the Meteorology, Climatology and Geophysics Agency (BMKG) based in Jakarta.

BMKG’s duty is to record and observe air activity, including temperature and air pressure, rainfall, wind and cloud activity. Apart from being based in Jakarta, BMKG also has weather monitoring stations spread throughout Indonesia.

Climate is the condition or condition of the average weather in a large area. The climate itself is determined based on the calculation of time which usually reaches 11 years to 30 years.

The climate in an area is influenced by the geographic location and topography of the area, which means that climate differences in an area are influenced by the position of the sun relative to that area on the planet Earth.

The sun is a source of energy as well as climate control for the earth, so that the relative position of the sun can cause air movement and ocean currents.

The science that studies climate is climatology.

 

Examples of Weather and Climate in Everyday Life

• Examples of weather in everyday life: The weather in the morning in Yogyakarta is rainy and the weather in the afternoon is expected to be sunny. The afternoon weather in Jakarta is cloudy, but suddenly the weather becomes hot
• Examples of climate in everyday life: There are differences in tropical and subtropical climates. Indonesia and countries located at equatorial latitudes have a tropical climate. Countries with subtropical climates such as Japan and South Korea have winter. So, that’s a discussion about the differences in weather and climate along with explanations and examples. Hopefully this article is useful.

Differences in Climate and Weather

• The area coverage and weather observations are narrower and limited, while the area coverage and climate observations are wider.
• Time to observe the weather in an area can be done for 24 hours, while climate observations are made over a period of 11-30 years.
• Weather has a fast changing and unstable nature, while climate has a stable and difficult to change nature.
• Predictions about the weather are easy to do, while climate forecasts are difficult.

There are many symptoms that we can encounter, including: 1. Fog Symptoms that occur due to condensation of water vapor near the surface of the ground or cold water. Its height reaches 500 meters. 2. Dew Symptoms that occur due to condensation of water vapor on the surface of the soil, grass and leaves at night because of the humidity in the air, but there is no wind blowing. 3. El Nino A symptom of an increase in Pacific Ocean temperature that occurs around December. 4. La Nina Symptoms that occur after El Nino weakens due to a decrease in the temperature of the Pacific Ocean around January.

Various causes of climate change and ways we can do to stop it can be found in the book Why? Climate Change – Climate Change by delivering interesting and fun information.

 

Elements of Climate and Weather

1. sunlight,
2. temperature,
3. humidity,
4. air pressure,
5. wind,
6. rainfall and
7. cloud.

Knowledge of the elements of weather and climate is very useful for everyday life, such as agriculture, communication, aviation, shipping and trade. The following is an explanation of the elements of weather and climate:

Sunlight

The first element of weather and climate is sunlight. The sun is the center of the solar system, where all the planets in the solar system revolve around the sun. The process of the planet earth rotating on its axis is called rotation, while the process of the earth revolving around the sun is known as revolution. These two things, both the rotation and revolution of the earth affect weather and climate change.

The sun will radiate its rays to all corners of the earth with the help of rotation and revolution processes, which affect the weather and climate. The various impacts of climate change and weather are also discussed in the book Educomics Plants Vs Zombies: Weather and Climate which is packaged through illustrations so that it is easier to understand.

Temperature

Temperature or air temperature is the degree of heat from molecular activity in the atmosphere or air that arises due to the sun’s heat radiation received by the earth. The level of heat reception by the earth is influenced by several factors, including:

• Angle of incidence of sunlight, namely the angle formed by the surface of the earth with the direction of arrival of sunlight.
• The smaller the angle of incidence of sunlight, the less heat is received by the earth compared to the angle that is perpendicular.
• The longer the sun shines, the longer the sun shines, the more heat the earth receives.
• The condition of the earth’s surface (land and sea), the land quickly receives heat and quickly releases it, while the nature of the ocean is the opposite of the nature of the land. Many at least clouds, the thickness of the clouds affects the heat received by the earth.
• The more or thicker the clouds, the less heat the earth receives. The distribution of temperature or air temperature can be divided into two, namely horizontal and vertical distribution.

Wind

The next element of weather and climate is wind. Wind is moving air caused by differences in temperature in an area. Differences in temperature on earth cause changes in air pressure and cause wind. The air pressure in an area will increase if the temperature is low, and vice versa.

Cloud

The next element of weather and climate is clouds. Clouds are water droplets or fine ice crystals in the atmosphere that gather together. The air from the rising surface of the earth will cool, thereby increasing the humidity of the air. The air will reach a saturation point with water and become clouds when it reaches a certain height. The number of clouds is strongly influenced by differences in seasons, for example in the dry season the number of clouds is only a few, and conversely in the rainy season the number of clouds will increase.

air humidity

Air humidity is another element of weather and climate. Air humidity is the amount of water vapor present in the air. Air humidity affects the deposition of water in the air which can take the form of clouds, fog, dew and rain. Air humidity consists of two kinds, namely relative humidity and absolute humidity. Air humidity in an area can be measured using a tool called hydrography.

Rainfall

The last element of weather and climate is rainfall. Rainfall is the level of rain intensity in an area. The process of rain begins with the evaporation of water in water sources, namely rivers, lakes, seas and oceans. The water vapor rises into the air and is carried higher by the wind and turns into clouds. Then the cloud will release its water content when it reaches the saturation point. The direction of rain somewhere is measured with an instrument called an obbrometer.

Electricity in the Air

Electricity in the Air That is electricity that is in the atmosphere due to natural phenomena. Generally, this electricity comes from rainstorms with lots of thunder or lightning.

Symptoms encountered in the weather and climate itself include fog (symptoms that occur due to condensation of water vapor near the surface of the ground or cold water. The altitude reaches 500 meters), dew (symptoms that occur due to condensation of water vapor on the surface of the ground, grass, and leaves at night due to humidity, but no wind blowing), El Nino (Symptoms of an increase in Pacific Ocean temperature that occurs around December), La Nina (Symptoms that occur after El Nino weakens due to a decrease in Pacific Ocean temperature around December January).

Also find further discussion in the book Fiscal Policy, Climate Change, and Development Sustainability.

 

The Role of Climate and Weather

The Role of Climate in Agriculture

In Indonesia, where the majority of the population is an agrarian society engaged in the agricultural sector, climate characteristics such as temperature, rainfall, and seasons greatly influence their lives. Climatic factors such as weather and climate are really considered in developing agriculture.

Conditions of temperature, rainfall and seasonal patterns determine the suitability and optimization of agricultural crop cultivation. Likewise in the fisheries or maritime sector , climatic factors such as weather, temperature, and season are very influential, both for fishermen and for the fish to be caught. In general, fishermen really understand weather conditions, especially those related to wind and seasons.

With the knowledge they have, they know when the west monsoons and east monsoons come. When the west wind blows they are very careful in catching fish in the sea. Because the west wind season often causes big waves that endanger them.

And they also know about natural signs such as a big storm is coming, so they will not go down to the sea to catch fish.

 

The Role of Climate in the Field of Transportation

Weather and climate factors have a big role in the field of transportation. Such as weather, temperature, wind direction and speed, clouds, and fog greatly affect the smooth flight path.

Besides affecting aviation, weather and climate factors also affect sea transportation. Such as wind direction and speed, wave height, storms and others.

The Role of Climate for Telecommunications

Weather and climate factors also affect the telecommunication sector. Such as wind currents can be used to communicate between regions using wind telephones. Of course, you already know that weather and climate are the result of processes that occur in the atmosphere or air layers.

The layer of air that envelops the earth consists of several layers, among which is the ionosphere. This layer contains ionized particles that are electrically charged. With this ionosphere layer, radio and television broadcasts can be heard and seen everywhere.

The Role of Climate for Tourism

Weather and climate factors also affect the tourism sector. Such as sunny weather, lots of sunlight, wind speed, cool air, dry, hot, and so on greatly affect the implementation of tours, both land and sea tourism. With the conditions as mentioned, the implementation of tourism will be increasingly enjoyed.

Book Recommendations Regarding Differences in Climate and Weather

 

Smart Science Series: Weather and Life – It’s Time to Travel

Geumbi and Somi are going on a field trip. They were looking forward to this field trip so they really hoped that it wouldn’t rain. To predict the weather, they also tried a myth from Japan, namely throwing shoes high and seeing their position when they fall to the ground. Can this myth be trusted? Is there a scientific way to know the weather forecast?

Climate Change Science

This book consists of 6 chapters containing explanations of the phenomenon of global climate change and its implications.

1. The first chapter provides an explanation of the planetary energy flows.
2. The second chapter discusses the greenhouse gases that play a dominant role in increasing the average temperature of the earth’s surface, namely carbon dioxide (CO2) and methane (CH4).
3. The third chapter describes the conditions of climate fluctuations in the past obtained from observations of ice rocks.
4. The fourth chapter presents a compilation of the findings of experts regarding the changes observed over the last few decades, which indicate the effects of post-industrial revolution climate change.
5. The fifth and sixth chapters explain the efforts that can be made on an individual and global scale to slow down the negative impacts of climate change.
6. Apart from that, there is also an annex which contains examples of cases and methods of analysis, as well as laws and regulations regarding the environment. Written with the aim of forming a basic framework for understanding the phenomenon of climate change and its impacts, which is structured in a logical sequence and language that is easy to understand, and is based on reliable scientific sources.

This book, apart from being a reference in climate change courses, is also expected to be able to encourage various parties to participate in reducing the impacts that may occur as a result of climate change.

why? Climate Change – Climate Change

Animals are endangered, and ultimately our lives are also threatened. This book tells about the causes of climate change and the ways we can do to stop it. With small efforts that we can do together, the Earth will be saved.

Other Articles Related to Differences in Climate and Weather

The difference between Direct and Indirect Investment – ​​Investment is one way to get big profits while protecting assets in the long term. However, many people are still confused about choosing between direct and indirect investment.

Before knowing the difference between the two, Sinaumed’s must first determine goals, prepare funds, and understand investment risks. To make it easier for Sinaumed’s to choose, see the complete discussion regarding direct and indirect investment in the following article.

What is Direct Investment?

The government is trying to make investments that are conducive to increasing capital flows which have an impact on resources and increasing economic growth, the exchange rate of the rupiah against the dollar and interest rates.

Investment in Indonesia can be carried out through direct investment or called Foreign Direct Investment (FDI). According to Krugman in Sarwedi’s journal entitled “Foreign Direct Investment in Indonesia and the Factors Affecting It”, the notion of foreign direct investment is international capital flows where companies from one country establish or expand their companies in other countries. So that there is not only a transfer of resources, but also a transfer of control over companies abroad.

Direct investment is investment in factors of production or assets to do business. For example investment in fisheries, plantations, factories, shops, and other types of businesses. In general, in everyday conversation this type of investment is also referred to as investing in real assets or investments that are easy to see and clearly visible.

This direct investment provides a large multiplier effect for the wider community. This direct investment will have a backward impact, in the form of business input, or in the future, in the form of business output which is input for other businesses.

According to Noor in his book entitled “Managerial Economics”, the notion of foreign direct investment is investment in assets or factors of production to conduct business or business abroad. Investments like this, in general, have a medium or long term nature and have the only goal of gaining profit or profit.

In Article 7 paragraph (2) Presidential Regulation Number 10 of 2021 Concerning Investment Business Fields, foreign investment is required to be in the form of a PT:

1. The flow of foreign direct investment has several advantages, namely:
2. Capital flows are able to reduce the risk of capital ownership by diversifying through investments;
3. Global integration of capital markets can provide the best spread in the formation of corporate governance, accounting rules, and legality, and
4. The global mobility of capital limits the ability of governments to create wrong policies.

Direct Investment Advantages

• Investments made directly can be made in the long term. This means that it can be up to several years in the future and can even be passed on to posterity if it is still possible.
• Someone who invests directly can fully control the portfolio they have. This control can be carried out in order to carry out the buying and or selling process according to his wishes.
• More attractive to many people, despite having a varied risk profile. Usually this big risk can be overcome by only buying several investment instruments or products that are stable or recognized.
• The ability of an investor to invest can make achievements run well. You can even get bigger profits in a fairly short period of time.

Disadvantages of Direct Investment

• Doing analysis on investment instruments such as stocks can be said to be quite a difficult job. If you make a mistake, it can cause your capital to disappear quickly.
• Not everyone has the free time to do analysis and know which stocks can be purchased and have the potential to provide benefits.
• Wrong decisions taken in investing, both sales and purchases, can cause losses in large numbers.
• Managing a portfolio of various types of investment instruments will not be easy so some people often make mistakes because not all of them can be checked one by one.

Types of Direct Investment

To start direct investment, there are 2 types of investment to choose from.

1. Investments to be traded

1. This type of investment can be traded to other people at a certain time which has a fairly increased value. The types of investments that can be traded are:
2. Gold and diamonds
3. Stocks or products in the capital market
4. Land, shop houses and various types of property
5. Products on the money market

2. Investments are not for sale

Types of investment that cannot be traded are bank deposits and savings.

Then, What Is Indirect Investment?

Indirect investment is a type of investment where investors can invest but are not directly involved in the buying and selling process and also its management.

In indirect investment activities, Sinaumed’s simply gives trust to business entities or companies to manage the various assets that Sinaumed’s has. This type of investment is generally a short-term investment and has the goal of getting the maximum profit in a short period of time.

It is called a short-term investment because generally investors will only buy and sell assets they own in a relatively short period of time, so it is very dependent on fluctuations in the value of the assets they want to trade.

Indirect Investment Advantages

• Investment decisions will be implemented by the investment management team or investment manager. This decision has been done so well that the chances of making a mistake are very low.
• An investor can enjoy his free time because he doesn’t need to learn about various things related to stocks. Everything will be managed professionally by the investment manager.
• The risk of making a mistake in choosing or deciding on an investment is very small and the opportunity to make a profit is very large for all investors.
• Most are safe so the risk of getting a loss is very small. Once for those who are beginners and don’t have time to do portfolio management properly.

Disadvantages of Indirect Investment

• Investors will not have any involvement at all in the investment activities they carry out. So, investors will only deposit funds that will later be managed by investment management.
• It is difficult to collect desires or replace any investment instruments that have been made. Usually this method will be time bound for several months or even years before finally the funds can be returned or disbursed.
• There is still the possibility of losses due to wrong investments by investment managers. If you experience a loss, the capital that will return later will also be reduced.

Benefits of Direct and Indirect Investment

Given that the main objective of investment is to gain profit from the investment, there is not much difference between the benefits of direct and indirect investment. Both of them have something in common, namely to provide benefits because they can increase the value of the assets that Sinaumed’s has. In fact, the profit from the investment can be a passive income.

To be clearer, here are the benefits of investing:

• Avoid inflation.
• Increase value for money.
• Adding sources of income and maximizing profits from investments.
• Future savings and preparing for retirement.
• With the investment advantage, Sinaumed’s doesn’t have to work too hard.
• Financially independent.
• Investment can add insight and broaden relationships.
• The investment trains Sinaumed’s to make decisions and be more responsible.

Types of Investment Risk

Investment risk is the level of potential in terms of losses in investment activities, which arise and are caused by investment results that are not in accordance with the targets and expectations of the profit. Every investor must realize that investment not only provides benefits, but also losses.

In the investment world, there are about 7 types of risks that investors should be aware of, including:

1. Interest Rates

The first risk that arises in investing is interest rate risk. This one risk is the type of risk that will be caused by the relative value of an asset that has interest. For example, like bonds or loans that will go bad, due to an increase in interest rates. Another definition of this risk is the type of risk caused by the emergence of changes in interest rates in the market.

This will affect the income from the investment itself. In general, if the interest rate increases, the price of bonds that have interest will continue to decrease. This interest rate risk will generally be measured using the term of the bonds.

2. Market

Market risk is a type of fluctuation risk or rise and fall of a net asset, which originates from changes in sentiment in the financial market. An example is bonds or stocks which are also called types of systematic risk.

Changes that occur are generally caused by recession, economic issues, riots, speculation, and changes in politics. For example, regarding the health issue of a head of state which causes fluctuations in the value of the rupiah to the dollar to increase.

However, if this happens, there is no need to rush to panic. Sinaumed’s can immediately disburse investment funds when there are fluctuations in the market. Increases or decreases in actual assets will not occur repeatedly or continuously.

3. Inflation

Investment risk in terms of inflation is also known as purchasing power risk. This risk is an opportunity for cash flows originating from investments that are not as valuable as in the future, due to changes in the purchasing power of inflation itself.

This risk has the potential to harm people’s purchasing power in an investment. The average increase in consumption prices is the cause of this risk.

Inflation risk is also a type of risk that can be experienced by investors, when they hold money in cash or when they invest in assets that have nothing to do with inflation.

4. Liquidity

Liquidity risk is a type of investment risk that exists due to the difficulty of providing cash at a certain time. For example, when a person is unable to pay obligations in cash when they are due.

Even though the person already has assets with sufficient value to pay their obligations, if the assets cannot be converted to cash then the assets will be called illiquid.

This can happen if the debtor cannot sell the property he owns. Besides that, no one else buys it in the market. However, this is not the same as asset prices dropping drastically.

In the event of a decrease in price, the market has the opinion that the asset has no value. None of the parties wish to buy or exchange their assets, perhaps because it is difficult for the two parties to meet each other.

So this risk is likely to occur in markets that have small volumes or are just growing. This risk also has a relationship with the speed of securities that have been issued by the company and can be traded in the secondary market.

Tips for Choosing the Right Investment

Investments, whether direct or indirect, are actually quite difficult if done haphazardly. That is the reason a person must be able to choose the right investment for himself. Check out how to choose the right investment below.

1. Adjust to Purpose

Before making an investment, you must first pay attention to the purpose of making the investment. Everyone has different investment goals, some are used for short term needs and some are used for long term needs.

So when making an investment, you have to think about what capital or money you will use. Generally, investments are used for long-term purposes so that someone will become more relaxed in choosing the easiest investment instrument with the least risk.

2. Use the Right Funds

Use the funds to make investments with the right and appropriate amount. This means that the funds that will be given later cannot be too small or too large. Because each investment has its own risk, investors must think about the right amount of funds to be allocated to the investment.

3. Diversify

It is better to diversify before choosing the type of investment. Don’t stick to one thing, for example, just invest in stocks, but also use it for other types of investment such as precious metals such as gold.

4. Learn Everything Well

The last thing to do if you want to invest is to study everything related to that theme. This means that everything related to investment must be well studied and then practiced so that mistakes occur.

If an investor is directly involved in terms of buying to selling, it can be said to be a direct investment. However, if the investment is handed over to the management or investment manager it can be said to be an indirect investment.

Definition of Cashback – In the business world, it turns out that there are lots of strategies that can be implemented by a company in order to attract potential buyers. Starting from a unique promotional system, offering discounts or discounts to cashback features that are given to buyers.

Surely you are no stranger to the term cashback. Both through advertisements on TV, pamphlets that are on the road to online media, the term has indeed been widely used. The existence of a cashback feature can also be a special attraction for buyers.

Maybe you’ve only heard of the term cashback without knowing the ins and outs of it. Therefore you can read a review about the meaning of cashback in more detail in this article.

Definition of Cashback

Previously, we briefly explained the meaning of cashback. However, at this point, we will explain more deeply about the meaning of cashback itself.

The definition of cashback is an offer addressed to buyers. Later buyers will get refunds in cash, virtual money or returns in other product forms as long as they meet the product purchase transaction requirements specified by the buyer.

Most of the cashback given by sellers does not go directly to the hands of buyers. Sellers will provide cashback in the form of a deposit first. This is done by the seller is not without reason.

The reason is that this deposit method will be able to make buyers want to shop at another time at the same store using the deposit obtained from the previous cashback. Until now there have been more and more varied forms of giving cashback to buyers. Some companies also decide to provide cashback in kind.

 

 

Advantages of Cashback Promotion for Companies

Currently, many companies have started to dare to use cashback promos for products to be sold. This is not without reason, because there are so many benefits that the company will get from the cashback promotion it does.

So what are some of the benefits that companies will get from cashback promotions? The following is an explanation that you can read regarding some of the benefits that will be obtained from having a cashback promotion for companies.

1. Methods of Attracting New Customers and Retaining Old Customers

In the business world there are lots of competitors who offer the same goods or products. It could be that the products from company A are the same as the products sold by company B. This is where the company owning the product sometimes improves its promotion system so they can sell more of the goods they offer.

Because it is true that retaining old customers and attracting new customers is a difficult thing in such a tight competition.

Therefore, one method that is often used by companies in promoting their products is the cashback feature. Compared to the discount promo or buy 1 get 1, it turns out that the cashback promo looks promising.

The cashback promo offered by the company will be able to bring in new buyers and retain old customers. If it can last for a long time. Then the company will continue to grow and get the number of sales that are in line with the target and can even exceed it.

2. Able to Increase Repeat Orders

The existence of a cashback promo offered will build awareness of potential buyers to make purchase transactions for these products. If indeed the product offered is really in accordance with the needs of the buyer.

So it can mean the buyer will continue to make repeat orders. Even when there is no cashback promo because indeed they can get real benefits when using these items.

On the other hand, when the company offers a new product with a cashback promo. Buyers will also not think twice about using the new product. Because they already believe that the products issued by these companies are indeed capable of providing real benefits when used.

3. Enlarge Transaction Opportunities

Next is the opportunity for transactions that have a greater possibility than usual. As previously explained, the existence of a cashback feature can make it possible to attract potential buyers.

Those who really deal to make purchases of cashback products will also increase transaction opportunities. Especially when they feel the benefits provided by the product that has been purchased.

It is highly likely that they will use the same product next time. This means that they will continue to purchase products on an ongoing basis even though there is no cashback promo offered for that product.

4. Not Undermining the Price

Apart from cashback, you may be familiar with promos for discounts or discounts. But did you know that many think discounts will be given to non-premium products that can be obtained by anyone.

There are even thoughts that discounts or price cuts can damage the price of these goods on the market. This means that the existence of a discount promo will also not have a guarantee of a good ending.

However, the story is different with the cashback promo. Because the cashback promo will not damage the price of the product. You will still purchase goods at the original price even though there is a cashback promo.

But you will get a cashback promo at the end of the transaction. This is where a better impression arises compared to discount promos. That way the price of the goods will not change, even cashback promos can also maintain the perception of buyers.

5. Raising Awareness

The more often cashback promos are given, the more awareness of prospective buyers will be able to make transactions for these products. Especially when the cashback figure given is quite large.

So the greater the interest of buyers to use the product. In addition, buyers will pay attention to these products while the cashback promo is still being offered. This means that a cashback promo for a product will also provide special interest for potential buyers.

Those are some of the advantages that the company will get from having a cashback promo for a product that will be offered to prospective buyers.

 

 

Disadvantages of Cashback Promos

Even though it plays a big role in attracting the interest of potential buyers. It turns out that the cashback promo that you often encounter also has some drawbacks in it, you know. You can read about some of the drawbacks of having a cashback promo in full in the explanation below. Even so, the deficiencies that will be explained in the following points are more towards the requirements specified by the organizer of the promo.

1. Purchase Terms

In cashback promos, there are usually certain purchase conditions that are charged to prospective customers. An example is the cashback promo of 10 percent for a minimum purchase of IDR 250,000.

For customers who make purchases with predetermined minimum requirements. Then they are entitled to get a cashback of 10 percent. Meanwhile, those who buy under IDR 250 thousand will not get a cashback promo.

2. Time of Purchase

When the customer succeeds in getting the predetermined cashback promo. It does not mean that the cashback will be given directly. The reason is there are other provisions that apply related to time.

For example cashback will be given within a period of several days after, it could also be several weeks or several months after the purchase was made by the customer.

3. Fees Given

Even though it’s rare, there are several organizers who emphasize fees given to customers who make purchases so they can get cashback promos.

However, if the customer cannot make dues payments as it should have been determined by the organizers. Automatically the cashback that will be given will also be forfeited.

However, as explained earlier, not all organizers enforce this. Therefore, the customer must also pay attention to every existing promo, especially cashback.

4. Flexibility

In the form of flexibility, it is very rare to find. This means that the organizers will provide cashback only for purchasing certain products. Or it could also be that the cashback given will be in certain forms such as goods.

Types of Cashback

Until now, there are lots of types of cashback that are easy to find around us. But do you also know what types of cashback are often around us. Well if not, then the explanation below will help you to know more.

1. Credit Card Cashback

The first type is credit card cashback. Credit card cashback is a program issued by a certain bank to provide benefits to the owner of that bank’s credit card.

In simple terms, the bank will provide cashback to the credit card owner when making a purchase transaction of an item in a certain amount. This cashback program is not only given in the form of refunds.

But sometimes there are also cashback programs that are given in the form of discounts. Of course, all policies related to the cashback program that are applied also depend on the particular bank.

In addition, the amount of the cashback percentage also varies greatly depending on the nominal amount of the transaction made by the credit card owner. It should also be noted that the greater the nominal amount of transactions made will affect the amount of cashback that will be obtained by the owner of the credit card.

The accumulation obtained from the cashback program can be used to pay contributions, monthly bills or to shop for other goods.

Therefore, when you want to make a credit card, choose a bank that always offers attractive promos, such as cashback features and cooperation with various parties, such as airport facilities.

2. Online Shop Cashback

Next is the online store cashback. Maybe the online store cashback is the easiest for you to find on some of the online shop platforms that you frequently visit.

Online shop cashback is a cashback program that will be given to customers who have made a purchase transaction in a certain nominal amount. Of course, previously the minimum purchase amount had been determined in advance by the online shop.

An example is when an online store provides a cashback promo with a minimum purchase of IDR 250,000. So if you make transactions in the amount of Rp. 250 thousand or more, you will be able to get the cashback promo.

However, it should also be noted that most of the cashback promos provided by online stores are not in the form of refunds. But in the form of a discount when the customer makes the next purchase at the online store.

This means that the cashback promo can only apply in the form of a discount when a customer purchases a product at the same online store. In online stores, this condition can be referred to as consumer loyalty.

Where customers will purchase a product at the same online store in the next period.

3. Cashback Property

In the world of property, cashback promos are also often given. Where cashback property is a cashback program that will be given by the developer or property developer to customers who buy the products they sell.

Whether it’s for the purchase of houses, apartments, shophouses and others sold by the developer or the property developer. Most of the cashback given will be in the form of property supplies.

Examples are like TV, AC, Refrigerator and others. The existence of a cashback promo that is enforced is enough to arouse the interest of buyers. They think that getting a cashback promo will save them the cost of purchasing other properties when they have made a property purchase transaction such as a house, shophouse or apartment at a fairly high price.

4. Motor Vehicle Cashback

Motor vehicle cashback has the same meaning as property cashback. Where motorized cashback will be given by the leasing party to customers who purchase the products they sell, be it motorbikes or cars.

Most of the leasing will provide cashback in the form of goods. An example is a tablet laptop or the provision of motorbikes or cars when a customer buys a certain product that has been predetermined by the leasing party.

The existence of a cashback promo is also considered very effective in attracting buyer interest. Where they think they will get certain prizes when purchasing products on the leasing.

So, those are some types of cashback that we can easily find around us. Of course, Sinaumed’s is no stranger to some of these cashback promos, right?

 

Conclusion

From the explanation above regarding the meaning of cashback, it can be concluded that anyone can have a cashback promo. Because all customers can get a cashback promo when they successfully make a certain amount of purchases which have also been determined by the organizers.

Then the organizers will also get various benefits from the cashback promo they offer. One of them is the existence of loyal behavior on the part of the customer.

This is because the customer will purchase certain items from the company that provides the cashback promo. In addition, the condition of customer loyalty is also supported by cashback in the form of price discounts.

This means that this cashback promo can apply when a customer purchases goods at the same store and they will get a discount in accordance with the applicable provisions. This also allows the company or party organizing the cashback promo to get certain profits or benefits.

However, the organizers or the company must also really make accurate profit or loss calculations.

This is an explanation regarding the meaning of cashback, advantages, disadvantages, and types of cashback promos. Sinaumed’s can read books on consumer behavior as well as marketing which you can get at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides #MoreWithReading information.

Characteristics of Anecdote Text – Does Sinaumed’s know what an anecdote text is? Anecdotes are a type of text in Indonesian that you need to know. In practice, anecdotal texts also have a purpose and function and can be found in various sources, such as newspapers, magazines and so on. Simple, anecdotal text contains stories that contain humor but have a function to criticize something, such as social conditions, politics, and so on.

That is why anecdotal texts have a function in existence for social criticism. If Sinaumed’s wants to make an anecdote text, then it needs to know several things, including the characteristics of anecdote text, structure, elements, rules, and examples. Here is an explanation of the full text of the anecdote:

Definition of Anecdote Text

In general, these examples of anecdotal texts often describe the unique behavior of important people that are interesting to study. The anecdotal texts are not only satirical, but also full of moral messages and messages for the general public to learn. The contents of anecdotes tell the social reality that occurs in people’s daily lives, but are packaged in a light and non-judgmental manner.

Apart from anecdotes in text format, they are often presented in the form of dialogue or pictures which provide interesting examples with implicit messages that have very deep meanings. According to experts, there are many views on the meaning of anecdotal texts. The following is the meaning of anecdotal text according to experts:

1. Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI)

The definition of anecdote text in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (2008) is a short story that is packaged in an interesting and impressive way. The stories mentioned are generally about important figures. In government, anecdotal texts exist as a form of concern about possible problems and as a sign of public discomfort or that felt by many people.

2. According to the Ministry of Education and Culture Team

Meanwhile, according to the Ministry of Education and Culture Team (2013), anecdotal texts are short stories that tell stories of famous and important people. The messages conveyed by stories in anecdotal texts can make readers feel stupid, funny, frustrated, and emotional, as well as other responses. It was also stated that anecdotal texts can evoke complex emotions in readers. It starts with comfort (realete), frustration, satisfaction, failure, and other people’s mixed feelings.

3. According to Keraf

The definition of anecdotal text according to Keraf (1995) comes from the Greek word “Analyze” which means “to go”, then “an” which means above, and “Iyein” which means an analytical term which can be interpreted as a bound explanation. If interpreted as a whole, anecdotal texts are drawn from the analysis. That is, it is used to accurately and accurately describe or examine the structure and conventions of text.

4. According to Prasetyo

Prasetyo wrote that anecdotal texts are fictitious stories that don’t have to be about famous people and don’t have to be based on facts. Anecdotes can be written based on events that are frustrating, ridiculous, or important. It was also stated that anecdotal texts were written as a form of author’s criticism to overcome the conflict between comfort and discomfort.

Well, that’s what the experts say about anecdotal texts. From the opinion above, we can conclude that anecdotal text is a story that is packaged in a fun and unique way that can provoke various emotions in people. Starting from emotions, anger, frustration, fun and entertainment. So, the basis for writing anecdotal texts is in the form of criticism or satire without directly offending certain people.

Features of Anecdote Text

1. Include Participants

The first feature of anecdotal text is the fact that it displays participants who can be used as objects in the narrative material of anecdotal texts. With the understanding of the participants who can be involved in anecdotal texts based on the opinions of the experts above, the participants shown can take on characters that don’t have to be celebrities or famous people. Foreigners can also participate.

2. Contains Interesting Elements

As mentioned in the definition above, anecdotal text contains interesting elements. An anecdote is an interesting piece, but still contains an important message about the current topic or topic.

3. Has a Satirical Format

Even if written with humor, satire should be included. This is the difference between anecdotal text and other texts. However, this text is actually conceptualized and designed as a critique of the conditions and circumstances that occur around us. At the same time, demonstrations are in the form of short anecdotes, but the messages conveyed are full of entertainment so that messages pass more quickly.

4. Using Conjunctions

Conjunctions are words that connect sentences, phrases and phrases. There are many types of conjunctions, depending on their function. For example, the types of conjunctions are additive, contradictory conjunctions, segregated conjunctions, time conjunctions, final conjunctions, causal conjunctions, continuous conjunctions, conditional conjunctions, unconditional conjunctions, comparative conjunctions, correlated conjunctions, affirmative conjunctions, descriptive continuing conjunctions, concessions, and so on.

5. Is tickling for readers

The story or case that is raised must be very interesting. Namely, tickling because tickled, exasperated, emotional, or other feelings.

6. The presentation of the story is like a fairy tale

Presentation of writing is made like a fairy tale. Even if it is written like a fairy tale in terms of message or story, anecdotal text is more real, not fantasy as a whole.

7. Narrated Realistically

Of course, anecdotal texts are written realistically, prioritizing logic in terms of sending messages. Writing anecdotes requires more skill to impress the text of these anecdotes.

8. Can About Important People

As mentioned before, the characters and people written are from important personalities and people who in fact have had problems in the real world. So, in terms of writing an anecdote text, it’s not just writing an ordinary story. Make sure there is criticism, including satire when writing it.

Anecdote Text Structure

1. Characters Are Factual

Factual characters or figures are characters who are named, well-known, and very popular. Facts can make it easier to convey messages to readers of the text.

2. Real Flow

The meaning of the real plot is the storyline that must be followed based on the actual series of events. Therefore, it is not based on the imagination or subjective message of the anecdote text writer.

3. Has a Time, Place, and Atmosphere

Regarding the setting, in writing anecdotes we need to pay attention to the setting of time, place and atmosphere. The most important thing in telling anecdotes is to prioritize factual information. Backgrounds can be divided into two formats, namely location and time settings.

4. Abstraction

Abstract is an introductory paragraph that provides a brief explanation of the subject being discussed. Then what is emphasized? Of course it is unique to let others read to the end.

5. Orientation

Orientation is the beginning of a story or the background of an event. Well, this orientation section is for the author to write completely and comprehensively.

6. Crisis

It cannot be denied that when writing an anecdote text, there must be something offensive. For example, finding unique and unusual problems directly experienced by the author or other people.

7. Reaction

Based on the experience found, this encourages the writer to try to solve the problems and experiences he has experienced before.

8. Code

The final structure is the coda, which is the final part of the story. Now, someone wrote some code in a unique and interesting story. Some write conclusions about the events that the author experienced. This is part of the anecdote text structure. The use of structure is used to make it easier for writers to convey messages and criticism together.

Elements of Anecdote Text

1. Figures

The difference between characters in anecdotal texts is that they are real participants, not fictitious characters created by the author. In general, participants are characters with quite popular names.

2. Storyline

The storyline that is wrapped in a series of stories is called the storyline. When writing short stories and novels, Sinaumed’s can create plots based on the author’s imagination. In anecdotal texts, the action takes place actually, not imaginatively.

3. Background

Background contains several formats, namely time, place, and atmosphere. In making choices, especially for anecdotal texts, they are facts and must be in accordance with what happened in real life.

Purpose of the Anecdote Text

1. Make Readers Laugh

The purpose of the anecdote text is nothing but to entertain the readers who see it. It’s an interesting read, but still emphasizes factual messages and fact-free entertainment.

2. As Entertainment

Anecdote texts are primarily used for entertainment. Anecdotes are not always written down, some are accompanied by very interesting illustrations.

3. As a Form of Criticism

As mentioned earlier, this anecdote is written in the context of a critique of a hot event, moment or events that occur in social life.

Anecdote Text Rules

1. Shows Past Time

The main rule of the anecdote text and the most prominent one is showing the past, that is, it can show the time, day, year or month in a factual event.

2. Use of Conjunctions

Conjunctions or conjunctions are required, as they are included in the nature of the text. Conjunctions have two parts, namely conjunctions between words and conjunctions between sentences and conjunctions between paragraphs.

3. Use of Verbs

The rule to observe is the spelling of the verb. Maybe someone is still confused with the verb form? For example reading, running, laughing, silent, crying, and so on.

4. Written in Chronological Order

It is very important to write chronologically based on the chronological order in which they occur. This method is easy for readers to understand. The elements of time and chronology are rules that cannot be ignored, because the text of anecdotes is entertainment based on facts.

5. Using Rhetorical Questions

Rhetorical questions are questions that do not require an answer. This rhetorical question is very interesting. If Sinaumed’s can play this question well, this text will feel more unique.

6. Use of Statements

Statements are also used when writing anecdotal texts. According to the use of sentences, this statement also indirectly convinces the reader.

• How to make book reviews and examples
• Explanation of the Definition of Review Sentences and Examples
• Definition of Opinion: Characteristics, Types, and How to Make It

Example of anecdote text

Based on the explanation of the anecdote text above, Sinaumed’s can begin to understand the text with the following types of anecdotal text examples:

1. Examples of Simple Anecdotes

Borrow money

A man came to the bank and said he wanted to borrow Rp. 20,000,000 for six months. He pawned the Rolls-Royce and asked the bank to hold the car until the debt was paid. Six months later, the man returned to the bank, paying Rp. 20,000,000 and Rp. 10,000,000 interest and return it. When asked why the person driving the Rolls-Royce needed a loan of Rp. 20,000,000, the loan officer said, “I have to go to Europe for six months and I can leave my Rolls-Royce for Rp. Another 10,000,000. Is it true?” The cop woke up and after a few moments laughed at the cunning Rolls-Royce owner.

2. Examples of Educational Anecdotes

SBI: International School

Public school teachers have told their students that they will change the status of their school to SBI School.

“Children, good news for all of us. Soon our school will become an SBI school (School with International Standards). I want to ask what should be prepared to welcome this.

“Joni, what are you doing to welcome this? “Ask the teacher further.

Joni immediately answered the teacher’s question. “Learn English. Let’s speak English,” Joni answered.

And you, John?” I asked Mr. Shirono.

“I have money for preparations, sir,” replied John.

“Do you know why it’s money?” Ask the teacher further.

“Yes, Sir. The problem is if our school has SBI status, the costs will be higher. Do we pay the same as regular schools? That’s it, I’m sure we will be charged for this”, continued Jono.

“Why is your answer so cynical? As you know, if our school meets international standards, it means that our school is on par with foreign schools. So they are like studying abroad, “continued the teacher.

“But in my opinion SBI is not an international standard school, but an international standard school,” continued John.

3. Examples of Political Anecdotes

Stories from the Corruption Court

At the height of the political corruption trial, prosecutors attacked witnesses. “Is it true?” Said the accuser, “Did you get Rp. 100,000,000 to compromise in this case?” The witnesses were outside the window as if he didn’t hear the question. I see. “Isn’t it right that you compromised on this and got Rp. 100,000,000?” The lawyer repeated. The witness has not yet commented. Finally the judge said, “Please answer the prosecutor’s question.” “Oh, sorry.” Witnesses were shocked when they said to the judge, “I thought he was talking to you.”

Well, that’s an explanation of the characteristics of anecdote text, elements, structure, purpose, rules and examples . Is Sinaumed’s interested in writing anecdotes? In order to better master the text, you can study Sinaumed’s through the sinaumedia book collection at www.sinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations on anecdotal texts and other types of text: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits.

Book & Article Recommendations

 

Uses of Sulfur – Almost all natural materials in this world can be used or have their uses, one of which is sulfur. For some people, they may already know what sulfur is, especially for those who have used this natural resource.

Even so, not everyone knows about sulfur and its uses. If you don’t know that yet, you don’t need to worry because this article will discuss the meaning of sulfur and its uses. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Sulfur

Sulfur or sulfur is a non-metallic element whose original form is a yellow crystalline solid. Naturally, sulfur can be found as a pure element or mineral in volcanoes. Sulfur is a resource that is widely used by humans as a raw material for sulfuric acid.

In addition, sulfur is commonly used in matches, gunpowder, insecticides, fungicides, and so on. Pure sulfur is odorless. The smell that appears actually comes from the many compounds contained in sulfur.

Sulfur and sulfates are not toxic, but carbon disulfide, hydrogen sulfide and sulfur dioxide are all toxic. What’s more, hydrogen sulfide is very dangerous, so it can cause death. Sulfur dioxide is produced when unrefined coal and oil are burned.

In the atmosphere, sulfur dioxide can cause acid rain. If left unchecked, this will cause many living things to die because some of the toxic aluminum salts dissolve and are taken up by living things.

Behind the pungent smell, the benefits of sulfur for the health of the body are no joke. In fact, this one mineral has long been used as an alternative medicine to treat various health problems. Sulfur is a chemical element that is commonly found in volcanoes.

This mineral known as sulfur is often used as an ingredient in the manufacture of sulfate and phosphate fertilizers to support plant growth. Therefore, sulfur is widely used in the agricultural sector. However, not only in agriculture, sulfur also provides many benefits in the health sector.

 

Facts About Sulfur

According to Jefferson Lab, quoted from Live Science , here are some facts about sulfur:

1. Atomic number (number of protons in the nucleus): 16
2. Atomic symbol (on the periodic table of elements): S
3. Atomic weight (average atomic mass): 32.065
4. Density: 2.067 grams per cubic cm
5. Phase at room temperature: Solid
6. Melting point: 115.21 degrees Celsius
7. Boiling point: 444.6 degrees Celsius
8. Number of isotopes (atoms of the same element with different numbers of neutrons): 23.

Sulfur is very important for living things. This is because it can be taken up as sulfate from soil or seawater by plants and algae. Then, it can be used to make the two essential amino acids needed to make protein.

Today, modern sulfur production comes almost entirely from the various refining processes used to remove sulfur from natural gas, oil and tar sands. All living things contain sulfur and when it becomes fossilized, the sulfur is still there. Therefore, burning impure fossil fuels will create sulfur dioxide that can enter the atmosphere.

Benefits and Uses of Sulfur

In fact, there are various uses of sulfur for health, here are some of the uses of sulfur for health that Sinaumed’s needs to know:

1. Overcoming Skin Problems

Sulfur is a chemical element that has a pungent odor and is usually found in volcanoes. This mineral is also called sulfur which can be processed into white powder. In pure sulfur also found some content such as Epsom salt and gypsum. Sulfur can be processed into compounds such as sulfuric acid, sulfides, and sulfates that are used in shampoos and fertilizers.

The skin is the outermost part of the body, so it is prone to disturbances or problems. Well, there are many ways to deal with various skin problems, one of which is to use sulfur.

However, there are still many people who question the efficacy of sulfur for the skin. In the pharmaceutical world, sulfur has long been used to treat several skin problems such as warts, rosacea, and seborrheic dermatitis.

Sulfur also acts as a keratolytic agent which can exfoliate dead skin cells. Another function of sulfur is to kill bacteria, fungi, and parasites that cause scurvy.

In fact, sulfur has many ingredients that are beneficial to the body, especially the skin, when applied. This is because sulfur is known for its anti-bacterial and anti-inflammatory properties. When used in skin care, sulfur works to absorb excess oil that can cause acne by drying the surface of the skin and opening clogged pores.

Apart from removing dead skin cells, sulfur can also treat acne by overcoming blockages in the skin pores. Research also shows that sulfur is known to be useful for treating psoriasis, although this still needs further research. The use of sulfur-based products for external use should be accompanied by a doctor’s prescription.

If you want to use an over-the-counter sulfur product, be sure to read the label and directions for use carefully.

Also, always wash your hands with soap before and after using sulfur-based products. Products for external use in the form of creams or lotions should not be applied to chapped skin because it can actually worsen the condition experienced.

Likewise with several other body parts, such as the eyelids, lips, nose, and mouth. If you have a rash or other signs of allergies after using sulfur-based products, stop using them immediately and consult a doctor.

For more details, here are the benefits of sulfur on the skin, namely:

a. Clean Pores

Sulfur is a naturally occurring mineral found in hot springs, clay and volcanic ash. One of the benefits of this mineral is that it is effective in eliminating bacteria which is effective for dealing with acne prone skin.

Sulfur kills bacteria and draws out oil, while reducing buildup in pores and making them smaller. This pungent-smelling natural mineral is able to kill bacteria that clog and irritate skin pores.

b. Exfoliation

The keratolytic properties of sulfur can cause mild peeling of the top layer of the skin. This can help the body get rid of dead skin cells that can cause clogged pores, breakouts, uneven texture, and dullness.

You can apply beauty products containing sulfur to have healthier and more beautiful skin.

c. Overcoming Acne

Some topical products for acne contain benzoyl peroxide which may be too harsh on someone with sensitive skin. This can cause irritation and severe peeling, up to an allergic reaction.

An alternative is to use sulfur, which is gentler in removing stains. This is able to reduce acne by tackling new bacteria and their spread. Dirt and excess oil can cause acne. Some anti-acne products usually contain sulfur.

Sulfur is able to reduce the accumulation of excess oil that can clog pores. Sulfur is usually found in cosmetic products for mild acne. Sulfur is also considered milder than benzoyl peroxide for treating acne. Benzoyl peroxide tends to cause allergic reactions, irritation, or peeling skin.

d. Lifting Dead Skin Cells

Exfoliation is a technique that helps exfoliate dead skin cells. Usually, exfoliate using salt or sugar scrubs or exfoliator products that contain BHA (Beta Hydroxy Acid or salicylic acid).

Besides being used in anti-acne products, sulfur is also used as an exfoliating agent. Sulfur is keratolytic, which means it can peel off the outer skin layer, making it suitable for removing dead skin cells.

A spokesperson for luxury skincare brand Gazelle added that sulfur is used in many face masks and can be used to help control dermatitis.

e. Prevents Skin Aging

To maintain skin elasticity, collagen needs must be fulfilled. Unfortunately, as you get older, collagen production decreases and your skin becomes dry, saggy, and starts to wrinkle.

Especially if the skin continues to be exposed to pollution and sunlight, the skin will age faster. Aging can be prevented or slowed down with anti-aging products, aka rejuvenation. Well, sulfur is often added to these rejuvenating products.

Sulfur can kill bacteria that damage the skin while stimulating collagen production.

f. Overcoming Dandruff

Apart from being used as an exfoliating agent, sulfur can be used as a treatment for scalp dandruff.

Sulfur helps a scaly scalp to exfoliate more quickly and improves hair texture, suppleness and shine.

g. Treat Panu and Ringworm

The benefits of sulfur can also be felt to cure phlegm and ringworm. The results of sulfur for tinea versicolor and ringworm can be seen by mixing sulfur powder with vegetable oil, then applying it to the areas of the skin where phlegm and ringworm are present.

h. Overcoming Itches

Another benefit of sulfur is to treat itching on the skin. In the journal The Antibacterial Properties of Sulfur stated that sulfur has antibacterial properties that can inhibit bacterial growth.

In another study, sulfur has been known as an antibacterial agent that can be administered orally to treat various bacterial infection problems. Sulfur is also used topically for treatment of infected skin. Applying sulfur to the skin can help with scabies and itching caused by mite bites.

The problem of itching is usually caused by bacteria and germs, if not treated immediately, then over time the skin will become irritated because it is scratched too often. For that, soaking in sulfur water can be done by sufferers of itching.

The hot nature of sulfur, and its anti-bacterial content are able to eradicate germs as well as fungi and bacteria that cause skin diseases such as itching, scabs and scabies to heal effectively. Usually, sulfur will be used as a mask so that the itching can disappear.

Here’s how to make a sulfur mask, namely:

• Use enough sulfur (use about 2-3 tablespoons of sulfur that has been refined.
• Give some water.
• Stir the sulfur until it mixes well with the water and has a paste-like texture.
• Sulfur is ready to be used for masks.
• After cleaning your face by washing, this mask is ready to be applied to your face evenly.

This sulfur mask can also be added with other ingredients such as honey, olive oil, coconut oil, and rose water.

 

2. Overcoming Rosacea

The next use of sulfur for the skin is to help overcome rosacea. Sulfur is said to be helpful for treating rosacea, a chronic condition that causes facial redness.

Sulfur, which is anti-inflammatory in the skin, can treat the symptoms of rosacea. This mineral can reduce inflammation and kill bacteria that can control rosacea symptoms. Some topical creams can get rid of bumps, redness, and dryness on the face.

3. Overcoming Eczema

Eczema is a skin problem characterized by dry, itchy skin and a red rash on the skin. Many also refer to eczema as atopic dermatitis which refers to skin inflammation.

Some people use sulfur as a natural treatment for eczema. Sulfur has medicinal and therapeutic properties to relieve eczema symptoms, such as inflammation, dry skin, and itching.

Eczema is a skin disease that causes skin redness, itching, and irritation. Sulfur-based medications are often prescribed instead of eczema antibiotics. Sulfur which is anti-inflammatory in the skin can overcome the symptoms of eczema.

If you often experience eczema, it’s a good idea to apply topical products with sulfur content so that this skin problem is resolved.

There are several factors that can trigger eczema, one of which is due to certain foods such as nuts and dairy products. Even though it is not contagious, eczema makes sufferers uncomfortable because it continues to feel itchy and does not go away.

Eczema can heal if smeared with cream or lotion containing sulfur. The antibacterial properties of sulfur can relieve itching and redness due to eczema.

4. Treating Arthritis Pain

Sulfur can also be processed into supplements. Sulfur supplements are often used to reduce pain caused by arthritis, both osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis.

In addition, sulfur in the form of methylsulfonylmethane (MSM) is also known to be good for joint health and helps form connective tissue, such as cartilage, tendons and ligaments.

However, the benefits of sulfur for the treatment of joint pain are still in the realm of speculation and further research is needed to ensure its safety and effectiveness.

5. Overcoming Bladder Inflammation

In several countries, sulfur is used to treat chronic inflammation of the bladder. This condition is characterized by symptoms of frequent urination at night and the appearance of pain in the bladder.

To treat inflammation of the bladder, a specially processed sulfur-containing liquid will be inserted directly into the bladder using a catheter. However, before this procedure is carried out, the patient will be given general anesthesia, because the process causes pain and causes contractions in the bladder.

6. Overcoming Blood Circulation

Another benefit of sulfur water is that it can improve blood circulation. Sulfur water contains various minerals, such as calcium and sodium bicarbonate.

When our bodies soak in sulfur water, our bodies absorb these minerals, thereby increasing blood circulation and oxygen flow in the body as a whole.

The water content of sulfur helps the liver in the process of detoxification or removing toxins. In addition, inhaling steam from sulfur water is also useful for treating several respiratory problems such as asthma, sinuses, allergies and so on.

7. Relieves Fatigue

The next use of sulfur is that it can help relieve fatigue. The benefits of sulfur water when used for bathing can help relieve fatigue and calm the mind. Pressure on hot sulfur water can have a relaxing effect on muscles and joints.

If done regularly, soaking in sulfur water can help improve blood circulation, thereby maintaining stamina so you don’t tire quickly. This can also help someone who has difficulty sleeping so that they can become calmer and sleepier.

Even though it provides various benefits, you should not carelessly use sulfur to treat certain medical conditions. It is recommended that you consult with your doctor first to ensure the safety of its use. Those are some of the uses of sulfur for the body, I hope this article is useful for Sinaumed’s.

Thus a review of the usefulness of sulfur for health and interesting facts. Sinaumed’s can get more information by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Order of the President of Indonesia – Indonesia as a country with a government in the form of a republic. This also means that this country is headed by a president. In addition, Indonesia also adheres to a democratic system so that the president and his deputy are then directly elected by the people through general elections (pemilu).

Since its independence in 1945 until now Indonesia has been led by seven presidents. So, here’s a review of the order of the Indonesian president and his deputies, cabinet names, and their terms of office!

Order of Indonesian Presidents from the Beginning to the Present

Soekarno (1945–1967)

Soekarno’s Term of Office: From 18 August 1945 to 12 March 1967
Vice President Soekarno: Mohammad Hatta (Office from 18 March 1945 to 1 December 1956)
Name of Soekarno’s Cabinet:

• Liberal Democracy of the Natsir Cabinet (From 6 September 1950–21 March 1951)
• Sukiman Cabinet (From 26 April 1951–23 February 1951)
• Wilopo Cabinet (Starting from 30 March 1952–2 June 1953)
• Cabinet of Ali Sastroamidjojo I (From 30 July 1953–24 July 1955)
• Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet (From 12 August 1955–3 March 1956)
• Cabinet of Ali Sastroamidjojo II (From 20 March 1956–14 March 1957)
• Djuanda/Karya Cabinet (From 9 April 1957–5 July 1959)
• Working Cabinet Guided Democracy I (From 10 July 1959–18 February 1960)
• Working Cabinet II (From 18 February 1960–6 March 1962)
• Working Cabinet III (From 6 March 1962–13 November 1963)
• Working Cabinet IV (From 13 November 1963–27 August 1966)
• Dwikora I Cabinet (Starting from 27 August–22 February 1966)
• Dwikora II Cabinet (From 24 February 1966–28 March 1966)
• Dwikora III Cabinet (From 28 March 1966–28 March 1966)
• Ampera I Cabinet (From 28 July 1966–11 October 1967)
• Ampera II Cabinet From (17 October 1967–10 June 1968)

The Proclaimer and the first President of the Republic of Indonesia were Ir. Soekarno who was born on June 6, 1901 in Surabaya, East Java, of course his name will always be remembered by all Indonesian people, especially because he later played an important role during the struggle for independence at the hands of the colonialists.

In addition to reading out the text of the proclamation on August 17, 1945, Bung Karno, as he is affectionately known, took part in expressing ideas related to the five principles which must then be adhered to in Indonesia.

These five principles were later known as Pancasila, the foundation of the Indonesian state. Bung Karno’s presidency did not start with an election by the MPR (People’s Consultative Assembly) or the Indonesian people themselves. However, he was elected by acclamation as the first President of the Republic of Indonesia at the PPKI meeting, August 18, 1945.

Suharto (1967–1998)

Suharto’s term of office was: Starting from 27 March 1968 (inauguration of the position as the second president of the Republic of Indonesia) – 21 May 1998
Deputy President Suharto was:

• Hamengkubuwono IX (Term of Office: 24 March 1973–23 March 1978)
• Adam Malik (Term of Office: 23 March 1978–11 March 1983)
• Umar Wirahadikusumah (Term of Office: 11 March 1983–11 March 1988)
• Soedharmono (Term of Office: 11 March 1988–11 March 1993)
• Try Sutrisno (Term of Office: 11 March 1993–11 March 1998)
• Bacharuddin Jusuf Habibie (Term of Office: 11 March 1988–21 May 1998)

Name of Suharto’s Cabinet:

• Development Cabinet I (Term: 10 June 1968–28 March 1973)
• Development Cabinet II (Term: 28 March 1973–29 March 1978)
• Development Cabinet III (Term: 31 March 1978–19 March 1983)
• IV Development Cabinet (Term: 19 March 1983–21 March 1988)
• Development Cabinet V (Term: 23 March 1988–17 March 1993)
• Development Cabinet VI (Term: 17 March 1993–14 March 1998)
• VII Development Cabinet (Term: 14 March 1998–21 May 1998)

On March 12, 1967, during the holding of the MPRS Special Session, a major general of the TNI was then officially sworn in as the new president of the Republic of Indonesia, replacing Soekarno. He is Suharto. Born June 8, 1921 in Kemusuk, Yogyakarta, Suharto’s inauguration marked the end of the Old Order and the start of the New Order (Orba) period.

This Order itself has aspirations to implement Pancasila and the 1945 Constitution purely and consistently. This is expected to create national stability, starting from the political, social and economic aspects

BJ Habibie (1998–1999)

BJ Habibie’s Term of Office: From 21 May 1998–20 October 1999
Deputy President BJ Habibie: –
Name of Bj Habibie’s Cabinet: Development Reform Cabinet (Started from 23 May 1998–20 October 1999)

The reform movement carried out by the students finally succeeded in overthrowing Suharto’s leadership, which had been in power for approximately 32 years in Indonesia. After his resignation, the presidency was shifted to the incumbent vice president, namely Bacharuddin Jusuf (BJ) Habibie, on 10–13 November 1998.

A number of parties later stated that his appointment was controversial because it was considered unconstitutional and was a continuation of the New Order era. However, in reality, the policies taken were actually in line with the reform agenda, starting from freeing New Order political prisoners, abolishing Press Publishing Business Permits (SIUPP), repealing subversion laws and guaranteeing freedom of assembly and expression.

In addition, during his short presidency, BJ Habibie also issued several policies, namely:

• Politics : Holding various memorandums for the people of East Timor which later resulted in the release of this territory from Indonesia to become an independent state and drafted a law against corruption in 1999 to eradicate KKN practices.
• Economy : Stipulates an anti-monopoly law which is then regulated in Law Number 5 of 1999.
• Supplying rice at a more affordable price.
• Involve the various roles of small and medium traders and cooperatives in rice distribution.
• Carrying out reforms in banking matters.

Abdurrahman Wahid (1999–2001)

Abdurrahman Wahid’s Term of Office: From 20 October 1999–23 July 2001
Deputy President Abdurrahman Wahid: Megawati Soekarnoputri (From 20 October 1999–23 July 2001)
Cabinet Name: National Unity Cabinet (from 29 October 1999–23 July 2001)

The first election in the reform era was held on June 7, 1999. The results of this election then showed that PDIP had received the most votes (33.74 percent), followed by Golkar (22.44 percent), PKB (12.61 percent), PPP ( 10.71 percent), and PAN (7.12 percent). The MPR, which was later formed through the results of the 1999 election, was then tasked with electing a president and vice president.

At that time, there were two presidential candidates, namely KH Abdurrahman Wahid and Megawati Soekarnoputri. Then, on October 20, 1999, the MPR chose Abdurrahman Wahid as the fourth president of the Republic of Indonesia, accompanied by Megawati Soekarnoputri as his deputy.

Born on August 4, 1940, Abdurrahman Wahid, or Gus Dur as he is familiarly called, has a very strong religious education background. Nevertheless, his national insight also need not be doubted.

Megawati Soekarnoputri (2001–2004)

Term of Office of Megawati Soekarnoputri: From 23 July 2001–20 October 2004
Deputy President Megawati Soekarnoputri: Hamzah Haz (Started from 23 July–20 October 2004)
Name of Megawati Soekarnoputri’s Cabinet: Gotong Royong Cabinet (Started from 10 August 2001–20 October 2004)

Despite having the title of daughter of the late first president of Indonesia, Megawati still failed to win the presidency in the 1999 election. This was due to the political maneuvers initiated by Amien Rais through the Central Axis (PAN, PK, PBB, PPP) so that she was then able to push Gus Dur to be elected as president.

Apart from that, the slogan ABM (Originally Not Mega) was also touted by the rival political party PDI-P. However, Abdurrahman Wahid’s resignation after being impeached by the MPR then opened up a golden opportunity for Megawati. On July 23, 2001, Megawati Soekarnoputri was then officially sworn in as the fifth president of the Republic of Indonesia, replacing Abdurrahman Wahid, based on MPR Decree No. 3

In 2001, as Indonesia’s first female president, Megawati’s government was then faced with many problems, one of the most crucial of which was seeking efforts to restore the economy and uphold the law.

Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono (2004–2014)

Term of Office of Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono: Starting from 20 October 2004–20 October 2014
Deputy President Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono:
Muhammad Jusuf Kalla (Starting from 20 October 2004–20 October 2009)
Boediono (Starting from 20 October 2009–20 October 2014)
Cabinet Name:

• United Indonesia Cabinet I (Starting from 21 October 2004–20 October 2009)
• United Indonesia Cabinet II (Starting from 22 October 2014–22 October 2014)

The sixth president in the order of Indonesian presidents is Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono or SBY. Even though in previous periods these elections had been held, in fact SBY and Jusuf Kalla were president and vice president who were directly elected by the people.

Not much different from the previous government, the policies pursued by the cabinet formed by SBY then focused on improving the economy. It can be said, the economic conditions in this era then became better.

In fact, Indonesia managed to pay off the IMF debt. In addition, SBY-Kalla also succeeded in resolving various problems with the Free Aceh Movement (GAM) through the Helsinki Agreement. The threat of terrorism was later mitigated by the arrest of the Bali Bombing terrorists and JW Marriott.

Joko Widodo (2014–present)

Joko Widodo Term of Office: Starting from 20 October 2014–present
Vice President Joko Widodo:
Muhammad Jusuf Kalla (Starting from 20 October 2014–20 October 2019)
Ma’ruf Amin (Starting from 20 October 2019–present)
Cabinet Name:

• Working Cabinet (Starting from 27 October 2014–20 October 2019)
• Indonesia Onward Cabinet (Starting from 23 October 2019–present)

From the furniture business to eventually entering politics, Born on June 21, 1961, his involvement in politics began when he was still in Solo. Having experience leading the Indonesian Furniture Manufacturers Association (Asmindo) then made a member of the organization participate in encouraging Jokowi to participate in the 2005 Solo Election.

As it turned out, he was later elected as Mayor of Solo for the 2005–2010 and 2010–2017 periods. From mayor, Jokowi rose again to become governor for DKI Jakarta province in the 2012–2017 period together with Basuki Tjahaja Purnama (Ahok). Experience as a governor then became a springboard to rise to a higher level, namely the presidency.

Supported by the PDI-P, the Jokowi-Jusuf Kalla pair then won the election in 2014 and were finally inaugurated on October 20, 2014 as the new Indonesian President and Vice President pair to date.

Related Books

Pak Kalla and the President

2004-2009 was the most dynamic period at the Palace. For the first time, the President and Vice President were directly elected by the people. A pair of leaders with unique and opposite characters presents dynamics and questions: who are the real leaders?

In an effort to find answers to these questions, this book comes from the notes of Kompas journalist Wisnu Nugroho on the Kompasiana blog. An insignificant story related to Vice President Jusuf Kalla’s relationship with President Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono which raises anxiety, is shared in a mischievous and humorous manner.

The insignificant story about the Vice President’s other side in Mr. Kalla and his President’s book frees us from the image trap that has so far trapped Mr. Kalla as a businessman. After being free from the image trap, hopefully we can answer the question: who is the real leader?

President Jokowi (Indonesia’s New Hope)

Jokowi’s presence has contributed to a new nuance in the world of Indonesian politics, especially when he was running for president. Likewise, his companion figure, Jusuf Kalla, has enriched the predictions of the government under the leadership of Jokowi and JK.

All of this discussion is summarized in the collection of writings that you are currently holding. This book is not the first time to review the figure of Joko Widodo or Jusuf Kalla. However, being the first to publish the writings and analysis of ordinary citizens who are members of Kompasiana.com who discussed Jokowi and JK as well as when they were presidential and cawapres pairs

It begins with an analysis of the strength of Jokowi’s branding—and also Prabowo’s—during the presidential election and ends with a letter from a resident of Solo to Jokowi and JK. President Jokowi: Indonesia’s New Hope, a collection of writings by 21 selected Kompasiana members, for Indonesia.

Position of Vice President According to Indonesian Constitutional Law

This book describes various conflicts between presidential institutions (President and Vice President) in Indonesia which are based on objective and subjective factors as indicators attached to the two institutions.

This book is very useful for Constitutional Law and Comparative Constitutional Law courses because it explains the comparative method as a special approach. This means that the author uses a comparative method in analyzing the various duties and powers of the Vice President in several countries, such as the United States, the Philippines, the People’s Republic of China, Iraq, India, Bulgaria and Cyprus.

That is the order of the President of Indonesia from the beginning to the present.

The 50 Best Universities in Indonesia – If you are currently still in grade 12 of high school/equivalent and want to continue studying at your favorite PTN/PTS but are confused about where to study.

Apart from paying attention to career opportunities after graduation, you also have to adjust to the talents and interests that are within you, as well as aspects of the quality of the institution. In order not to choose the wrong campus, it’s a good idea to know which campuses or institutions are included in Wemoteric’s 100 best universities in 2020 Positions 1-50, Sinaumed’s. What are they? Check these out!

1. Gadjah Mada University (UGM)

Gadjah Mada University (UGM) is a public university in Indonesia which was founded by the Government of the Republic of Indonesia on December 19, 1949. Gadjah Mada University (UGM) is located on the Bulaksumur Campus, Yogyakarta.

The UGM campus as the first university established by the Government of the Republic of Indonesia after Indonesia’s independence, has 18 faculties, 265 study programs, 111 joint degrees and 23 study centers. The following is Gadjah Mada University’s (UGM) Ranking Achievements so far:

• THES (Timer Higher Education-Qs World University) world ranking 250, 2009
• Ranked 1st in Indonesia version of AIPT BAN-PT 2014
• Ranked 1st in Indonesia, 5th in Southeast Asia, 414th in the world version of Webometrics (2014)
• Gadjah Mada University is the University with the Best Quality Assurance System in ASEAN together with the National University of Singapore and Chulalongkorn University
• Several departments at UGM have received prestigious international accreditation with an A predicate and UGM is the first university in Indonesia to achieve this prestigious accreditation.

 

2. University of Indonesia (UI)

University of Indonesia (UI) is one of the higher education institutions in Indonesia, with the main campus located in the northern part of Depok, West Java, right on the border between Depok and South Jakarta. Meanwhile, the other main campuses are in the Salemba area, Central Jakarta. The University of Indonesia is a modern, comprehensive, open, multicultural and humanist campus that covers a broad range of disciplines.

Currently, UI has 14 faculties, 2 postgraduate schools, and 1 vocational program that carries out all teaching, education and research activities, Sinaumed’s. More details about the UI. The University of Indonesia has received various awards including:

• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 67th in Asia in 2016.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 79th in Asia in 2015.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 71st in Asia in 2014.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 64th in Asia in 2013.
• Ranking first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version, ranked 59th in Asia, and ranked 273rd in the world in 2012.
• Ranking first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version, ranked 50th in Asia, and ranked 217th in the world in 2011.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to the QS version and ranked 50th in Asia in 2010.
• Ranked first for the category of Indonesian universities in THES version in 2016.
• Ranked first for the category of Indonesian universities in THES version in 2015.
• Ranked first for the category of Indonesian universities in THES version in 2009.
• Ranked first for the category of Indonesian universities in THES version in 2008.
• Ranked 250th at THES in 2006 as a world class University and ranked 395th at THES 2007.
• Ranked first for the category of universities from Indonesia according to Webometrics and ranked 13th in Southeast Asia in 2016.
• Ranked 3rd for the category of universities from Indonesia according to Webometrics in 2015.
• Ranked 2nd for the category of universities from Indonesia according to Webometrics in 2014.

 

3. Indonesian Education University (UPI)

The Indonesian Education University (UPI) is a public university located in the city of Bandung, West Java. UPI has been accredited A by BAN-PT. In 2017 the Indonesian University of Education (UPI) was in the 13th position of the best Indonesian university according to the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education. UPI has 8 Faculties, 5 Regional Campuses, Postgraduate Schools (SPs) and UPI Laboratory Schools or Lab Schools.

UPI is a tertiary institution that adheres to a multi-campus system, namely with 6 campuses spread across two different provinces, namely West Java and Banten with the main campus located at Jalan Setiabudhi 229, Bandung. While other campuses are located in Cibiru, Tasikmalaya, Sumedang, Purwakarta, and Serang.

4. Diponegoro University (UNDIP)

Diponegoro University (UNDIP) has a vision of becoming a superior research university, and has been accredited A by Diponegoro University and has received A accreditation by the National Accreditation Board for Higher Education. UNDIP is located in the cities of Semarang and Jepara. Since its inception until now, Diponegoro University has had 11 Faculties and 2 Schools, with details of 21 Diploma III (D3) Study Programs, 51 Undergraduate Study Programs (S1), 35 Masters Study Programs (S2), 18 Specialist Medical Education Programs, 3 Professional Programs and 13 Doctoral Study Programs (S3). UNDIP’s achievements include:

• IYIA 2018, Bali, Indonesia Faculty of Science and Mathematics 2018 Champion III
• World Young International Exhibition (WYIE) in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia 2018 2nd Place
• International 4 IEI & WIIF (The 10th International Exhibition of Inventions and The 3rd World Invention and Innovation Forum) in China 2018 First Place
• Global SDG7 Conference Faculty of Science and Mathematics 2018 Participation/ Delegate/ Participant in International Championships
• Japan Design and Invention Expo (JDIE) 2018, Tokyo First Place
• Bangkok International Intellectual Property, Invention, Innovation And Technology Exposition” (IPITEx 2018), 3rd Place
• Malaysia Technology Expo 3rd Place
• Malaysia Technology Expo 2018 Faculty of Science and Mathematics 2018 Champion III
• Japan Design and Invention Expo (JDIE) 2018, Tokyo International Exhibition Center 1st Place

5. Universitas Brawijaya (UB)

Universitas Brawijaya (UB) is a tertiary institution in Indonesia which was established in 1963 in Malang City, East Java. Universitas Brawijaya (UB) consistently ranks in the top 5 with the University of Indonesia, Bogor Agricultural Institute, Gadjah Mada University, and Bandung Institute of Technology based on the official assessment of the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education (Kemenristekdikti).

Until now, UB has 18 faculties and 221 study programs (prodi) with very broad scientific clusters starting from Vocational, Undergraduate, Masters, Doctoral, Specialist, and Professional programs. In 2018 Universitas Brawijaya (UB) won the General Champion of the 31st National Student Science Week (PIMNAS) which was held at Yogyakarta State University. Brawijaya University is also ranked 301st in Asia in 2020 by the QS Asian University Rankings.

6. Yogyakarta State University (UNY)

Is a university located in Yogyakarta. Initially, UNY was named the Yogyakarta Teaching and Education Institute (IKIP). UNY itself has been institutionally accredited A based on decision number 3127/SK/BAN-PT/Akred/PT/XII/2016 from BAN PT. In addition, most of the study programs or departments at UNY are also accredited A, Sinaumed’s.

Until now, UNY has 7 faculties and 1 postgraduate program. Each faculty consists of various departments. The 7 faculties include the Faculty of Education (FIP), Faculty of Languages ​​and Arts (FBS), Faculty of Mathematics and Natural Sciences (FMIPA), Faculty of Social Sciences (FIS), Faculty of Economics (FE), Faculty of Engineering (FT), Faculty of Science Sports (FIK) and Postgraduate Programs (PPs).

7. University of Lampung (UNILA)

Lampung University (UNILA) is a state university located in Bandar Lampung City, Lampung. Lampung University was founded on September 23, 1965 which at the same time made it the oldest and first state university in Lampung Province. Lampung University is located on Jl. Prof. Dr. Sumantri Brojonegoro No.1 Bandar Lampung City, Lampung and has been accredited A by BAN-PT.

Having 9 Faculties with 80 Study Programs and Departments, there are several scholarships to study at this University, including BIDIKMISI Scholarships, PMPAP Scholarships, Scholarships from the Government through BPPA (Academic Achievement Improvement Scholarships) and BBM Scholarships (Student Study Assistance). Scholarships from government and private institutions including the Lampung Provincial Education Office, KOMATSU, BTN, Eka Tjipta Foundation and others.

8. Airlangga University (UNAIR)

Airlangga University (UNAIR) located in Surabaya, East Java, was first inaugurated by the President of Indonesia Dr.Ir.Soekarno on 10 November 1954 after the University of Indonesia and Gadjah Mada University. Airlangga University has a strategic location on Jalan Airlangga 4 – 6 Surabaya City.

In addition, UNAIR has 3 campuses with different faculties, namely Campus A (Faculty of Dentistry and Faculty of Medicine), Campus B (Faculty of Economics and Business, Faculty of Pharmacy, Faculty of Social and Political Sciences, Faculty of Law, Faculty of Humanities and Faculty of Psychology) and Campus C (Faculty of Nursing, Faculty of Veterinary Medicine, Faculty of Fisheries and Maritime Affairs, Faculty of Public Health, and Faculty of Science). UNAIR’s achievements include:

• Prize in the carousel for the invention of fodder
• Health Award PT. Astra
• PWI East Java award thanks to the bird flu vaccine
• Awarded as the most active and most contributing contributor to the QS WOW NEWS website
• Two researchers from Unair won the 2015 Young Investigator Award (YIA) at KOBE University, Japan
• Islamic Economics students won the Best Entrepreneurial award at the Youth on Entrepreneurship event in Malaysia
• Dean of the Faculty of Cultural Studies (FIB) Diah Ariani Arimbi, PhD., received an award from an international Non-Government Organization (NGO)

9. Bogor Agricultural Institute (IPB), Bogor

Bogor Agricultural University (IPB) is a state agricultural university located in Bogor. There are many alumni of important Indonesian figures, graduates of this University, including the 6th President of the Republic of Indonesia Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono, Suswono (former Minister of Agriculture), Mustafa Abubakar (former Minister of BUMN), Anton Apriyantono (former Minister of Agriculture) and many others.

IPB also provides a large selection of study programs on agricultural sciences. There are 24 study programs that have been accredited internationally. Now IPB has 9 faculties and 1 business school with 39 undergraduate study programs. With the various achievements he has achieved, here are some of them:

• IPB is included in the 100 Best Universities in the world according to the 2018 QS World University Ranking by Subject Agriculture and Forestry.
• IPB is ranked 130th in Asia QS Asian University Rankings 2018
• Indonesia’s Best Higher Education IPB (Ranking by Kemenristekdikti) Ranked 3rd (2018), Ranked 3rd (2017), Ranked 4th (2016), and Ranked 3rd (2015).
• For the innovations it produces, IPB received the National Rank 1 Widyapadhi Award from the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education in 2018 and 2017.
• IPB won the Best Foreign Research Partner Award in the 2018, 2017 and 2016 State University (PTN) Category.
• IPB won the Best Report Card Rating for Program Implementation and Activities from the Ministry of Research, Technology and Higher Education in 2018, 2017 and 2016.

 

10. Semarang State University (UNNES)

Semarang State University (UNNES) is a conservation-minded university, its main campus is located in the Sekaran area (Gunungpati), the southern region of Semarang City and other campuses are located in Ngaliyan (Semarang), Kelud (Semarang), Bendan Ngisor (Semarang) and in Kemandungan (Tegal ). Accredited A by BAN-PT. UNNES organizes vocational education (D3), bachelor (S1), master (S2), doctoral (S3) and professional education programs. There are 85 study programs managed in eight faculties and postgraduate programs.

11. Muhammadiyah University of Surakarta (UMS), Surakarta

Muhammadiyah University Surakarta (UMS) is one of 164 Muhammadiyah Colleges (PTM) and one of 1,890 Private Universities (PTS) in Indonesia. This UMS is located in Kartasura District, Sukoharjo Regency. Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta consists of 12 Faculties, including: Faculty of Medicine (FK) Faculty of Dentistry Faculty of Health Sciences (FIK) Faculty of Teaching and Education (FKIP) Faculty of Engineering (FT) consisting of: Civil Engineering, Industrial Engineering, chemical engineering , mechanical engineering, architectural engineering, and electrical engineering Faculty of Economics (FE) Faculty of Law (FH) Faculty of Pharmacy (FF), Faculty of Psychology Faculty of Geography (FG) Faculty of Islamic Religion (FAI) Faculty of Communication and Informatics (FKI) – consists of two programs study: Communication Science and Informatics Engineering.

The Communication Science Study Program specializes in Advertising, Broadcasting and Public Relations, while the Informatics Engineering Study Program specializes in Information Systems, Computer Network Systems and Software Engineering Systems. Starting from the 2009/2010 academic year, the Informatics Engineering Study Program also opened international classes. The university is ranked 131st in the World. The ranking is carried out by UniRank or 4 International Colleges and University (4ICU). Previously, UMS was also awarded the UniRank ranking as the best PTS in Indonesia.

The achievement of UMS, which was included in the 200 best in Asia, repeated the same achievement in 2019. It’s just that in 2019, UMS was in the 157th best position, while in 2020 the UMS ranking was in 131st position. Of the 18 universities from Indonesia that were included in the 200 Asian rankings , UMS is in the order of number 11.

12. Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB), Bandung

The Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB) is the first technical high school in Indonesia which was founded on March 2, 1959 in West Java. Located in Bandung, the Faculty is an educational unit at ITB which has several study programs (formerly departments), both at the undergraduate, masters, and doctoral levels. Meanwhile, a school is an educational unit that has several study programs with adjacent scientific fields.

For example, the School of Electrical and Informatics Engineering (STEI) ITB has 6 study programs, namely in the field of electrotechnics (electrical engineering, telecommunications, biomedical, and electric power), and in the field of computer science (informatics engineering and information technology systems).

Seven study programs (prodi) at the Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB) have succeeded in breaking into the top rankings of universities around the world. The seven study programs include Art & Design (rank 51), Computer Science & Information Systems (351), Chemical Engineering or Chemical Engineering (251), Electrical Engineering (Electrical Engineering) rank 301, Mechanical, Aeronautical Engineering & Manufacture (Mechanical Engineering) rank 251, Agriculture & Forestry or Agricultural and Forestry Engineering (201) and Business & Management Studies (251).

Rank 13 – 50 Best Universities in Indonesia

13. State University of Malang (UNM), Malang
14. University of North Sumatra (USU), Medan
15. Yogyakarta Muhammadiyah University (UMY), Yogyakarta
16. Bina Nusantara University (BINUS), Jakarta
17. Telkom University, Bandung
18. Sepuluh Nopember Institute of Technology (ITS), Surabaya
19. University of Jember (UNEJ), Jember
20. Udayana University (UNUD), Bali
21. State Islamic University of Maulana Malik Ibrahim Malang
22. Andalas University (UNAND), Padang
23. Eleven March University (UNS), Surakarta
24. Hasanuddin University (UNHAS), Makassar
25. Syarif Hidayatullah Jakarta State Islamic University (UIN), Jakarta
26. University of Muhammadiyah Malang (UMM), Malang
27. Sunan Ampel State Islamic University (UINSA), Surabaya
28. Indonesian Islamic University (UII), Yogyakarta
29. Walisongo State Islamic University, Semarang
30. Sulthan Syarif Kasim State Islamic University, Riau
31. Pasundan University (UNPAS), Bandung
32. Surabaya State University (UNESA), Surabaya
33. Syiah Kuala University (UNSYIAH), Aceh
34. Mercu Buana University (UMB), Jakarta
35. Gunadarma University (UG), Depok
36. Sunan Kalijaga State Islamic University, Yogyakarta
37. Jambi University (UNJA), Jambi
38. Ahmad Dahlan University (UAD), Yogyakarta
39. Dian Nuswantoro University (UDINUS), Semarang
40. Sriwijaya University (UNSRI), Palembang
41. Alauddin State Islamic University, Makassar
42. Sam Ratulangi University (UNSRAT), Manado
43. Padang State University (UNP), Padang
44. Sanata Dharma University (USD), Yogyakarta
45. Narotama University (UNNAR), Surabaya
46. Indonesian Computer University (UNIKOM), Bandung
47. Mataram University (UNRAM), Mataram
48. General Soedirman University (UNSOED), Purwokerto
49. Purwokerto Muhammadiyah University (UMP), Purwokerto
50. Atma Jaya University (UAJY), Yogyakarta

Most Wanted Graduate Majors –  Entering the era of the industrial revolution 4.0, competition for jobs is getting tougher with demands for higher job skills.

Therefore you need to choose the right college major and job. Disruptive technology, sharing economy, climate change, renewable energy, robotics, limited natural resources, and data processing are challenges as well as opportunities for how people work today and have careers in the future. Here are 4 study programs with graduates most needed in 2020. Check these out!

Most Wanted Graduate Majors

 

1. Department of Informatics Engineering

The Informatics Engineering Department studies and applies the principles of computer science and mathematical analysis in designing, testing, developing, evaluating operating systems, software, and computer performance.

The Informatics Engineering Department studies a lot of data processing by utilizing computer technology and logical principles and processes, besides that you will also study programming, software development, and computer network technology.

In the process, you will make lots of flowcharts or flowcharts as well as how a system can run according to its function and logic. Of course, thoroughness and tenacity are the basic characteristics that you must have to study in this department, Sinaumed’s.

This major is suitable for you who have strong understanding and logic, are thorough, diligent, have an orientation to detail, are used to thinking systematically, are structured, like calculations or mathematics, like to do analysis, and like challenges.

In the Informatics Engineering major, you don’t have to bother studying physics or memorizing scientific concepts of chemistry and biology. This is because informatics engineering majors only study business systems, programming logic, and explore various other programming languages. One of the other advantages of studying in the informatics engineering department is that the job fields are very wide.

Currently, almost all companies use information technology. The IT team is even one of the backbones of the success of a business. Not only in Indonesia, graduates of Informatics engineering are needed in various companies around the world related to technological developments.

Apart from that, as an IT graduate, you can also set up a software house to build your own startup, Sinaumed’s. The following are other career prospects for graduates:

• In this era of the industrial revolution, graduates of this department are needed by BUMN, government agencies, BUMN, private companies, even big companies like Google
• Programming is the most widely chosen profession by informatics engineering graduates. Especially considering that technology is currently developing very rapidly, you can start your career as a Junior Programmer 
• Database engineer , tasked with designing and monitoring a complex database system
• Software Developer is a profession that plays an important role in creating a software or software that will later be used to run a system
• A web designer is in charge of designing the appearance of a website so that it looks attractive and makes it easier for users. A web designer  will work side by side with a web programmer in designingthe web
• The Application Engineer is in charge of handling application systems (business systems), various planning, analysis and design of an information system. The Application Engineer himself usually does not directly work on programming a piece of software or software, but he does have an understanding of writing and structuring source code. As an application engineer, you will later be tasked with testing applications, evaluating tests and following up on customer feedback, as well as working with other team members to modify and improve the performance of applications that are being developed.
• Front End Developer is a profession whose main task is to create website designs using various codes from CMS, HTML, Javascript so that the appearance of a website then looks more interactive. All websites that we encounter on a computer or smartphone browser display menus, headers, footers, animations and other views
• IT Consultants , tasked with providing ideas for clients regarding the use of information technology in order to meet their business targets. 

2. Department of Communication Studies

The Department of Communication Science is a branch of science that studies and conveys messages or news effectively and efficiently, to get the desired end result. Communication is also related to various uses of technology and new discoveries along with the times.

For example, in the development of the internet, media influence, popular entertainment trends and other factors. ​You will learn various aspects of communication, both practical and.

This study program also studies the psychology of message recipients as well as various matters related to regulations and policies for broadcasting content through various media. Do not forget public speaking as one of the basic skills that must be learned by you.

Public Speaking is the ability to convey messages efficiently so that listeners can understand what is being said. Public speaking is not just talking, but also learning about Sinaumed’s’ body gestures. The majors included in the field of communication are advertising, linguistics, languages, journalism, and many more.

The Department of Communication Science is one of the fun majors, because not only do you study theory, you will also practice it directly, for example in the practice of management and production of television, radio and print media. In this major, you can learn to be a cameraman, producer, reporter, creative team, floor director, and also a news anchor or presenter. The following are other career prospects for graduates:

• Media in Indonesia is developing very rapidly, so career opportunities for Communication graduates are wide open, starting from the world of advertising, marketing, and broadcasting.
• Not only working in the media industry, Communication Science Graduates can also work in government institutions, because almost every government agency needs workers with a background in Communications, such as Public Relations, Media Communication Observers, Politics and others.
• For those of you who like to read the news and have good data analysis skills, becoming a policy analyst can be an option. This position is sought after by survey and research institutions because the government continues to make policy adjustments from time to time
• Apart from that, you can also become a radio announcer, producer, director, reporter, copy writer, and many more in Sinaumed’s.

 

3. DKV New Media Department

The DKV New Media Department is part of the Visual Communication Design study program whose application focuses more on the use of new media. New media itself is defined as media based on digital technology. So, here you will learn design in print media, web design, and interactive media.

Learning from this major can later be applied to branding activities, public design, photography, typography, and so on. In his study, a DKV New Media will use software that makes it easier for him to design (such as Adobe Photoshop, Illustrator, Flash and others).

The DKV New Media major is suitable for creative people who love art and aesthetics, Sinaumed’s. Studying in this department will channel your creativity, you will also learn how to express your creativity in visual form, both in the form of pictures and videos.

Besides that, the job prospects for the majors are quite broad, not only in corporates, the prospects for work in the freelance realm are also wide open. Especially with the growing creative industry, from comics to advertising.

In addition to the current communication pattern which tends to be visual, the development of the creative economy has also influenced the development of other industries. DKV itself is an important field in the life of modern society.

All forms of business that exist today are in dire need of design products, from business cards, product packaging, to logos. Apart from products in the real world, DKV New Media’s work is also needed for marketing in the digital realm. With the help of DKV New Media services, digital content can be made much more attractive to attract consumers’ attention. The following are other career prospects for graduates:

• Graphic Designer – Expert in using graphics or images or anything related to the creation of signs, schemes, logos, graphics, images, symbols, geometric designs and others, graphic designers are trained in using design programs such as Photoshop, Illustrator, Flash and others
• Illustrator – Working with digital art or pencil and ink, illustrators can design or draw to convey a message
• Creative Director, a director who directs his employees to meet the targets and criteria of their target consumers
• Art Director , his job as a director in the field of art at an event
• Animator, being an animator is one of the right career choices for DKV New Media graduates. The number of mushrooming cartoons has also opened up opportunities for young animators to work, Sinaumed’s.
• Marketing Analysis – The task of a marketing analyst is to process, analyze and present data regarding marketing targets for the needs of clients or companies and usually works in a consulting firm
• Social Media Marketing – The development of digital technology has also created many new job opportunities for DKV Creative Advertising graduates, one of which is social media marketing. A social media marketer is tasked with marketing a product or service using a social media approach
• Digital Marketing – This work is similar to social media marketing, namely marketing products or services digitally. It’s just that digital marketing staff use more digital platforms as marketing media.

 

4. Majoring in Accounting

The Accounting major studies the art of recording, classifying and summarizing in a certain way in monetary terms. Broadly speaking, this major studies how to maintain finances.

You will be prepared to become an accountant by studying accounting principles such as auditing, reporting, budgeting and tax regulations. This data will later be used to measure the results of entity performance and inform decisions about the future and control of an institution or company. It is for this reason that many people call Accounting the “Language of Business”.

The Accounting major is suitable for you who have an interest in finance and want to dive deeper into the business world, because in it you will learn various financial transactions.

A career in accounting itself is quite promising with a qualified income, according to the latest statistical data from the American Bureau of Labor, the average income of an Accountant reaches up to $ 65,940 per year. The US Bureau of Labor also reports that 10% of accountants make nearly $116,000 annually. Here are some job prospects for Accounting graduates:

• Public Accountant – An accountant who has permission from the Minister of Finance to open his own accountant services to the public. Accountants themselves have longer working hours than other professions, but commensurate with the higher pay.
• Private Accountant – Internal Accountant This accountant is in charge of compiling all accounting needs in a company or organization. His duties start from the preparation of a Management Oversight System (SPM), which is a system designed to motivate executive managers to achieve the goals set by top management, Financial accounting, namely the accounting process concerned with the accounting cycle of financial transactions, from recording transactions to preparing financial reports and communicating them to decision makers. An accountant plays a role in selecting data that needs to be recorded, determining data recording patterns to preparing and interpreting accounting reports, including designing relevant report forms.
• Financial analyst – A profession whose job is to compile financial information which will then become the basis for decision making in a business
• Internal Auditor – In charge of examining a company’s internal financial reports and providing input to management.
• Tax Consultant – In charge of providing tax consultation for those who are taxpayers.
• Accounts Payable or Receivable Clerk – In charge of taking care of accounts payable accounting. 

5. Department of Economics

Economics is a science that can control and distribute resources around. The origin of the word economy itself is taken from the Greek term “oikonomia” which means the management of various administrative tasks and household chores.

New economics itself became an independent department at the end of the 19th century, where Economics was separated from Political Science. Economics is divided into two major parts, namely Microeconomics and Macroeconomics. Microeconomics focuses on individual markets and their structures and key players, while Macroeconomics discusses Economics both on a national and international scale. Economics is always an interesting science.

The world economy, which is always colored by various challenges, makes companies recruit graduates with good economic knowledge. This major is suitable for you with an interest in buying and selling.

Despite the fact that Economics is not as simple as selling and buying, it also takes care of various factors that affect a transaction, starting from the interaction between sellers and buyers, regulations that restrict movement in trading and so on. Job prospects for economics majors include:

• Accountant. Accounting is one part of economics. A person who is in this profession is called an accountant. His job is to prepare financial reports and analyze incoming financial information. All companies need accountants to compile financial reports. Therefore, this profession can be a promising job opportunity or prospect in economics for you. From this report, the company can find out the company’s financial condition and can also be used as a reference for making policies. The average salary earned by an accountant is IDR 3,500,000 to IDR 7,000,000.
• Business Management Analyst Fifth, you can become a business management analyst. Business management analysts are tasked with analyzing procedures, operational system designs, and other systems within a company/organization so that they can operate more efficiently and effectively. The business management analyst jobs include program analysis, management consulting, and business analyst.
• Auditor Next, you can have a career as an auditor. This profession is almost the same as an accountant. The difference is, accountants place more emphasis on financial records or cash in and out flows. While the auditor is tasked with analyzing financial reports with the aim of drawing conclusions whether the existing financial statements are fair or not. The average salary earned is IDR 4,000,000 to IDR 7,000,000.
• Operational Research Analyst Finally, you can have a career as an operational research analyst. This profession is much needed in various companies. His job is to conduct research or analysis to assist management in making policies. The average salary earned is IDR 4,500,000 to IDR 7,000,000.

Types/How Animals Breed – Basically, breeding is one of the basic characteristics of animals as living things. This breeding must be done by animals to avoid extinction.

In general, animals reproduce sexually or generatively, however, there are also types/methods of animals that reproduce vegetatively or without sexual or asexual activity.

Types/Methods of Generative Breeding Animals

Sexual reproduction/breeding or commonly referred to as sexual reproduction, occurs when male gametes (sperm) meet female gametes (eggs). Sexual reproduction can be divided into three types namely oviparous, viviparous and ovoviviparous.

Sinaumed’s can also read the book Various Ways of Animals to Reproduce to find out in detail the types/how animals reproduce. You can get this book at sinaumedia.com

1. Oviparous

Oviparous is the type/way animals reproduce by laying eggs. This reproduction is usually carried out by birds and reptiles. After fertilization, the resulting embryo grows and develops in the eggshell. The embryo receives nutrients and food reserves from the egg released from the mother’s body.

Hence, the oviparous embryo develops in the egg outside the mother’s body. Some of the characteristics of oviparous animals are the absence of mammary glands and ears. Examples of animal laying eggs are as follows.

a. Chicken

Chickens are animals that reproduce by laying eggs. After the hens lay their eggs, the eggs go through an incubation process that lasts about 20-21 days to keep the eggs warm.

From the outside, you can see that the chicken has no auricles. Similarly, having no nipples indicates that the hen has no mammary glands and is unable to nurse young.

b. Swan

Geese reproduce in an oviparous way, just like chickens, reproduce by laying eggs. These goose eggs are larger than other birds and the incubation process lasts up to 20 days.

c. Dove

Apart from chickens and geese which are often kept as pets, pigeons are an example of oviparous animals which are also commonly kept by humans. Much smaller than the two eggs above, pigeon eggs only need to incubate for 17-19 days.

d. Lizard

Yes, small lizards that are often found on roofs and walls of houses are also included as examples of oviparous animals. Lizards usually hide their eggs in a hidden place such as the back of a cupboard or bark to prevent them from being attacked by predators.

e. Siamese fighting fish

Betta fish are in great demand, because of their beautiful color, are highly sought after for collection and use as house and aquarium pets. Betta fish are also classified as laying animals or laying eggs.

This betta egg shape resembles the bubbles that are found on the sides of water pools and aquariums. Solid fish eggs only take 3 days to hatch.

f. Frog

Frogs are amphibians that reproduce by laying eggs. However, unlike normal egg-laying animals, the male frog fertilizes the eggs which the female releases into the water. Eggs fertilized by male frogs grow and hatch into tadpoles or tadpoles in the water. The tadpole undergoes metamorphosis, exposing lungs and legs, and then grows into an adult frog.

g. Butterfly

The caterpillars that we usually find in trees are actually butterfly larvae. This butterfly is a type of arthropod or insect that reproduces by laying eggs or oviparous. Adult butterflies lay their eggs on the surface of leaves, which develop into the larvae and caterpillars we know. The caterpillar then sleeps in a cocoon and turns into a small butterfly and grows into an adult butterfly.

h. Platypus

Most mammals reproduce by giving birth, but there are also some mammals that reproduce by oviparity or laying eggs. An example is the platypus. This animal is a monotreme. Monotremes reproduce by laying eggs, but still have mammary glands and rear their offspring through the folds of the mammary gland on the mother’s abdomen.

i. Crocodile

Another example of an oviparous or egg-laying animal is the crocodile. Crocodiles are called oviparous animals because they are amphibians that reproduce by laying eggs. crocodiles dig holes in mounds of earth and lay their eggs. As a rule, a female crocodile protects her nest and youth.

However, depending on the species of crocodile, crocodiles can lay 7-95 eggs at the same time during one spawning period. Crocodile eggs take about 80 days to hatch.

j. Ant

These animals are usually found in parks to rooms in the house. Ants are also included in the example of egg-laying or oviparous animals, Queen ants can lay around 100,000 to 300,000 eggs in a few days.

The breeding of these eggs is carried out by the queen with the male having to mate with the queen. The hatched eggs then grow into new worker, soldier, male or queen ants.

Characteristics of Oviparous or Egg-Laying Animals

As already mentioned, different breeding patterns also result in different characteristics of the animals themselves. Like egg-laying animals, it has different characteristics from other animals. Here are some things that can distinguish egg-laying animals from other animal species.

a. No auricles

People who have difficulty distinguishing animals with oviparous reproduction can see it in their ears. The first feature of oviparous or egg-laying animals is the absence of auricles. Therefore, it is very easy to tell oviparous animals apart when looking at them in person.

b. Has no mammary glands and does not suck milk

we can recognize the species that breed during the nursing process. The characteristics of oviparous animals are that they do not breastfeed their young because they do not have mammary glands.

c. The mother incubates the eggs until they hatch

When you see a mother laying eggs in a nest or cage, you can see that the mother is sitting down to incubate the eggs. This is done so that the eggs stay warm and alive.

d. Eggs are outside the mother’s body

As previously explained, the characteristics of oviparous animals are that eggs are released outside the mother’s stomach, develop and hatch.

2. Viviparous

Viviparous is reproduction by giving birth. After fertilization, the embryo grows and develops in the uterus. In the womb, the embryo receives nutrients from the food that the mother digests through the placenta. Some characteristics of embryonic animals are bodies protected by mammary glands, ears and hair. Examples of animals that give birth are as follows.

a. Pope

Maybe there are still many who think that whales are included in the fish group. Of course, whales live underwater. But it turns out that whales are a group of mammals that reproduce by giving birth.

b. Seals

Another calving animal known to live in water is the seal. These mammals are carnivores that are found in cold waters. Like other mammals, these animals reproduce in a viviparous way.

c. Dolphins

Another group of fish that reproduce by giving birth are dolphins. These fish are also called dolphins, and are also known as freshwater dolphins, but now their existence is gradually being threatened and they are classified as protected animals.

d. Cat

Cats are another animal that reproduces by viviparity or giving birth. These furry animals take about 9 weeks to conceive young.

Cats grow from babies to adults. The breeding cycle of these four-legged animals is irregular at certain times. Many factors ultimately cause cats to engage in sexual activity.

e. Dog

Dogs are also viviparous breeding livestock. These animals go through a more regular breeding cycle than cats. The gestation period for these animals is around 55-65 days. A pregnant female can give birth to 4 babies or even more.

Sinaumed’s can read the book Reproductive Aspects of Dog Breeding to get more in-depth information about the types/how dogs breed. Please click the button below to get the book.

f. Cow

Cows are also considered birthing animals because they have ears and mammary glands, similar to other viviparous characteristics. Cats and dogs are usually house pets, but not like cattle. These four-legged animals are usually cultivated for livestock purposes.

Cattle are usually used for hides, meat and milk. This animal has a long gestation period of about 270 days. Interestingly, the gestational age of this cow is influenced by the sex of the baby. If the baby is a boy, his gestational age can exceed 270 days.

g. Goat

Another livestock that reproduces by giving birth is the goat. These vertebrates have a gestation period of up to 150 days. After birth, the goat smokes for about three months.

h. Horse

Horses experience longer pregnancies than goats. The horse’s gestation period reaches 11-12 months after ovulation. Unique things are usually the process of birth after night or after sunset.

i. Elephant

Another viviparous animal is the elephant. These large animals take about 18 to 24 months to conceive a young. Adult female elephants can usually give birth only 4-5 times. Therefore, do not be surprised if the elephant population is threatened with extinction, because elephant breeding is very limited.

j. Monkey

Another example of animals giving birth is monkeys. This one animal enters pregnancy after ovulation. The gestation period depends on the monkey’s physiology. Some of the monkey species are gibbons, orangutans, chimpanzees, gorillas and proboscis monkeys.

k. Mouse

This rodent also belongs to the group of animals that give birth. Mice need more than 20 days to conceive young before they are born.

l. Bat

This nocturnal animal is also included in the viviparous or giving birth group. Bats have a gestation period of about 3 to 6 months.

Characteristics of Viviparous or Childbirth Animals

To learn more about the groups of animals that reproduce in the embryo, you can find the following characteristics.

• Have mammary glands.
• Have ears.
• Its body is covered with feathers and hair.
• Generally lactating or mammals.
• The fetus develops in the mother’s body before birth.

3. Ovoviviparous

In ovoviviparous after fertilization, the resulting embryo grows and develops inside the egg. At first glance, it sounds like oviparous. However, in ovoviviparous, the eggs are not expelled from the mother’s body, but remain in the mother’s body until they hatch.

After hatching, children will be born. The number of animals that breed ovoviviparally is not as much as the animals that reproduce in oviparous and viviparous ways. Examples of ovoviviparous animals are as follows.

a. Shark

The first example of an ovoviviparous animal is the shark. This famous sea creature has been found to reproduce by giving birth as well as laying eggs. Sharks can store eggs in their bodies.

The eggs then hatch and the shark lays eggs when the embryo has developed sufficiently outside the mother’s body. Shark embryos are known to be free of arias. Therefore, it is necessary to stockpile feed from eggs to maintain their growth.

b. Stingray

Stingrays are also included in the group of ovoviviparous animals whose habitat is in the sea. The stingray embryo grows and develops in the egg with the help of the nutrients contained in it. When the embryo is considered optimal enough, the mother will give birth.

c. Seahorses

The seahorse is another example of an ovoviviparous animal. This animal has a fairly unique reproductive system. The male will do the job of conceiving, not the female seahorse.

This is because male seahorses have pouches that have the ability to store and incubate eggs. This will allow the sea horse to grow better.

d. guppies

Guppies are usually seen as ornamental fish. This fish is small and has a beautiful and attractive appearance. But who would have thought that guppies would reproduce by laying eggs and giving birth?

This fish is known to take 20-30 days to become pregnant and give birth to young. This ornamental fish can produce 2 to 100 fish each time. Surprisingly, once the guppies are born, you can swim, find food and avoid enemies.

e. Platypus

The platypus is a semi-aquatic animal commonly found on the Australian continent. These animals usually reproduce by laying eggs like a flock of birds. However, the platypus turned out to be a special animal. It was found to have mammary glands like mammals that reproduce by giving birth.

Therefore, biologists include the platypus as an ovoviviparous animal group. This animal is also known as a transitional animal from evolution to mammals which took place in the bird class.

f. Lizard

Another example of an ovoviviparous animal is the lizard. These animals are known to store eggs in their bodies. Lizard embryos grow using the yolk as nutrition. When a new individual is born from the embryo, the mother lizard gives birth to it.

These four-legged, rough-skinned reptiles are found in loose or sandy soils. However, some lizards live in trees.

g. Salamanders

Another animal that reproduces in an Ovoviviparous way is the salamander. The animal looks like a lizard, has a streamlined body, a long tail and a short nose. These animals are usually found in waterfalls and swamps. This animal’s skin is very moist so it needs a watery environment to live.

h. Chameleon

Another ovoviviparous animal is the chameleon. These animals can increase their population by storing eggs in their mother’s body. After that, the chameleon mother gives birth to a baby.

In addition to their unique reproductive methods, chameleons also have different abilities from other animals. Chameleons can change their color to be lighter or darker. To find this animal, you can look for it in the bushes and trees.

Types/Methods of Animals Reproducing Vegetatively

The reproduction or reproduction of the following animals is vegetative or asexual. This reproduction is done without mating. Generally, asexual reproduction occurs in lower animals. Problem animals have imperfect body structures. There are three types of vegetative reproduction, namely budding, fragmentation, and division.

1. Buds

Buds appear on the mother animal’s body. When old enough, scions separate from the parent body and form a new individual. Examples of animals that reproduce by budding are fragmentation sponges and hydras.

2. Fragmentation

Fragmentation is a method in which animals reproduce by cutting or separating parts from their bodies. Examples of animals that reproduce in this way are some species of planaria and worms.

3. Splitting Yourself

Reproduction by dividing is by dividing the body into two equal parts. An example is the amoeba, which is so tiny that it can only be seen with a microscope.

Those are some types / ways of breeding animals that we should know. In order to understand it even more, Sinaumed’s can read related books by getting them at sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have #MoreWithReading information.

sinaumedia Literacy – Everyone has an internal body clock that works automatically. This system is also known as the circadian rhythm, which is a system that plays a role in ensuring that the body’s organs work optimally throughout the day. Our brain regulates sleep time, eating patterns, body temperature, hormone production, regulation of glucose and insulin levels, urine production, cell regeneration, and other biological activities. It is very important for you to know the body’s working hours, by knowing this you can provide the best intake and rest time so that the performance of your organs functions optimally. Each organ of the body itself has certain schedules. Understanding your own body’s schedule and rhythm will be very good to help improve daily performance. The following is the daily cycle of the human body for 24 hours Sinaumed’s:

 

BODY ORGANS WORKING HOURS

00.00 – 02.59

At this time, the body’s hormonal changes send a signal to the brain that it is time for you to sleep and rest. The hormone melatonin will be produced more and more so you will feel more tired and sleepy. The brain will also cleanse itself of toxins and remnants of substances that have accumulated as a result of thinking hard all day long. All the information you receive that day will also be stored in your brain in short-term and long-term memory. In addition, you should avoid eating or drinking at this hour because the intestines are undergoing a cleansing or detoxification process.

03.00 – 05.59

Body temperature will reach its lowest point at this hour. This happens because energy will be diverted from keeping the body warm to other important functions such as repairing the skin or fighting infection. The body still continues to produce the hormone melatonin, but it will soon decrease by the morning of Sinaumed’s.

06.00 – 08.59

At this time the blood vessels will become stiff and dense. So the blood becomes more viscous and sticky. This means that blood pressure is high. It is better for those of you who have a history of heart disease to avoid exercising at this time because it can increase the risk of a heart attack, and during these hours the production of the hormone melatonin in the body will also stop.

09.00 – 11.59

Early morning before noon is usually the best time to work, study, and be active. This is because the body is actively producing a stress hormone called cortisol. This hormone is responsible for making the mind more alert. Also, short term memory will also work better at this hour.

12.00 – 14.59

If you often hear the term “nap time” or “drowsy hour”, this is because the body’s energy is being preoccupied by the work of the digestive system. The digestive organs are very active in processing the food you consume at lunch so that your level of alertness will decrease.

15.00 – 17.59

In the afternoon, usually the body temperature will naturally increase. This is certainly useful if you want to exercise and need to warm up. The lungs and heart also work more optimally at this hour. In addition, compared to the condition of the muscles throughout the day, the muscles were shown to be 6% stronger in the afternoon. So, exercising in the afternoon is the right choice to keep your body fit, Sinaumed’s.

18.00 – 20.59

Be careful with the food you consume at this hour. Experts don’t advise you to eat too much at night because your digestion doesn’t work as well during the day. At this hour, the liver is functioning optimally to produce the protein the body needs and to clean the blood from various toxic substances.

21.00 – 23.59

If you are a person who likes to get up early, the brain will produce the hormone melatonin faster, which is around 9 pm. If you often stay up late and wake up late, the sleep hormone will be produced late at night. This is the right time for you to reduce your activity and get ready for bed.

BODY BIOLOGICAL CLOCK

Do activities according to your body clock, Sinaumed’s, because your biological clock works all the time. Every hormone or body chemical works at certain, certain hours. Adhering to this will certainly make it easier for you to maintain a healthy body so that it is always in top shape. Also find out the picket hours for your organs here, Sinaumed’s.

STOMACH

• Biological clock: 07.00 – 09.00
• The picket clock of the gastric organs is at its strongest
• Suggestions: It is better to have breakfast for the body’s energy formation process throughout the day. Drink juice or concoction before breakfast, so that the stomach is still empty and the useful substances are immediately absorbed by your body.

HEART

• Biological clock: 11:00 – 13:00.
• Organ performance: The heart maximizes its physical work at this hour.
• Suggestion: Take a little rest and eat something low in fat which is good for your heart.
• Prohibition: Avoid excess heat and physical exercise, especially for those of you who have complaints in the blood vessels.

HEART

• Biological clock: 13:00 – 15:00.
• Organ performance: The condition of the liver is in a weak state.
• Suggestion: Taking a short break will naturally regenerate liver cells.
• Prohibition: Working too tired and over-strengthening yourself.

LUNGS

• Biological clock: 15:00 – 17:00
• Organ performance: At this time the lungs are weak.
• Suggestion: Rest and breathe regularly to restore lung energy. Light exercise, such as yoga, which can make your breath more stable, Sinaumed’s.
• Prohibition: Breathing dirty and dusty air.

KIDNEY

• Biological Clock: 17:00 -19:00.
• Organ performance: At this time the kidneys are working very hard, where the process of forming the body’s bone marrow and brain cells occurs.
• Suggestion: This time is the best time to study.
• Don’t: Don’t sleep at these hours Sinaumed’s.

STOMACH

• Biological clock: 19:00 – 21:00.
• Organ working: At this time the working power of the stomach is weak.
• Recommendation: Try not to eat solid food that is difficult for the stomach to digest or it is better to stop eating during these hours Sinaumed’s.
• Prohibition: Do not consume foods that burden the stomach organs, overeat or drink lots of soda and Sinaumed’s coffee.

SPLEEN

• Biological clock: 21:00 23:00.
• Organ performance: The spleen is in the weakest condition at this time, due to the process of removing toxins from the body and regenerating spleen cells.
• Suggestion: Take the best vitamins and minerals (multivitamin) at this time, because it helps the spleen organ in working Sinaumed’s.
• Don’t: Drink less bitter drinks and if your face turns a little pale at this time, your spleen may be in a state of disorder.

HEART

• Biological clock: 23:00 – 01:00.
• Organ work: The heart is in its weakest condition
• Suggestion: Sleep is the best choice for the health of your heart organ, because this time is the best time for the body’s energy recovery.
• Prohibition: Staying up late and doing various strenuous activities.

HEART

• Biological clock: 01:00 – 03:00.
• Organ performance: The liver is in its best condition at this time because there is a process of removing toxins from the body’s metabolism.
• Suggestion: Rest and sleep are the right choices because at this time cell regeneration occurs in your body.
• Prohibition: Don’t do strenuous activities and eat bitter and spicy foods because it will interfere with the liver’s work.

LUNGS

• Biological clock: 02.30 – 04.30.
• Power organs: The lungs are cleaning and removing toxins in the body.
• Suggestion: This time is the best time to calm your mind and do Sinaumed’s meditation
• Prohibition: breathe the air around strongly because it makes you cough, sneeze and sweat when your lungs are dirty.

COLON

• Biological clock: 05:00 – 07:00.
• Organ working power: The large intestine is working hard
• Suggestion: Get used to defecating (BAB) at this time, so that all the dirt, toxins and the rest of the digestive system can be removed.
• Prohibition: Consumption of fruits in large quantities, excessive coffee and foods that are too dense before the stomach is filled with carbohydrates and protein.

THE IMPORTANCE OF SLEEP FOR THE BODY’S BILOGICAL CLOCK

Everyone has different levels of sleepiness, but what causes these differences in sleepiness levels? Sleep is regulated by two body systems, namely the balance of sleep or wakefulness and the body’s biological clock, also known as the circadian rhythm. When the body is awake for a long time, the sleep or wake balance system will order the body to rest immediately. This balance system will also help maintain sleep according to the body’s needs to ‘make up’ for the body clock when awake, so that there will be a balance between activities and rest.

The circadian biological clock itself is controlled by a part of the brain called the Suprachiasmatic Nucleus (SCN), cells in the hypothalamus that respond to light and dark signals. Suprachiasmatic Nucleus (SCN) signals will be sent to other parts of the brain that control hormones, body temperature, and processing functions of sleepiness and wakefulness.

Hormones that play an important role in circadian rhythms that affect sleep itself are the hormone melatonin which functions to cause drowsiness and lowers temperature as well as cortisol which forms glucose and activates anti-stress and anti-inflammatory in the body. The highest melatonin level occurs at midnight, so during this period a person usually experiences deep sleep.

IF YOUR BIOLOGICAL CLOCK IS WRONG

There are several factors that can cause disruption of the human biological clock. Drastic changes in time zones (jet lag), erratic work schedules (shifts), lifestyle, and problems with natural lighting risk causing the biological clock to go awry. As with other disorders in the body, an abnormal biological clock can cause complications.

Sleep according to the biological clock to maintain a healthy body and prevent various diseases that can arise due to lack of sleep, Sinaumed’s. Because disruption of the human biological clock risks causing various problems such as insomnia, obesity, type 2 diabetes (diabetes), depression, bipolar disorder, and mood disorders. In addition, a messy biological clock also risks affecting the immune system. This is because the production of proteins needed by the immune system becomes out of sync. So, try to always stick to the schedule that is naturally set by your biological clock.

The biological clock plays a major role in regulating daily sleep and wake times. You need to adjust your sleep hours slowly because the body needs a process for adaptation. When you have to wake up earlier, try going to bed earlier than usual. This adjustment can be made gradually, by advancing bedtime by 15 minutes over two to three days. Apart from that, apply these tips:

• Avoid Naps: Sleeping in the middle of the day can affect your night’s sleep cycle and make it difficult for you to sleep at night. This will disrupt the biological clock that is regular. Instead of when you’re sleepy during the day, try doing a little exercise.
• Adhere to the Sleep Schedule: When you feel comfortable with the bedtime you have made, you must consistently do it. Try not to wake up late and sleep too late. Because indiscipline can damage the progress that you have achieved.
• Exercise, Exercise is able to build muscle and shed fat, as well as facilitate sleep. People who exercise for at least 150 minutes each week sleep better at night and feel fresher in the morning. The time chosen to do sports also makes a difference. High-intensity cardio done at night can actually disrupt sleep. Do that type of exercise for the morning or afternoon if you start to feel that intense exercise is actually disturbing your sleep pattern. Do a more relaxing exercise. However, avoid exercising too close to bedtime, because exercising can keep you awake and unable to sleep. The best time to exercise is in the afternoon and early morning of Sinaumed’s.
• Avoid activities in bed until it’s time to rest. Make it a habit not to open your laptop or use gadgets before going to bed. This is also to get used to the body to really rest once you lie down on the bed. Also keep gadgets away for at least an hour before going to bed so that the body has time to relax. Also keep laptops, cell phones and other devices out of reach so you are not tempted to continue to operate Sinaumed’s.
• Bright light therapy Bright light therapy can help adjust your circadian rhythm. This therapy is done by scheduling the body to be exposed to sunlight in the morning. Also make it a habit to turn on the lights in the morning. Lighting will signal to the body that it is time to wake up, apart from that opening a window and letting the sunlight in, or taking a walk around the house is also a very healthy way to improve your sleep time, Sinaumed’s.
• Create a relaxing bedtime routine. The goal is to tell the body that it’s time to rest so that the body is in a relaxed state which makes it easier for you to sleep better. You can mark bedtime by starting to clean yourself or turning on aromatherapy which helps relax your mind so that you sleep better!
• Avoid heavy meals. Be sure to stop eating heavy meals and avoid unhealthy snacks a maximum of three hours before bedtime. This is to prepare your body to rest, including your digestive organs, Sinaumed’s.

Keeping the biological clock is important to do. Disturbed body clock will trigger the emergence of various diseases. Among them increase the risk of cancer, depression, heart attack, and others. Hopefully this information is useful Sinaumed’s!

EDUTORE

sinaumedia developed an educational platform called Edutore. On this platform, you can access many question practice books like those in sinaumedia by subscribing. Edutore has a slogan “Everyone Can Be Smart” and that is also what Edutore aspires to be. So that Edutore can participate in educating Indonesian children. On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as synonyms, antonyms and other CPNS questions. Check the YouTube account directly, click here.

Source: from various sources

Members of the Small Committee – When hearing the word BPUPKI, most people already know about this agency which existed during the Japanese occupation. In fact, the lesson about BPUPKI has existed since we were still in elementary school (SD).

BPUPKI itself forms a committee of nine and also a “Ministry Committee” or committee consisting of 8 people. Some people may already be familiar with the committee of nine, but the “Ministry Committee” is different. Then, do you know who the members of the small committee are? Sinaumed’s, you can find the answer in this article.

Not only small committee members, but this article will describe a little about the profiles of small committee members. So, read this article to the end, OK?

About BPUPKI

The Investigative Agency for Preparatory Efforts for Indonesian Independence, or better known by the abbreviation BPUPKI, is a body formed by the occupying government of the Japanese army. The Japanese military government itself was represented by the 16th and 25th Army commands which approved the formation of the BPUPKI on March 1, 1945.

BPUPKI has 67 members chaired by Dr. Kanjeng Raden Tumenggung (KRT) Radjiman Wedyodiningrat was also deputy chairman of Ichibangase Yosio (i.e. Japanese), as well as Raden Pandji Soeroso.

Because the two commands had already been obtained, only the Java region included the authority of the BPUPKI, including the islands of Madura and Sumatra. Meanwhile, for the Kalimantan and Eastern Indonesia regions no BPUPKI was formed. Even though the Kalimantan and Eastern Indonesia regions were already controlled by the Japanese Navy (AL) command.

The establishment of this agency or BPUPKI itself was announced by Kumakichi Harada on March 1, 1945, but this agency was only really inaugurated on April 29, 1945 or to coincide with Emperor Hirohito’s birthday. This agency itself was formed as an effort to gain support from the Indonesian nation with the aim of promising that Japan would assist the process of Indonesian independence.

About the “Small Committee”

Basically, this “Ministry Committee” was formed by BPUPKI after the first session had ended. During its active period, BPUPKI only held 2 sessions. BPUPKI chaired by Dr. KRT Radjiman Wedyodiningrat, after completing the first session, began to form a “Small Committee” consisting of 8 people.

The “Ministry Committee” itself is referred to as the committee of eight and is tasked with receiving various proposals and collecting them from members who will then attend the second session. Committee 8’s own duties include accommodating, identifying proposals from BPUPKI members, as well as holding meetings and discussing origins that are directly related to preparations for independence. The “Minor Committee” itself is chaired by Ir. Sukarno and seven other members.

Duties of the “Small Committee”

The proposals accommodated by the “Small Committee” or committee of eight were very diverse. The “Ministry Committee” is also tasked with collecting incoming proposals such as:

1. Proposal when asking for Indonesia’s independence as soon as possible
2. Proposals regarding the foundations of the state.
3. Proposals regarding the form and head of state.
4. Proposals regarding unification and federation.
5. Proposals regarding Indonesian citizens.
6. Proposals regarding the region, matters of religion and the state.
7. Proposals regarding statehood.

BPUPKI Small Committee Member Profiles

Below is the profile of BPUPKI’s “Ministry Committee”, which was also published in the book 100 Figures That Changed Indonesia: Short Biography of the Hundred Most Influential Figures in Indonesian History in the 20th Century , then published for the first time by: NARASI Publishers “and also partly taken from various sources:

Sukarno (Chairman)

Soekarno was born in Surabaya, June 1, 1901, with partner Raden Soekemi

a folk school teacher and Ida Ayu Nyoman Rai, a descendant of Balinese royalty. He then took his basic education in Tulungagung, Europeesche Lagere School , Mojokerto, and Hogere Burger School, Surabaya.

Soekarno also earned a civil engineering engineer degree from the Bandung College of Engineering (now known as ITB). Since he was young, Soekarno had felt interested in politics, a world where he could then channel his talent for speech and succeeded in becoming President of the Republic of Indonesia.

Soekarno’s first political debut was when he co-founded the Algemene Studie Club in Bandung in 1926, a discussion club which later turned into a radical political movement. Three months after graduating from college, he also wrote a series of articles with the title Nationalism, Islam, and Marxism in an issue belonging to the Young Indonesia association which attracted the attention of educated people at that time.

He also stressed the importance of national unity, as well as a common front of nationalists, Islamists and Marxists, in an uncompromising (or non-cooperative) resistance against the Netherlands.

At the age of 26, on July 4, 1927 to be precise, Soekarno then founded the Indonesian National Association, which within a year later changed its name to the Indonesian National Party. In 1928, he also inspired the Youth Pledge.

Because of his political activities, Sukarno and several members of the PNI were arrested by the Dutch in 1929, then put on trial. The court actually became a podium for Sukarno to voice his political views.

Moh Hatta (Deputy Chairman)

Mohammad Hatta was born in Aur Tajungkang Mandianin, Bukittinggi, West Sumatra, on August 12, 1902 when the morning sun rose. Even though his religious education background is strong, he does not abandon modern education itself. While studying at HIS Bukittinggi, he also recited the Koran regularly under the teachings of Sheikh Muhammad Djamil Djambek, one of the reformers of Islam in Minangkabau.

While he was studying at MULO, he also received religious guidance from Haji Abdullah Ahmad, who was also a pioneer of Islamic reform in the area. Then he also studied at the high school trade, Prins Hendrik School, in Jakarta. Mohammad Hatta is also treasurer of the Jong Sumatranen Bond (Sumatran Youth Association) in Padang, and as treasurer of the JBS central board in Jakarta.

Through the books he read, Hatta was then able to choose his political direction in the face of colonialism. He began to promote the non-cooperative method in 1918 when he was chairman of the Indonesian Association, an organization of Indonesian students and students in the Netherlands.

Achmad Soebardjo (Member)

Achmad Soebardjo was born in Teluk Jambe, Karawang, West Java, on March 23, 1896. His father was named Teuku Muhammad Yusuf, and was still of Acehnese noble descent from Pidie. Achmad Soebardjo’s paternal grandfather was Ulee Balang as well as a scholar in the Lueng Putu area. Meanwhile, Teuku Yusuf is a government employee with the position of Police Mantri in the Teluk Jambe area, Karawang. Her mother’s name was Wardinah.

He is also of Javanese-Bugis descent, and is the son of the Camat in Telukagung, Cirebon. His father initially gave him the name Teuku Abdul Manaf, while his mother gave him the name Achmad Soebardjo. He also added the name Djojoadisoerjo himself when he was an adult, when he was detained in Ponorogo prison because of the “3 July 1946 incident”.

Soebardjo also attended Hogere Burger School , Jakarta (currently he is equivalent to High School) in 1917. Then, he also continued his education at Leiden University, the Netherlands and obtained a Meester in de Rechten diploma (currently he is equivalent to a Bachelor of Laws) in law in 1933.

On August 16, 1945, young fighters, including Chaerul Saleh, Sukarni, and Wikana, Shodanco Singgih, and other youths, took Soekarno and Moh. Hatta to Rengasdengklok. The goal itself is that Ir. Soekarno and Drs. Moh. Hatta was not influenced by Japan. This event itself is called the Rengasdengklok Incident. Here, they also re-assured Sukarno that Japan had surrendered and the fighters were ready to fight the Japanese, whatever the risk.

Agus Salim (Member)

Agus Salim was born with the name Mashudul Haq, in October 1884 in Gadang City, Bukittinggi. He is also one of the few native children who can enjoy a Dutch education. The son of a former prosecutor from West Sumatra was also the best graduate at a Dutch high school ( Hogere Burger School – HBS).

His talent is also extraordinary in mastering foreign languages. In fact, he is also able to speak nine languages, starting from Dutch, English, German, French, Arabic, Turkish, Japanese, as well as Indonesian and Minang languages.

After graduating from HBS, Agus Salim actually wanted to become a doctor. However, in the end he had to abandon his dream because there was no money to study in the Netherlands. That said, in fact he could have studied in the Netherlands thanks to the help of RA. Kartini.

Moh Yamin (Member)

Moh Yamin, as a man who was born in Sawahlunto, West Sumatra, on August 23, 1903, was indeed agile enough to play on the political stage. He is also one of the founding fathers who later formed Indonesia. When Japan replaced the Netherlands, Yamin also sat as a member of BPUPKI.

At BPUPKI, he also worked out the concepts of the Principles and Fundamentals of the State of the Republic of Indonesia and their contents were also not much different from the sound of Pancasila which we know today, namely the Fairy of Nationality, the Fairy of God, the Fairy of Democracy, the Fairy of Humanity, and People’s Welfare.

At the BPUPKI meeting on May 29, 1945, Yamin also emphasized that the new state to be formed would be the Indonesian national state. The point was that the new state must be based on new nationalism, not Sriwijaya and Majapahit nationalism, the traditions of the Sriwijaya or Majapahit kingdoms which were replaced by the Republic of Indonesia.

KH Abdul Wahid Hasyim (Member)

KH Abdul Wahid Hasyim, as a leader of Nahdlatul Ulama (NU) who helped decorate the Indonesian nation’s political journey. He was also included in the BPUPKI Sub-Committee which was then formed to find the best solution for the nation’s future. BPUPKI itself is a body formed by Japan and is also tasked with preparing the shape and basis of the state. The BPUPKI sub-committee was ultimately successful in formulating the basis of the state.

The result of this agreement is also known as the “Jakarta Charter” which was then included in the preambule of the 1945 Constitution and ratified on June 22, 1945. In one of the Pancasila precepts formulated by Wahid Hasyim, et al. Among other things, the words “obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents” are listed. It turned out that this formulation was later debated in the next BPUPKI session

Abdul Kahar Muzakir (Member)

Prof. KH. Abdul Kahar Muzakir, was born in Gading, Playen, Gunung Kidul, Yogyakarta, on 16 April 1907 and died in Yogyakarta, on 2 December 1973 at the age of 66. He was also the Magnificus Chancellor who was chosen by the Islamic University of Indonesia for the first time under the name Islamic College (STI) in 2 periods 1945-1948 and 1948-1960.

He was also a member of the BPUPKI and an Islamic figure who had been a member of the Dokuritsu Junbi Chōsakai (the Investigating Agency for Preparatory Efforts for Indonesian Independence). He served as Chancellor of UII until 1960. Then on 8 November 2019, Abdul Kahar Muzakir was also awarded the title of National Hero by President Joko Widodo in a ceremony at the State Palace, and received a family award represented by heir Siti Jauharoh, daughter of Abdul Kahar Muzakir.

Abikoesno Tjokrosoejoso (Member)

Abikoesno Tjokrosoejoso, born in Karanganyar City, Kebumen in 1897 and died in 1968. He was one of the Founding Fathers of Indonesian Independence and a signatory to the constitution. He was also a member of the Committee of Nine that drafted the preamble to the 1945 Constitution (and also known as the Jakarta Charter).

After independence, he served as Minister of Transportation in a first Presidential Cabinet of Sukarno and also became an adviser to the Bureau of Public Works. Tjokrosoejoso’s older brother was Oemar Said Tjokroaminoto, the first leader of Sarekat Islam. After the death of his brother, on December 17, 1934, Abikoesno also inherited the position of leader of the Indonesian Islamic Sarekat Party (PSII).

Together with Mohammad Husni Thamrin and Amir Sjarifuddin, Tjokrosoejoso later formed the Indonesian Political Alliance, a united front consisting of all political parties, groups and social organizations advocating the country’s independence.

Related Books

SMA/MA Interactive Book of History of Indonesia Class 10 Semester 2

History and Indonesian Nationalism The ideals of Indonesian unity are not idle talk, but are truly supported by forces that arise from the historical roots of the Indonesian nation itself. (Muhammad Yamin)

History examines human life in the past. From the stories of the past, history students can take lessons and lessons to be applied in their lives today. Therefore, history can be a reflection for life in the present and the future.

History can be used as a tool for a nation to instill a national spirit in its next generation. Through history, the next generation of the nation can trace the origins and development of their nation so that they are instilled with pride in their homeland.

The question is, what book is suitable for the above purposes? This Indonesian History Interactive Book is the answer. Unlike other books which only contain conventional content, this book presents digital content that you can access. This is where the interactive lies in this book. Through this interactive learning, you will be invited to walk the winding road of the nation you love. From here you can instill nationalism and promote Indonesian unity.

SMA/MA SMK/MAK Class XI Indonesian History Compulsory Semester 1 Revision 2016

How can you develop nationalism through studying history? Indonesian History Homework Book Class XI Semester! this will help you take meaning from learning history.

This book will train you to develop historical insight. Through this book you are invited to be critical and thorough in dealing with past events. This book also invites you to take positive values ​​from historical events and imitate the spirit of nationalism of historical figures.

Thus, through studying Indonesian History, your spirit of nationalism will develop.

USBN Seconds of History of Indonesia SMA/MA Year 2017/2018

The question is what about USBN? Based on information from reliable sources, 20% to 25% of the USBN questions are prepared by the government, while 75% to 80% of the questions are prepared by the SMA/MA Subject Teacher Consultation (MGMP) or equivalent. Even though the USBN questions were made by the central government and the MGMP, the USBN grid is national in nature. So, both the questions made by the government and the MGMP, the reference remains one, namely the national grid compiled and determined by the BSNP.

Interesting, right? No less interesting than USBN is the form of the questions. If the UN questions are all in the form of multiple choices, this is not the case with USBN. At the USBN later, apart from answering multiple choice questions, you must answer descriptive questions. Answering descriptive questions is clearly more difficult than answering multiple choice questions because description questions do not provide alternative answers.

If in the multiple choice questions you can guess the answers provided, in the description questions you cannot guess. You will not be able to answer essay questions if you do not understand the material in question. Therefore, from now on you have to practice a lot on essay questions for the subjects tested on USBN.

This Seconds book is equipped with description questions as a means of practicing dealing with USBN. This is the special of Detik-Detik . You can use this book as a means of practicing preparing for UN and USBN. You are really lucky.

This is a discussion of the members of the small committee along with their brief profiles. If Sinaumed’s wants to find Indonesian history books, he can look for his books at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have #MoreWithReading information. Hope it’s useful!

What are  the characteristics of a humble person?  Humility is one of the attitudes that a person can have. However, it turns out that not everyone can have a humble attitude.

People who have a humble attitude are those who can feel a peace within themselves. Someone who is humble will let them know how much ability or capacity they have. Humble people also don’t meddle in other people’s business.

Moreover, the characteristics of a humble person? This article will discuss the characteristics of a humble person.

The Kimi and Kino series is a continuation of the Kimi and Mimi series. This series will encourage children to behave well from an early age. Delivered through the everyday experiences of Kimi and his little brother, Kino, and their cat, Mimi. From their stories, children will be taught to respect, love others as well as animals, be fair, learn to compromise, forgive, empathize, be grateful, share, be honest, humble, and persistent.

Characteristics of a Humble Person

1. Respect the views of others

People who have a humble attitude can respect the views of others. They will respect other people’s point of view, even if it is different from their own. According to them, everyone has the same right to have their ideas considered.

However bad or good. Those who are humble will be willing to hear and accept the viewpoints of others. It was done without any interruption.

In addition, the characteristics of a humble person will not belittle other people. They will always cherish someone. Even if they don’t approve of another person’s treatment or thought, they won’t just cut it short and blame someone else.

2. Good listener

One of the characteristics of a humble person is being a good listener. When someone is telling something, then he will listen carefully. In addition, the characteristics of humble people are that they will listen more than talk.

A humble person does not exaggerate what is said. They talk about something as it is. In another sense, humble people tend to tell the truth.

A person who has humility will not act to be accepted by someone. They are not looking for a validation. A humble person certainly wouldn’t ask someone for acknowledgment.

Someone who is humble will have high empathy. When someone needs help, he will try to be able to help. Not solely because you want to be dominant, but because you sincerely want to help.

3. Don’t feel jealous of other people’s fun

For those who are humble, the success or pleasure of others is a good thing. They will feel happy when other people succeed in doing something. The characteristics of a humble person in this case are not jealous of the pleasures or success that others receive.

Humble people will actually celebrate it. They will also feel happy with the pleasure or success that someone gets. Humble people will also sincerely congratulate you on the achievement you receive.

Instead of feeling jealous, those who are humble will use that as a reference. What this means is that they will use the success of others to motivate themselves. When they see others succeed, they will use it to motivate them to achieve similar success.

4. Accept criticism, opinions and suggestions from others

The characteristics of humble people can also accept input from others. Whether it’s input in the form of criticism, opinions or suggestions from others. Also, they will understand that there are two sides to any argument or opinion.

Both sides are the side of criticism and suggestions and in the form of praise. Humble people will happily accept both sides of an argument. For them, criticism and suggestions are things that can build.

Not to discourage, it will actually make them even more excited. In this case, humble people will try to be even better in the future. The way to get better is to accept input from others.

The opposite is also true when receiving a compliment. Compliments are given for a good thing. However, those who are humble are not immediately satisfied with the praise they receive.

5. Treat everyone equally

The characteristics of a humble person will also treat everyone equally. They will see that everyone has the same rights and obligations. A humble person will treat everyone with kindness and equality.

They will not see others in a better or worse light. They will not discriminate against a person. Everyone has the same dignity, that’s the characteristics of a humble person.

A humble person will also not see himself as a very special person. They will not see themselves as people who should get special treatment. People who have a humble attitude will put themselves on equal footing with others. In fact, they are also quick to appreciate the contributions of others.

Characteristics of a Humble Person

6. Willing to admit mistakes

Of course, everyone can make mistakes. Mistakes made also vary. It can occur due to an element of accident or on purpose.

A mistake made will certainly result in something. However, it is not his fault that we will discuss here. But how to behave after making a mistake.

There are some people who actually run when they make a mistake. Others will admit their mistakes. Then it will apologize and correct the mistake.

People who are willing to admit mistakes are humble people. That’s because it has become the characteristics of humble people. Humble people are willing to admit mistakes and will try to fix them.

Admitting mistakes is not an easy thing to do. However, for those who are humble it is certainly not a difficult thing. People who have a humble nature will always admit the mistakes they have made and will correct them.

When they make a mistake, they don’t look for excuses. The only thing to do is apologize. On the other hand, if they were right then they would not be arrogant or snobbish. So, the characteristics of a humble person are willing to admit mistakes that have been made.

7. Can be invited to work together

Sometimes, people who think they are great actually make them arrogant or arrogant. Then, people who are arrogant or arrogant tend to be difficult to work with or compromise. The opposite is true for humble people.

The characteristics of humble people are that they can be invited to work together. They will make time to meet and work together. In addition, the cooperation carried out certainly has benefits between the two parties.

This applies in all aspects. Both in terms of work or relationship aspects. They will gladly agree to cooperate and compromise.

8. Have many friends

A humble person will certainly be liked by others. That is the reason they will have many friends. Humble people tend to think flexibly.

In addition, they are people who easily get along with anyone. Even though the other person has a different mindset from him. The difference in mindset actually becomes a color for the relationship.

This is one of the characteristics of a humble person. They have many friends. People who have a humble attitude get along well. In addition, they will rarely experience a dispute or a conflict with others.

9. Can control the ego

By definition, ego means “I” or “self”. Ego can be said as a person’s perception. This perception is related to self-esteem which will further affect self-confidence.

Of course, everyone has an ego. However, what must be underlined is that every ego is not always negative. Sometimes, a person’s ego can direct that person to positive things.

However, there are times when a person cannot control his ego properly. This happens in reality, and creates a selfish attitude. Therefore, selfishness is an attitude in a person who emphasizes or prioritizes himself. In another sense, they feel that their desires are the most important thing above other interests.

People who have a humble attitude are generally able to control their ego. It is less likely to get involved in a dispute. Especially things that will involve an ego.

This is because they will understand that every human being will have a different perspective. This is what makes the characteristics of humble people able to control their ego. They will assume that the perspective of the other person has a valuable value, just like the perspective he has.

10. Often put the interests of others first

Often prioritizing the interests of others does not mean always giving in and not having a  power . However, people who have a humble nature will understand how their pride is. Therefore, they will rarely stand out or present themselves in front of others.

Especially if the goal is just to show how great and smart they are. They would not do such things. They tend to show more often in terms of action, rather than talk.

In addition, they will also realize that many things may be more important than what they want. They will determine the priority scale. Even if the interests of others are more important, they will still take precedence.

This is one form of their concern for others. Humble people will let others meet their needs first. After that, they will carry out their needs.

11. Have high curiosity

Humble people will have high curiosity. They are abashed learners, or thirsty for knowledge. People who have humility generally want to always want to know more. It has become the characteristics of a humble person.

However, being curious here doesn’t mean bad things. For example, curiosity about science. Not that they are always dissatisfied, but they will think that having more knowledge is a good thing.

They will take more time to learn something. Either academically, or learn about experience from a source. This is also what makes humble people identified as serious people.

12. Always say thank you

Saying thank you seems trivial. However, one’s goal in saying thank you is to appreciate. They will appreciate what they receive from someone through words of thanks.

So it is with humble people. The characteristics of humble people are often say thank you. Even in small things though.

It includes a humble attitude. They will always say thank you for any help or something given by others. A simple example is the courier who delivers the package, or the parking attendant who helps cross the street.

13. Not ashamed to ask for help

The next characteristic of a humble person is that they don’t feel proud easily. Examples include asking for help for trivial or simple things. Those who have a humble attitude will not hesitate to do so.

If they really need help, they will ask for it. Another example when finding a difficulty in doing something. They will not hesitate to ask for help from others.

14. Have empathy

Humility is closely related to empathy. This is another characteristic of humble people. They will try to understand the other person’s position.

In addition, people who are humble will certainly not judge other people’s certain situations. When other people have difficult circumstances, they don’t judge them. Those are the traits of a humble person.

They also don’t only empathize with those closest to them. However, to everyone who is going through a bad situation. They will try to help the person as best they can.

People who have a humble attitude will try to be useful for others. This was done without thinking of a profit. They will not demand a reward from the people they help.

15. Don’t blame others

When a problem occurs, a humble person will not easily blame others. They will see from the problems that occur first. After that, then they will see how the problem can arise or can happen.

This is one of the characteristics of a humble person. They will see from all points of view. They will not easily blame others.

Those are 15 characteristics of humble people. It’s good to be a humble person. However, don’t let something good make you arrogant.

Find more information at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always provide recommendations for interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Author: Wida Kurniasih

Source: from various sources

• • Definition of Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Needs Accompanied by Examples
  • Definition and Characteristics of Poetry (Old & New)
  • Various New Employee Career Goals and Planning
  • Definition, Kinds and Examples of Press Release
  • Understanding Crafts: Benefits, Purpose, and Types of Crafts

Klitih is – Klitih is one of the topics that is increasingly being discussed on social media. The term klitih is back in the spotlight, because various criminal acts in Jogja have been increasing lately. This example of the Klitih case occurred several times in Yogyakarta which occurred at night when several streets were starting to be quiet.

To find out more about Klitih, you can see a more complete explanation about Klitih starting from the definition, causes, laws, and steps to avoid Klitih. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Get to know Klitih

Klitih is a disturbing phenomenon for the people of Yogyakarta. This sudden and unexpected violence was carried out at night by two or more perpetrators. The weapons used are generally swords, machetes, and other sharp weapons. Klitih is also a phenomenon of juvenile delinquency that leads to crime. This klitih phenomenon itself acts on behalf of school gangs or groups of teenagers who attack each other.

The origin of the name Klitih, as explained by the criminal sociologist at Gadjah Mada University, Drs. Soeprapto, SU said that klitih comes from the Javanese language, namely klitah-klitih. In fact, the term clit was initially positive. Because, klitih is defined as an activity to fill free time that is positive. Examples of activities include traveling, sewing, reading, and so on.

However, the times have made this cliché meaning turn negative. Klitih is currently associated with criminal acts committed by two people traveling around on motorbikes.

The history of Klitih itself starts from 2007-2009 in Yogyakarta. At that time the Yogyakarta government made various policies regarding brawls. Students who participate in brawls will be returned to their parents. This policy eventually makes students bored because there are no activities. Finally, these students look for other activities, namely riding motorbikes and traveling around town, then they look for random enemies who are generally fellow students.

Causes of Klitih

In a research journal entitled “Factors for Determining Klitih Behavior”, it was identified that there is adolescent aggressiveness which ultimately causes or gives rise to clit behavior. The cause of klitih itself is a group of teenagers who have the same hobbies and activities. These teenagers have a sense of comfort and compatibility that arises from the group.

Like teenagers in general, they can also be influenced by other teenagers their age, so this friendship will lead to a negative direction, such as delinquency, drugs, and promiscuity. In this journal it is also explained that someone who commits violence aims to be recognized by the group. This recognition is also necessary so that a person can be included in a gang or group member.

Judging from the aspect of inter-group relations, it is known that a teenager will get a better name in his circle of friends or hangouts when they manage to injure other people on the street. However, there are two interesting results of this study to ponder, related to the emergence of clit behavior.

First, it is related to the condition of the house which can affect the behavior of adolescents which leads to clit, namely the disharmony of a household, which causes a child to not get the love and attention they need. In the end, these teenagers tend to look for it in the group.

The factor of domestic violence (domestic violence) also influences a child’s psychology, so that in the end when they grow up children become unable to control their emotions, and are unable to think clearly. Second, in addition to a household that is not harmonious, the absence of a role model is also one of the causes of aggressiveness and inability to control emotions.

In this study, it was stated that some of the teenagers who were used as research subjects did not know their parents. Finally, these teens become more easily carried away in the group. Neglect of a teenager in the school environment and the environment where he lives also triggers aggressive behavior, which ultimately leads to criminal acts. Like joining a clit group.

Tips for Avoiding Klitih

Increasingly, crimes and criminal acts are increasingly prevalent. Especially on the street, where criminals roam around looking for victims. Whether it’s pickpocketing, mugging, fraud, or sexual harassment, there are so many crimes that can happen on the street, and we can all be victims of them.

Well, here below are tips that you can apply to avoid crime on the road.

Beware of Surrounding Conditions

Being aware of your surroundings is the most basic way you should practice to avoid crime. You will not be able to avoid the crime of klitih if you are not vigilant, for example, when you want to listen to music with a headset, adjust the volume. This needs to be done so that you can still hear the sounds around you.

Also, when walking alone at night, avoid using gadgets and just stay focused on the road and your surroundings.

As much as possible avoid traveling alone

If you want to go to a place in Yogyakarta that is far away or you have never visited before, as much as possible, never go alone. People who go alone have a greater risk of being a victim of clit, especially if you seem confused and look around for the address you’re looking for.

What’s more, if you’re a girl and you want to go out at night, it’s wise to ask someone to accompany you, and whenever possible, ask a man, whether that’s a friend, partner, or family member, to accompany you.

Look for Busy and Light Routes

When walking or driving try to choose a well-lit and busy road. Especially at night. Don’t feel at a loss if indeed to pass that road you have to turn quite far. It’s okay to be a little tired when compared to having to get a clit.

Do not use jewelry or excessive expensive items

For this one step, chances are you already know. Because, using jewelry excessively is an act that can provoke crime. You shouldn’t spend other expensive items such as jewelry, gadgets, and the like if you don’t really need them. Always appear simple and avoid showing off in order to maintain your own safety.

Use a Safe Bag in a Safe Way

The bag you use can also determine whether you manage to avoid crime or not. A bag that is thinner and easier to open is certainly a bad choice and will increase the risk of losing things in public places. So, use a bag with a thick material and more tightly closed.

The way you carry your bag is also important. If you carry a bag with only one hand, a mugger will easily snatch it from your hand. Meanwhile, if you use a backpack, you should just carry it in front of your body so that it’s easier for you to keep an eye on it. Don’t let valuables just disappear just because of how to carry a bag that is not wise enough.

Make sure your cellphone is always ready

At certain times, maybe you are in a situation that is quite dangerous but you cannot ask those around you for help. So, the only way you can do is ask for help via cellphone . Use the speed dial feature so you can call family or friends quickly.

However, in order to contact other people, of course your cellphone must be ready. So, make sure you never run out of battery. Always top up your credit and quota, so you don’t run out of battery and quota in an emergency. In addition, as much as possible use a provider card with a broad and stable signal so that you don’t experience signal difficulty when you have to ask for help.

Always carry objects that can be used for self-defense

In an emergency when you’re forced to face off against a bad guy, you also need to defend yourself as best you can. If the criminal is only after your luggage, just let it take it as the wisest move. Especially if the criminal is holding a gun.

However, if he is targeting you, then fight it. As much as possible, always carry an object that you can use to defend yourself. It can be a stun gun, pepper spray, umbrella, or even an iron bar that you deliberately carry with you just in case. Having martial arts skills will also be very helpful, but try to keep using an object as a weapon that will make it easier for you to take down the bad guy.

Apart from that, you can also use this object to fend off attacks, and most importantly, don’t hesitate to paralyze and even injure the criminal in self-defense.

Those are some steps to avoid clit. It would be even better if you always go with friends or relatives so you can minimize clit actions. In fact, it’s good when you come home too late, preferably on a busy and bright street.

Klitih Criminal Law

Klitih has a very negative impact and worries the community. The negative impact of this clit can also cause trauma, severe injuries, and even death to the victims. In addition, klitih can damage the morale of the next generation and disrupt order.

Therefore, klitih entered into violent crimes. Klitih is also regulated in the Criminal Code (KUHP) article 170. The following is the contents of the Criminal Code regarding Klitih:

(1) Any person who openly and collectively uses violence against a person or property, is subject to a maximum imprisonment of five years and six months.

(2) While the guilty party shall be punished: By a maximum imprisonment of seven years, if he deliberately destroys objects or if the violence used results in various serious injuries. With a maximum imprisonment of nine years, if the violence results in serious injury. With a maximum imprisonment of twelve years, if violence results in death.

Related Books

Playing Punch: Typical Betawi Pencak Silat

It cannot be denied, judging from the remains of art and culture, the Betawi ethnic group was formed from the acculturation of several ethnic groups that once inhabited the area that is now the capital of the Republic of Indonesia. Through a long evolution, the process of smelting several ethnic groups took place, giving birth to new ethnicities and cultures, regardless of the main culture that influenced them.

One of the products of acculturation and assimilation is the cultural element of martial arts martial arts, which the local people call Maen Punch. The acculturation and assimilation background makes Maen Punch a typical Betawi martial arts, which has the richness and diversity of schools, movement characteristics, forms of moves, even traditional weapons.

In its development, Maen Punch or Betawi martial arts, became the most important part of social life, became a Betawi identity that coupled with religious life, so that expressions of prayer and silat were born. Prayer and silat are simple personifications of the Betawi people in applying Islamic teachings about “hablum minallah and hablum minannas” , how to establish a relationship between a servant and his Creator and maintain relationships between people and other creatures.

Heist Society#2: Uncommon Criminals

After successfully leading her crew to steal paintings from the world’s greatest museums, Katarina Bishop—who is actually still a teenager—becomes famous among thieves. Because of that, he wasn’t too surprised when someone asked him to steal the Cleopatra Emerald so that the precious stone could be returned to its rightful owner. The problem is, the stone has been hidden for thirty years and has never been shown to the public. Not to mention the matter of determining the best strategy for this theft. But the biggest problem that makes Kat’s crew the most nervous is that… the emerald is cursed!

Reportedly, Cleopatra—the first owner of the emerald—even committed suicide after cutting the stone, and so far no one has managed to break the curse! This time, maybe Kat can’t rely on the old tricks in the world’s long history of theft. He must use all his talents, with the help of billionaire boy Hale and the rest of his crew.

Mozu Crime Records And Other Laughter Stories

When it comes to respect for religious traditions, NU kiai and Catholic priests are similar. But when it comes to jokes, the impression is that the Kyai wins. But after reading MoZu’s book, I think he managed to beat NU in the 90+3 minute injury time. The score is equally strong, Nadirsyah Hosen (Gus Nadir) Rais Syuriyah PCI Nahdlatul Ulama, in Australia – New Zealand.

In easy-to-digest language, Father Andreas Zu offers extraordinary moral and spiritual messages through seemingly ordinary life stories. Jokes taken from the life of the robed people, both during their education and when they were working, make our lips smile and even provoke laughter, invite our minds to think, even our hearts are touched so that we feel sympathetically reprimanded and strengthened to live more optimistically, humorously and humanely. Mgr. Antonius Subianto Bunjamin, OSC (Bishop of Bandung Diocese).

The stories in this book are mostly true stories, of admiration for how life presents silliness for silliness. God never allows us to be sad. There are cute decorations as entertainment in the midst of life. Experiencing a journey that is decorated with the sundries of the world of laughter, makes life feel full of passion. When life feels dry, these stories exist as refreshing oases.

Closing

This is information about clit , which is accompanied by steps to avoid it and its causes. Hopefully this article is useful!

Adding insight about crime can be done by reading books. If you want to find books about crime, you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Kirchoff’s Laws – In Physics, Sinaumed’s definitely learns about electricity or electricity. In this chapter, you will usually get acquainted with Kirchoff’s Laws 1 and 2, which discuss the matter of electrical conduction. Kirchoff’s law is used as a basis for understanding electric circuits, especially closed electricity.

Yup , by understanding Kirchoff’s laws Sinaumed’s can analyze various simple electrical circuits by changing the series and parallel combinations of resistors present in a circuit with many resistors in it.

Then, what exactly is meant by Kirchoff’s laws 1 and 2? Let’s discuss together here.

Acquaintance with the Inventor of Kirchoff’s Law: Gustav Robert Kirchhoff

Gustav Robert Kirchoff was a German physicist born on March 12, 1824 who died at the age of 63, on October 17, 1887 to be precise. Kirchoff was born to Friedrich Kirchoff and Johanna Henriette Wittke. Friedrich, his father, was a lawyer by profession at that time.

At the age of 23, Kirchoff married a woman named Clara Richelot. From this marriage, he has two daughters and three sons. In 1869, Richelot died and Kirchoff finally married again to Luise Brommel in 1872.

Part of Kirchoff’s life was spent as a professor and professor of physics. From this dedication, he succeeded in discovering circuit law formulas for electrical engineering, the laws of thermodynamics or thermal radiation, and contributed to the field of spectroscopy.

You can find out a more complete biography of Gustav Robert Kirchoff and other physicists in the book Encyclopedia of 20th Century Physicists written by Taufik Hidayat.

Kirchhoff’s Law 1

Kirchoff’s law 1 is also known as the junction rule or the law of branching which fulfills the conservation of charge. This law is usually used in multi-symptom circuits and has several branching points that divide the electric current.

In a constant state, there is no accumulation of electric charge at any point in the circuit. This means, the amount of charge that goes into each point is equal to the amount of charge that comes out of that point.

This is in line with the sound of Kirchoff’s law 1 which says:

“The sum of the electric currents going into a branch point will equal the sum of the currents leaving that point.”

To understand better, take a look at the image below.

The basis for the sound of this law is taken from the Law of the Conservation of Charge which has the sound “The charge at point A will be the same as the charge at Point B”. But with notes, there are no external forces acting in this series.

It’s like a tourist bus carrying 50 people from Bandung to Jakarta. Since departing from Bandung to arriving at their destination in Jakarta, the number of passengers on the bus remained 50. With a note, no passengers were left behind during breaks at rest areas and other incidents.

Kirchoff’s Law Formula 1

Kirchoff’s law formula is as follows:

Information:

Σ Input = Total incoming current (Ampere)
Σ Iout = Total current going out (Ampere)

So, so that Sinaumed’s can understand more about this Kirchoff 1 law formula, let’s practice by understanding the example questions below.

Look at this picture of the electrical circuit:

Question:
What amount of current is there in I4?

Solution:
Total incoming current = total outgoing current. So:
I1 + I4 = I2 + I3
5 A + I4 = 10 A + 2 A
I4 = 12 A – 5A
I4 = 7 A
So, the answer to the question is 2 A.

Kirchhoff’s Law 2

Kirchoff’s law 2 or the loop rule has a potential difference between two branching points in a circuit that is in a constant state.

This law is proof of the law of conservation of energy. Where if the charge Q that exists at any point has a potential V, then the energy possessed by that charge is QV.

Then, as the charge begins to move through the loop, it gains or loses energy as it passes through an element. However, when the charge returns to its starting point, the energy in the charge returns to QV.

Here is an explanation of Kirchoff’s law 2 which reads:

“The sum of the total voltages around the closed loop in a network, has a magnitude equal to zero”.

Usually Kirchoff’s laws discuss loops in an electric circuit like the one in the picture below. The goal is to measure how much the voltage potential difference is in a circuit that has no branches.

Kirchoff’s Law Formula 2

Kirchoff’s 2nd law formula is as follows:

Kirchoff’s Rule of Law

Apart from the formula, you also have to pay attention to some rules from Kirchoff’s law which will help you understand it. These rules are as follows:

One

For each closed path, Sinaumed’s must choose a loop with a certain direction. You are free to determine the direction of the loop (whether you want it clockwise or counterclockwise), but it’s better to use the direction that goes with the current.

Two

If the direction of the loop in a branch is the same as the direction of the current, then the voltage drop (IR) will have a positive sign. If the direction is opposite, then the sign becomes negative.

For example, the direction of the loop and the current is clockwise, so the voltage drop is positive.

Loop in the direction of current

Three

If when following the direction of the loop, the pole of the voltage source encountered for the first time is the positive pole, then the Electric Force Movement (EMF) will have a positive sign.

Application of Kirchoff’s Laws in Everyday Life

Generally, to understand the laws that exist in Physics, we are invited to see their application in everyday life. This method will be easier to understand because we experience it ourselves and understand every change and how it works.

It’s different if you only learn from textbooks. Sometimes the sound of the law is difficult to understand. Especially when added with certain formulas. The more difficult it is for us to understand.

Unfortunately, when studying Kirchoff’s laws you cannot rely on this strategy. This is because the application of Kirchoff’s laws in everyday life is quite difficult for our eyes to see directly.

Its application is in the form of a formula used to run electrical circuits, namely series circuits and parallel circuits. The easiest example to describe these two circuits is the lights in the house.

If you use a series circuit at home, the lamp that is closest to the switch or power source will definitely glow brighter than the lamp that is far from the power source.

If what is used for the lights in your house is a parallel circuit, then all the lights will light up with the same level of brightness regardless of the difference in distance between the lights and the power source.

So the question is, when do we actually have to analyze a circuit? Then who can analyze it? You can see the answer below:

1. We analyze circuits when we want to check for damage to a device.
2. We analyze circuits when we build our own electronic circuits by studying pre-existing circuits.

Kirchoff’s law itself has advantages, which can be used to analyze very complicated circuits. For example, when Sinaumed’s wants to replicate an electronic circuit that has a different specification, you have to replace some of the components in it. Either that, increase or decrease the resistance value of the resistor.

So that you can determine the appropriate component, you must calculate the value of the voltage and current in the circuit.

Example of Kirchoff’s Law Problem 1 and Discussion

Problem 1

In the simple circuit below, the current flowing in I1 = 20 A, I2 = 4 A, and I4 = 8 A. Determine the value of I3!

It is known:
I1 = 20 Amperes
I2 = 4 Amperes
I4 = 8 Amperes

Asked: I3?

Answer:

According to the data that has been mentioned, this problem can be solved using the Kirchoff 1 law formula, namely:

ΣImasuk = ΣIkeluar
I1 = I2 + I3 + I4
20 = 4 + I3 + 8
20 = 12 +I3
I3 = 20-12= 8 Ampere

So the answer to the question is 8 Amperes.

Problem 2

In the simple circuit below, the current flowing at I1 = 15 Amperes, I3 = 7 Amperes, I4 = 8 Amperes and I5 = 5 Amperes. Determine the value of I2!

Diketahui:
I1 = 15 Ampere
I3 = 7 Ampere
I4 = 8 Ampere
I5 ​​= 5 Ampere

Asked: I2?

Answer:

According to the data that has been mentioned, this problem can be solved using the Kirchoff 1 law formula, namely:

ΣImasuk = ΣIkeluar
I1 + I2 = I3 + I4 + I5
20 + I2 = 7 + 8 + 5
I2 = 20-15
I2 = 20-15= 5 Ampere

So the strong current on I2 is 5 Amperes.

Problem 3

If I1 in question number one is increased by 25%, determine the ratio of the initial and final I3 values.

Discussion:

Diketahui:
I1 = 20 Ampere
I2 = 4 Ampere
I4 = 8 Ampere
I3 = 8 Ampere
I1’= 20 + (20 x 0.25) = 25 Ampere

Ditanyakan: I3:I3′?

Answer:

According to existing data, this problem can be solved using Kirchoff’s 1st law formula:

ΣImasuk = ΣIkeluar
I1′ = I2 + I3′ + I4
25 = 4 + I3′ + 8
25 = 12 +I3′
I3′ = 25-12= 13 Ampere
I3:I3’= 8:13

So the initial and final I3 comparison is 8:13.

Example of Kirchoff’s Law Questions 2 and Discussion

Problem 1

Discussion:

Diketahui:
R1 = 3 ohms
R2 = 2 ohms
R3 = 1 ohm
є1 = 12 Volts
є2 = 24 Volts

Asked: I?

Answer:

According to existing data, this problem can be solved using the Kirchoff 2 law formula:

Discussion:

First, determine the direction of the loop first. To make it easier to do, the direction of the loop is the same as the direction of the electric current (I)

To make it easier to calculate and write, they are written sequentially

Σє + ΣIR = 0
IR2 + є1 + IR1 + IR3 -є2 = 0
I(2) + 12 + I(3) + I(1) -24 =0
6I-12=0
I=12/6= 2 Ampere

So the current strength in I is 2 Amperes.

Problem 2

If it is known that ε1 = 16 V; ε2 = 8V; ε3 = 10V; R1 = 12 ohms; R2 = 6 ohms; and R3 = 6 ohms. How big is the electric current I?

Diketahui:
ε1 = 16 V
ε2 = 8 V
ε3 = 10 V
R1 = 12 ohm
R2 = 6 ohm
R3 = 6 ohm.

Asked: I?

Discussion:

First, determine the direction of the loop first.

The calculation starts from R1

Σє + ΣIR = 0
IxR1 – ε1 + I1xR2 = 0
I(6) – 16 + I1(6) = 0
12I + 6I1 = 16 ….. > dibagi 2
6I + 3I1 =8
karena I1+I2=I, maka
6(I1+I2) +3I1 = 8
6I1 + 6I2 + 3I1 = 8
9I1 + 6I2 = 8

Loop 2 which is on the right
In loop 2, the direction of current I1 is opposite to the direction of the loop until, I1 is negative (-), until

Σє + ΣIR = 0
I2xR3 + ε2 – I1xR2 + ε3 = 0
I2(6) + 8 – I1(6) + 10 = 0
6I2 – 6I1 + 18 = 0
– 6I1 + 6I2 = -18

Elimination

9I1 + 6I2 = 8
– 6I1 + 6I2 = -18
—————– (-)
15I1 + 0 = 26
I1 = 26/15 A
-6I1 + 6I2 = -18 …..> -6(26/15) + 6I2 = -18…> I2=12/5 A
I=I1+I2= (26/15) + (12/5) = 4,13 A

so the current strength in I is 4.13 Amperes.

Problem 3

A circuit is known as below. What will happen to the electric current in the circuit if switch S is closed. Then what is the power at R = 2 Ω? when R1 = 2 Ω, R2 = 4 Ω, R3 = 1 Ω, є1 = 12 V, є2 = 8 V

Discussion:

First determine the direction of the current and the direction of the loop. In this case the direction of the current is the same as the direction of the loop so that The image above becomes

Loop 1

ε + IR + 0 or Φ +ΙR = 0
-ε1 + I1 R2 + I R1 =0
-12 + 4I1 + 2I=0
4I1+2I=12
I=I1+I2
2(I1+I2)+4I1=12
2I1 +2I2+4I1=12
6I1+2I2=12 :2 = 3I1+I2=6

Loop 2

8 – I1 R2 +I2 R3=0
8 – I1 4 + I2 1=0
4I1-I2=8

Elimination

3I1+I2=6
4I1-I2=8
———- (+)
7I1=14
I1=2
3I1+I2=6
3(2)+I2=6
I2=6-6=0 Ampere
I=I1+I2=2+0=2 Ampere

Power on R1

P=(I^2)R1
=(2^2)2=8 Watt

So the power on R2 is 8 Watts

Problem 4

Determine the value of the current strength of the circuit below and the clamping voltage at the KJ point. If it is known, ε1= 5 volts, r1 = 1 Ω, R1= 2 Ω, ε2= 17 volts, r2 = 1 Ω, R2= 2 Ω.

Discussion:

Wanted: Determine the value of the current strength (I) of the circuit below and the clamping point voltage KJ(V)

Answer

The first step is to determine the direction of the current and the direction of the loop. To make it easy to direct current and unidirectional loops. Like the picture below.

VKJ= ε2+Ir2
VKJ= 17+1=18 Volts

The current strength (I) of the circuit is 1 Ampere and the KJ(V) point clamp voltage is 18 volts

All of the questions above were inspired by examples of questions in the Class XI SMA/MA Fundamental Physics book by Sunardi. This book presents regular physics questions specifically designed to be used as a practice ground for students in preparing themselves for various forms of physics exams, such as exams at the school level, national assessments, to state university entrance selection (PTN).

Thus the discussion of Kirchoff’s laws 1 and 2 along with examples of problems. After reading this article to the end, I hope it can add insight and be useful for Sinaumed’s.

 

Kirchhoff’s Law, Ohm’s Law, along with the questions and discussion – Some of you have probably heard or read the name Kirchhoff , right? Yep , Kirchhoff is one of the physicists who has contributed to the science of electricity. The laws of his famous research results are Kirchhoff’s Laws I and II.

Kirchhoff’s law was coined by Gustav Robert Kirchhoff who was a physicist from Germany. Kirchhoff explained his laws about electricity into two parts, namely Kirchhoff’s First Law and Kirchhoff’s Second Law.

Meanwhile, Ohm’s law is a law regarding electricity that was coined by a physicist who came from Germany as well, namely Georg Simon Ohm.

Then, what is the relationship between these 2 laws?

KIRCHOFF’S LAW

As the name implies, the sound of Kirchoff’s Laws was coined by a physicist from Germany named Gustav Robert Kirchoff. Gustav Kirchoff’s research discusses the subject of electrical conduction.

Quoting from Merriam-Webster, the definition of Kirchoff’s current law is:

In an electric circuit, the sum of the currents that exist in all branches and meet at any point is zero.

Besides that, Merriam-Webster also defines Kirchoff’s Law as follows:

In a closed electric circuit, the sum of the electromotive forces in the circuit is equal to the resistance times the current.

Then, what is the sound of Kirchoff’s Laws 1 and 2? Check out the explanation below:

Kirchoff’s Laws 1

In everyday life, we often encounter electrical circuits consisting of various connections. This means that the electric circuit has many branches and nodes.

This node is the result of a meeting of three or more branches. Pay attention to the following picture:

The sum of the currents entering the node is equal to the sum of the currents leaving. This law is also known as the law of conservation of electric charge.

Quoting from Acceleration Physics, the sound of Kirchoff’s 1st Law is:

“The sum of the electric currents entering a node is equal to the sum of the electric currents coming out of the node.”

Mathematically, Kirchoff’s Law 1 can be written with the formula:

So that You can understand more about Kirchoff’s Law 1, let’s practice the example questions below.

Look at this picture of the electrical circuit:

The current flowing in I1 = 5 A, I2 = 10 A, and I3 = 2 A, what is the total current in I4?

Completion:

If the sum of the incoming currents equals the outgoing currents, then:

I1 + I4 = I2 + I3

5 A + I4 = 10 A + 2 A

I4 = 12A – 5A

I4 = 7 A

So, the total strong current on I4 is 2A.

Kirchoff’s 1st law can be combined with series and parallel electrical connections in Ohm’s Law.

The series connection has the purpose of increasing the resistance in the circuit and as a voltage divider. In a series connection, the current through each resistor has the same value.

Meanwhile, for parallel electrical connections, the potential difference (V) or the voltage through each resistor is the same.

Parallel electrical connections have the purpose of minimizing the resistance that exists in the circuit and as a current divider.

Kirchoff’s Law Sounds 2

Kirchoff’s Law 2 has a function for more complicated electric circuits, which cannot be simplified using Kirchoff’s Law 1. This electric circuit is usually a closed electrical circuit or what is commonly called a loop.

In a closed electrical circuit, it does not only use one source of voltage or electromotive force (EMF), but can have two or more.

In a closed circuit, the algebraic sum of the electromotive forces with a voltage drop equals zero.

Mathematically, the formula for Kirchoff II’s Law can be written as follows:

When solving a closed electrical circuit using Kirchoff’s 2nd Law, use the following steps:

Selects the loop direction at each of the closed paths. The choice of the direction of the loop is free, but usually the direction of the loop is in the direction of the current in order to make it easier to work on.

The voltage drop (IR) has a negative value if the loop direction is opposite to the current direction. The voltage drop (IR) will have a positive value if the loop direction is in the same direction as the current.

When following the direction of the loop and the voltage source encountered first is the positive pole, the EMF also has a positive sign, and vice versa.

OHM’S LAW

In Electronics, the basic Law of Electronics that every Electronics Engineer or hobbyist must learn and understand is Ohm’s Law, which is the basic law that states the relationship between Electric Current (I), Voltage (V) and Resistance (R). Ohm’s Law in English is called “Ohm’s Laws”. Ohm’s Law was first introduced by a German physicist named Georg Simon Ohm (1789-1854) in 1825. Georg Simon Ohm published Ohm’s Law in a Paper entitled “The Galvanic Circuit Investigated Mathematically” in 1827.

Ohm’s Law sounds

Basically, the sound of Ohm’s Law is:

“The amount of electric current (I) flowing through a conductor or conductor will be directly proportional to the potential difference / voltage (V) applied to it and will be inversely proportional to the resistance (R)”.

Mathematically, Ohm’s Law can be formulated into the following equation:

V = I x R

I = V / R

R=V/I

Where :

V = Voltage (Potential Difference or Voltage whose unit is Volt (V))
I = Current (Electric Current whose unit is Ampere (A))
R = Resistance (Barriers or Resistance whose unit is Ohm (Ω))

In its application, we can use Ohm’s Law Theory which is in Electronic Circuits in order to minimize electric current, voltage, and also to obtain the appropriate resistance (resistance value).

The thing to remember in calculating the Ohm’s Law formula, the units used are Volts, Amperes and Ohms. If we use other units such as millivolts, kilovolts, milliamperes, megaohms or kiloohms, then we need to convert to Volts, Amperes and Ohms units first to simplify calculations and also to get the correct results.

Case Examples in Ohm’s Law

To make it clearer in understanding Ohm’s Law, we can do practical work using a simple electronic circuit like the following:

This practicum requires a DC Generator (Power Supply), Voltmeter, Ammeter, and a Potentiometer according to the required value.

From a picture of a simple electronic circuit, we can compare Ohm’s Law Theory with the results obtained from the Practicum in terms of calculating Electric Current (I), Voltage (V) and also Resistance / resistance (R).

Calculating Electric Current (I)

The formula that can be used to calculate Electric Current is I = V / R

Example Case 1:

Setting the Power Supply or DC Generator used to produce a 10V Output Voltage, then set the Potentiometer Value to 10 Ohms. What is the value of Electric Current (I) ?

Enter the Voltage value, which is 10V and also the Resistance Value of the Potentiometer, which is 10 Ohm, into the Ohm’s Law Formula as follows:

I = V / R
I = 10 / 10
I = 1 Ampere
So the result is 1 Ampere.

Example Case 2:

Setting the DC Generator or Power Supply to produce a 10V Voltage Output, then set the Potentiometer value to 1 kiloOhm. What is the value of Electric Current (I)?
First convert the resistance value of 1 kiloOhm to Ohm units. 1 kiloOhm = 1000 Ohms. Then, input the 10V Voltage value and also the Resistance value from the 1000 Ohm Potentiometer into the Ohm’s Law Formula as follows:

I = V / R
I = 10 / 1000
I = 0.01 Amperes or 10 milliAmperes
Then the result is 10mA

Calculating Voltage (V)

The formula that will be used to calculate Voltage or Potential Difference is V = I x R.

Sample case :

First, set the value of the resistance or resistance (R) Potentiometer to 500 Ohm, then set the DC Generator (Power supply) to get the amount of Electric Current (I) 10mA. What is the Voltage (V)? First convert the unit of Electric Current (I), which is still one milliAmpere, into Ampere units, namely: 10mA = 0.01 Amperes. Then, input the Potentiometer Resistance value of 500 Ohm and the Electric Current value of 0.01 Amperes into the Ohm’s Law Formula as follows:

V = I x R
V = 0.01 x 500
V = 5 Volts
Then the value is 5Volt.

Calculating Resistance / Resistance (R)

The formula that will be used to calculate the Resistance Value is R = V / I

Sample case :

If the Voltage value on the Voltmeter (V) is 12V and the Electric Current value (I) on the Ammeter is 0.5A. So, what is the value of the resistance on the potentiometer?

First, input the value of 12V Voltage and 0.5A Electric Current into the Ohm Formula as follows:
R = V / IR
= 12 /0.5
R = 24 Ohm
Then the resistance value is 24 Ohm

Questions and Discussion

1. In the simple circuit example in the previous figure, the current flowing at I1 = 20 Amperes, I2 = 4 Amperes and I4 = 8 Amperes.

Determine the value of I3.

Discussion:
It is known that:
I1 = 20 Ampere
I2 = 4 Ampere
I4 = 8 Ampere

Asked: I3 =… ?

Answer :

Based on the data contained in question no. 1 can be solved by Kirchoff’s law 1 namely,

ΣI in = ΣI out

I1 = I2 + I3 + I4
20 = 4 + I3 + 8
20 = 12 +I3
I3 = 20-12= 8 Amperes

Then it is obtained that the current strength on I3 is 8 Amperes.

2. In this simple circuit, the current flowing at I1 = 15 Amperes, I3 = 7 Amperes, I4 = 8 Amperes and I5 = 5 Amperes. Determine the value of I2.

Discussion:

Is known :

I1 = 15 Amperes

I3 = 7 Amperes

I4 = 8 Amperes

I5 = 5 Amperes

Asked: I2 =… ?

Answer :

Based on the existing data in question no. 2 can be solved by Kirchoff’s law 1 namely,

ΣIn = ΣI out

I1 + I2 = I3 + I4 + I5

20 + I2 = 7 + 8 + 5

I2 = 20-15

I2 = 20-15 = 5 Amperes

Then it is obtained that the large current strength on I2 is 5 Amperes.

How much current flows in an electric current circuit if R1 = 3 ohms, R2 = 2 ohms, and R3 = 1 ohm and є1 = 12 Volts and є2 = 24 Volts.

Discussion:

Is known :

R1 = 3 ohms

R2 = 2 ohms

R3 = 1 ohm

є1 = 12 Volts

є2 = 24 Volts

Asked: I =… ?

Answer :

Based on the existing data, question no. 2 can be solved using Kirchoff’s 2nd law

Step:

First, determine the direction of the loop. To make it easier, the direction of the loop is the same as the direction of the electric current (I)

From the picture, the electric current (I) meets the pole (+) at є1 so that it has a positive value є1 (+) while є2 has a negative value є2 (-)

In order to make it easier to calculate and also write, it is written sequentially Σє + ΣIR = 0

IR2 + є1 + IR1 + IR3 -є2 = 0

I(2) + 12 + I(3) + I(1) -24 =0

6I-12=0

I=12/6= 2 Amperes

Then it is obtained that the large current strength at I is 2 Amperes.

2. If it is known that ε1 = 16 V; ε2 = 8V; ε3 = 10V; R1 = 12 ohms; R2 = 6 ohms; and R3 = 6 ohms. So, the magnitude of the electric current I is…

Discussion:

Is known :

ε1 = 16 V

ε2 = 8 V

ε3 = 10 V

R1 = 12 ohms

R2 = 6 ohms

R3 = 6 ohms.

Asked: I =… ?

Answer:

The calculation starts from R1

Σє + ΣIR = 0

IxR1 – ε1 + I1xR2 = 0

I(6) – 16 + I1(6) = 0

12I + 6I1 = 16 …..> divided by 2

6I + 3I1 = 8

because I1+I2=I

so

6(I1+I2) +3I1 = 8

6I1 + 6I2 + 3I1 = 8

9I1 + 6I2 = 8

Loops 2

In loop 2, the direction of current I1 is opposite to the direction of the loop so that, I1 is negative (-), so

Σє + ΣIR = 0

I2xR3 + ε2 – I1xR2 + ε3 = 0

I2(6) + 8 – I1(6) + 10 = 0

6I2 – 6I1 + 18 = 0

– 6I1 + 6I2 = -18

Elimination

9I1 + 6I2 = 8

– 6I1 + 6I2 = -18

—————– (-)

15I1 + 0 = 26

I1 = 26/15 A

-6I1 + 6I2 = -18 …..> -6(26/15) + 6I2 = -18…> I2=12/5 A

I=I1+I2= (26/15) + (12/5) = 4.13 A

Then it is obtained that the current strength at I is 4.13 Amperes.

That’s all, a brief summary of Kirchoff’s law and Ohm’s law, thank you for reading and I hope this is useful for all of you.

sinaumedia Literacy – Protists are eukaryotic microorganisms that are not animals, plants, or fungi. Although protists cannot be categorized in groups of animals, plants, or fungi, they have characteristics that are similar to the three groups. Therefore, the classification of protists is divided into 3 types, namely animal-like protists, plant-like protists, and mushroom-like protists. Check out a more complete explanation of the following protistas, Sinaumed’s!

DEFINITION OF PROTISTS

Protista is a kingdom that consists of one cell or many cells and has a nuclear membrane (eukaryotic organisms) and is single-celled. Protists can be grouped into three parts, namely animal-like (protozoa), plant-like (algae) and mushroom-like. Most of the Protists live in water, because they do not have a protective body to protect them from dry weather.

So, Kingdom Protista is a simple kingdom because it is only composed of one cell so that it can be grouped in its own kingdom. But there are also those that are multicellular but are still very simple compared to other organisms.

Indonesia as a mega-biodiversity country has a wealth of microorganisms which until now have not been completely recorded and utilized optimally. The book Knowing Indonesian Microorganism Biodiversity for the Welfare of the Nation, written by Indrawati Gandjar Roosheroe, will discuss various microorganisms including protists.

 

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE KINGDOM OF PROTISTS

Protists generally have microscopic and macroscopic sizes: Microscopic organisms are organisms that are about 5 µm – 3 mm in size. besides that there are also those that are macroscopic in size with a length of up to 60 meters or more. The following are other characteristics of Kingdom Protista Sinaumed’s:

• Generally Unicellular: Kingdom Protista is composed of a single cell or unicellular. But there are also multi cellular or many cells. In research of the kingdom Protista, which have many cells or multicellular will live in groups (form colonies).
• Eukaryotic Cell Type: Protists have a nucleus membrane so they are called as eukaryotic cells. Cells that have a nuclear membrane, but Protists are the simplest prokaryotic living things but are far more complex in terms of structure, function, behavior and ecology when compared to Archaebacteria and Eubacteria.
• Free Living or Symbiosis: Kingdom Protista can live freely by benefiting each other. But it can also be parasitic to other organisms. If it is parasitic, it will cause many diseases around it.
• Habitat Generally in Humid Places: As explained above that these Protists live in water or damp places. Not only in fresh water but also in the sea where there is a lot of salt, protists can also live. Protists that live in the sea mostly act as phytoplankton which are the main contributors in the energy supply of food webs.
• Aerobic and Anaerobic: Aerobic in nature because it requires oxygen for the respiration process which takes place in the mitochondria. It is anaerobic because it does not require oxygen for respiration by symbiotic with aerobic bacteria.
• Heterotrophic and heterotrophic because they obtain food by absorbing organic molecules and some are photoautotrophic because they have chloroplasts as a place to capture solar energy.
• Are Motile: There are some Protists that have locomotion tools such as flagella or whip hairs, cilia or vibrating hairs, and pseudopodia or pseudo feet. Thus Protista can be called motile which moves freely.

CLASSIFICATION OF PROTISTS

ANIMAL-LIKE PROTISTS (PROTOZOA)

Characteristics of Protozoa

Protists that are similar to animals have certain characteristics, including:

• Protozoa are single-celled animals known as unicellular with a body size of only 10-200 µm.
• Does not have a cell wall.
• In general, they are heterotrophs, only a small number are autotrophs.
• Free-living or as a parasite for other organisms.
• Reproduction sexually or asexually.
• In general, have a means of movement.

Classification of Animal-Like Protists (Protozoa)

Protozoa are then classified based on their locomotion into four groups, namely:

PHYLUM RHIZOPODA (SARCODINA)

The movement of Rhizopoda is carried out using pseudopods (pseudopods). Rhizopods do not have a fixed shape because they always change according to their movements. Besides functioning to move, pseudo feet also function to catch food. After the food is digested, the waste products of digestion will condense and pull over to the end of the body and then leave the body. Because they cannot produce their own food, rhizopods are heterotrophic organisms. Rhizopods reproduce by direct division (binary fission). An example of a member of the rhizopoda phylum is Amoeba.

CILIATA phylum

Phylum Ciliata (Ciliophora or Infusiora): As the name implies, ciliates move using cilia (tibbling hairs). Apart from functioning as a means of locomotion, the cilia found in all parts of the body also function to move food so that it can enter through the mouth. Because they cannot produce their own food, ciliates are heterotrophic organisms. Ciliates usually have two cell nuclei called macronucleus (larger size) and micronucleus (smaller size). Asexual reproduction is done by dividing, and sexual is done by conjugation (attaching bodies to each other and exchanging nuclei). An example of a member of this phylum is paramecium sp.

PHILUM FLAGELLATES

Phylum Flagellata (Mastigophora): Flagella comes from the Latin word which means whip. Mastifophora comes from the Greek “mastig” which means whip, and “phora” which means movement. Most flagellates have two whips on the back of their body, so that when moving it looks as if they are being pushed from behind. Flagellates can be found in sea, water, freshwater, also in symbiosis with other living things, or live as a host or parasite.

SPOROZOA phylum

Sporozoa (Apicomplexa): Sporozoa (Sporo = seeds, zoa = animals) are unicellular organisms that do not have locomotion. These organisms move by contracting all the cells. All Sporozoa live as parasites, and food is absorbed directly from the host. Sporozoan reproduction can take place sexually or asexually. Sexually occurs by the meeting of microgametes and macrogametes in the host’s body. While asexual is done by cell division. Examples of sporozoa are plasmodium vivax, malaria, and ovale which are the causes of malaria in humans.

MUSHROOM-LIKE PROTISTS

Fungus-like protists are protists with the following characteristics: are eukaryotic, do not have chlorophyll, can produce spores, are heterotrophic. Fungi-like protists are not part of the kingdom Fungi because their body structure and way of reproduction are different from the Fungi group. Fungus-like protists are classified into three phyla, namely:

MYXOMYCOTA (MUSIC FUNGUS)

Myxomycota are also called plasmodial slime molds. All Myxoycota members are heterotrophs because they cannot carry out photosynthesis so they are unable to produce their own food. Usually, plasmodium slime molds have bright colored pigments, which can be yellow or orange.

Plasmodium can grow up to a centimeter (cm) in diameter, however they are unicellular organisms, their body size is large because this group can have many nuclei. Myxomycota habitat can be found in wet forests, weathered wood, and moist soil. In its life cycle there is a collection of amoeboid cells called plasmodium.

Amoeboid cells are free-living cells produced by slime molds. Plasmodium can eat bacteria, pests, spores and other organic components, the food is then digested by the mechanism of phagocytosis. When food is lacking, these cells will combine to form something like mucus. Then this slime-like mass will seek a new environment that better supports its needs.

The mass movement is carried out by contraction of each of the cells that joined earlier. When the habitat is dry and unable to provide food, the plasmodium will stop growing and developing, and will differentiate into a life cycle stage that functions for sexual reproduction.

ACRASIOMYCOTA

Acrasiomycota is a cellular slime mold. Unlike the myxomycota which is a plasmodium slime mold. The basic difference between the two is that Acrasiomycota is a haploid organism (only has one set of chromosomes), only the zygote is diploid (has two sets of chromosomes). Meanwhile, Myxomycota lived a more dominant life as a diploid organism. In addition, Acrasiomycota or cellular slime molds have bodies that function to produce spores during asexual reproduction. Acrasiomycota does not have a flagellated life cycle.

OOMYCOTA

OOMYCOTA (water mushroom): Actually the name for water fungus for Oomycota is not quite right, because it is one of the species of this phylum. “Oomycota” comes from the word “Oo” which means egg and “Mycota” which means mushroom. Most oomycota live as decomposers and play an important role in aquatic habitats. Some of its members also live as parasites. Oomycota reproduction can occur asexually or sexually. Asexually they will form zoospores which, if they fall into a suitable environment, will become new organisms. Meanwhile, sexually with the meeting of male gametes and female gametes.

PLANT LIKE PROTISTS (ALGAE)

Algae Characteristics

Algae characteristics include:

• Are unicellular or multicellular.
• Body size varies, ranging from microscopic algae with a size of 8 µm to macroscopic algae with a size of 60 µm.
• The shape of the body is fixed due to the presence of a cell wall.
• Unicellular algae can live solitary or form colonies.
• Has several types of chlorophyll (chlorophyll a, chlorophyll b, chlorophyll c, and chlorophyll d) stored in chloroplasts.
• Have photosynthetic pigments besides chlorophyll (xanthophyll [yellow], phycocyanin [blue], fucoxanthin [brown], phycoerythrin [red], and carotenoids).
• Have a variety of chloroplast shapes (spiral, disc, mesh, bowl, round, and others).
• Can live like plankton, neuston, or benthos.
• Reproduce asexually (by binary fission, fragmentation and vegetative spore formation) or sexually (by conjugation, singami and anisogamy).

Classification of Plant-like Protists (Algae)

Plant-like protists are classified into seven phyla, namely:

EUGLENOPHYTA

Phylum Euglenophyta are unicellular organisms that have flagella (whip hairs), eye-catching spots (called stigmas), and chloroplasts. Some members of the phylum Euglenophyta can live as autotrophs (produce their own food) or heterotrophs (hunt for food). When there is enough light, they will live as autotrophs, whereas when the light is weak, they will live as heterotrophs. Usually found in waters and reproduce by dividing. Euglenophyta is a plant-like protist (capable of photosynthesis) and animal-like (capable of active movement).

CHRYSOPHYTA

Chrysophyta (Golden Algae): Phylum Chrysophyta are organisms whose members have a variety of shapes and structures. Algae are usually golden brown in color. Many habitats in fresh water and moist soil, can also be found in the ocean. The dominant color pigments found in the body of Chrysophyta are carotene and phycoxanthin so that the body is golden-brown. But it can also have chlorophyll which gives it a green color.

PYRROPHYTA

Pyrrophyta or Dinoflagellates (Fire Algae), The name of the fire algae arises because of several characteristics of the plant-like protist members of this group, for example they appear to glow at night. Some pyrrophyta numbers will increase rapidly at certain times, for example when the water is warm and rich in nutrients so that it makes the ocean appear red-brown ( red tide ). When a red tide appears, the water conditions will be oxygen-poor, and sometimes it becomes toxic, so that when this phenomenon occurs many other living things die.

Actually the color of fire algae can vary, green, yellow, brown and others, this color depends on the pigment that is more dominant in composing its body. Usually fire algae have chlorophyll a and c pigments, xanthophyll, dinosatin and fikobilin. Dinoglagellate species are usually unicellular organisms but some are multicellular. This flaming algae has two flagellates which can make circular motions so they are often also called dinoflagellates (dino = whirlpool). Algae are generally photoautotrophic organisms, but there are also species that live as parasites.

PHAEOPHYTA

Phaeophyta (brown algae) are a group of plant-like protists that have a dominant pigment in the form of carotene, namely fucoxanthin, which gives their bodies a brown color. The name of this algae is in accordance with its characteristics, “phaeophyta” comes from the Greek word “phaeios” which means brown. In addition to fucostatin, brown algae also have chlorophyll a, c, and xanthophyll pigments.

Members of the Phaeophyta which have been recognized by more than 1000 species. Almost all brown algae live on the coast, they are mostly thread-like multicellular organisms. The structure of the phaeophyta is very similar to that of a real plant in that it has roots, stems and leaves. Reproduction asexually by dividing to produce zoospores or by fragmentation. Meanwhile, sexually by producing male and female gametes.

BACILLARIOPHYTA

Bacillariophyta (Diatoms) This phylum is the phylum that has the most members compared to other groups in plant-like protists. Its known species number about 10,000. In general, Bacillariophyta are unicellular organisms that do not move and live as plankton. Diatoms can be thread-like, round, or triangular in shape. Diatoms have a very distinctive body structure, namely the body consists of a box (hipotheka) and a lid (epitheka), between the box and the lid there is a gap called a rafe. The cell walls contain pectin and silicates, when these organisms die, the shells form soil. Diatoms have a hefty selling price because they can be used for various things.

RHODOPHYTA

Rhodophyta (Red Algae) is a phylum that has the dominant phycobilin pigment, namely phycoeitrin, which gives a red color to its body, but Rhodophyta also has phycocyanin pigment, which gives a blue color (not dominant). The known members of this phylum range from about 4000 species, most of which are multicellular organisms. Most rhodophyta live in the sea, and a few can be found in fresh water. Reproduction can take place asexually and sexually. Rhodophyta asexually by forming tetraspores. While sexually directly with male and female gametes.

CHLOROPHYTA

Chlorophyta (Green Algae) As the name implies, Chlorophyta has a greenish body. The dominant pigment that makes up their body is chlorophyll, besides that they also have a little carotene (yellow pigment). In the body of green algae, chlorophyll gathers in a place called chloroplast. The shape of the chloroplast in each member varies, some are round, spiral, like a star, and others.

Chlorophyta are unicellular organisms that can colonize to form simple multiseller organisms. They are often found living in watery habitats. Because it has chlorophyll, green algae are autotrophic living things that produce food through the process of photosynthesis. Reproduction can occur asexually (through binary fission) or sexually (through conjugation).

BENEFITS OF PROTISTS

Most of the zooplankton in aquatic ecosystems are protists with chlorophyll which are useful as food for fish and aquatic arthropods. In addition, here are some benefits that fall into the Protista category:

• Entamoeba coli in the large intestine of mammals plays a role in the process of decomposing food scraps.
• Foraminifera has an exoskeleton of limestone and its fossils in a certain amount can form globigerina soil deposits which can be used as an indication of the presence of petroleum.
• Radiolaria have a skeleton of a gritty substance. Radiolarians die and leave their shells to form radiolarian soil which can be used as a scouring agent.
• Paramaecium can also be used as an indicator organism for water pollution by organic matter.
• In addition to acting as a producer in aquatic ecosystems, Chlorella can also be used as a basic ingredient for making single cell protein (PST).

BAD EFFECTS OF PROTISTS

In addition to beneficial protists for human life, there are some that are detrimental, including:

• Entamoeba histolytica lives in the human intestine, causing intestinal tissue damage and diarrhea.
• Entamoeba hartmani lives in the human intestine, causes dysentery but its effects are no worse than Entamoeba histolytica.
• Entamoeba gingivalis lives in the human oral cavity, between the teeth or on the neck of the teeth, throat and tonsils. Not pathotenic but can exacerbate gingivitis.
• Trypanosoma gambiense causes sleeping sickness in humans (sleeping sickness or trypanosomiasis). These protists live in human blood. The intermediate vector is the tse-tse fly of the type Glossina tachionides.
• Trypanosoma evansi causes surrah disease in cattle, horses and buffaloes. Many outbreaks in the tropics, including Indonesia. The intermediate vector is a fly from the genus Tabanus.
• Leishmaania donovani causes kala azar disease in humans. Sufferers usually have a prolonged fever, enlarged liver and spleen, and ulcers or sores in the intestines.

Examples of Protist Questions and Answers

1. What is the classification of unicellular plant-like protists often called?
Answer: phytoplankton

2. Mention some characteristics of mushroom-like protists?
Answer: Are eukaryotic, do not have chlorophyll, can produce spores, are heterotrophic

3. What is the kingdom protista?
Answer: Protista is a kingdom consisting of one cell or many cells and has a nuclear membrane (eukaryotic organisms) and is single-celled.

Thus the definition, characteristics, classification, benefits and negative effects of protist microorganisms in everyday life, I hope this information is useful, Sinaumed’s. Have a good study!

Kingdom Protista Question Book from EDUTORE

sinaumedia developed an educational platform called Edutore. REGISTER and you can access lots of question practice books like those in sinaumedia by subscribing. Edutore has a slogan “Everyone Can Be Smart” and that is also what Edutore aspires to be. So that Edutore can participate in educating Indonesian children. On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as synonyms, antonyms and other CPNS questions.

sinaumedia Literacy – Did you know, some evidence shows that there have been algae on land since 1.2 billion years ago. Algae as part of the Plantae or plants have existed since the Ordovician period (450 million years ago) to the Silurian period (420 million years ago). Linnaeus then classified the entire division of organisms into 2 kingdoms, namely animalia and vegetabilia (plantae). Let’s get to know plant organisms or plantae more closely, see the full explanation below, Sinaumed’s.

DEFINITION OF PLANTAE

Kingdom Plantae or better known as plants is a multicellular eukaryotic organism with a cell wall and chlorophyll. Chlorophyll is a green leaf substance that functions in the process of photosynthesis, so that plants are able to make their own food (autotroph). This is the difference between Kingdom Plantae and Kingdom Animalia.

Outside the formal context, the word “plant” refers to organisms that have certain characteristics such as being able to carry out photosynthesis, produce cellulose, and be multicellular. There has been much criticism regarding fungi, including parts of the kingdom plantae, because fungi obtain food not through the process of photosynthesis, but from the remains of organic matter.

In addition, the building blocks of the cell walls of fungi are not the same as those of plants, they are more similar to those of animals. Therefore, the fungi were removed from the kingdom Plantae and made a separate kingdom called the kingdom fungi. Most types of algae are also excluded from the kingdom plantae because they do not have chlorophyll.

With such a variety of cells that make up plants, the tissues in them, make the various types of plants that exist. In the Textbook of Plant Tissue Culture you can learn about plant tissue culture.

PLANTAE CHARACTERISTICS

Plants are said to have evolved before animals and are located at the very beginning of the food chain. Without plants, most organisms could not survive. Plants can thrive even in the harshest conditions. Even the cold tundra regions of the Earth even contain some vegetation. Here are some of the characteristics of plantae that you need to know:

• Multicellular or having many cells
• Autotrophs, can make their own food
• Eukaryotic, is a cell that already has a cell nucleus membrane.
• There is a cell wall made of cellulose
• Live on moist land or water
• Can store food reserves in the form of starch (starch)
• Obtain food by means of photosynthesis assisted by sunlight
• Reproduce sexually (pistils and stamens) or asexually (grafts, shoots, cuttings and others)
• It has roots that are useful for absorbing water and strengthening plants
• It has leaves to collect sunlight which is used to produce glucose. Having organs and organ systems Having flowers as a means of sexual reproduction.
• Having alternation of offspring in its life cycle is called metagenesis. Metagenesis in kingdom plantae is the life cycle of a plant that displays an alternation of generations. The cycle is composed of the gametophyte generation which is a multicellular individual producing haploid gametes and the sporophyte generation which is a multicellular individual which produces spores produced by spore-producing cells (sporogenic cells).

CLASSIFICATION OF KINGDOM PLANTAE TYPES

PTERIDOPHYTA PHYLUM (NAIL PLANT)

Pteridophyta or ferns already have a carrier network (kormus) and true organs. Ferns reproduce asexually by means of spores. This plant undergoes metagenesis. In general, ferns live on land, especially in tropical rain forest areas. However, there are several types of nails that live floating in water.

Pteridophyta are plants that already have true stems, roots and leaves, reproduce by spores (spore-forming cormophytes) and experience an alternation of generations. In addition, ferns also have chlorophyll, xylem and phloem vessels, and fibrous roots. Get to know more closely about the characteristics of the following Pterydophyta (fern plants), Sinaumed’s:

• Spores are produced on sporophylls, especially on the underside of the leaves.
• Stems, roots and leaves can be easily distinguished.
• Young leaves on ferns grow coiled (circinnatus).

Types of Pterydophyta (ferns):

• True ferns (Pteriopsida): This species has true stems, roots and leaves. On young leaves grow roll (circinnatus). The highest number of species is about 12,000 species. Example: Suplir (Adiantum cuneatum) and Semanggi (Marsilea crenata).
• Ancient ferns (Psilopsida): This species produces one type of spore (homospore). The gametophyte lacks chlorophyll and nutrients obtained from symbiosis with fungi. The number of fern species is almost extinct, namely the remaining 10-13 species. Example: Psilotum and Rynia.
• Horsetail nails (Spenopsida): This type is called horsetail because of the shape of the stem that looks like a horse’s tail. The habitat of this plant is in subtropical or humid places. Sporangium in the form of strobilus, bisexual gametophyte and has chlorophyll. This type of fern is a homosporous fern (produces one kind of spore) with about 15 species. Example: Equisetum.
• Wire ferns (Lycopsida): Wire ferns can produce two kinds of spores (heterospores), the gametophytes do not have chlorophyll. The gametophyte also consists of two, namely bisexual and unisexual. The number of species of wire nails is about 1000 species. Example: Lycopodium and Selaginela.

PHYLUM BRYOPHYTA (MOSS PLANTS)

Bryophytes do not have true organs such as stems, roots or leaves, and do not have xylem and phloem vessels. Bryophyta have a small rhizoid that allows them to stick to the ground. Bryophyta usually grows in moist and shady areas. Bryophyta is a transitional plant between cormophytes (kormophytes) and thallus plants (talophytes). Similar to pteridophyta, bryophyta also undergoes metagenesis and undergoes an alternation of generations. The characteristics of Bryophyta (Moss Plants) include:

• Moss plants are macroscopic in size 1-2 cm, and some are up to 40 cm in size.
• Kormophytes are plants that can be differentiated into stems, roots and leaves.
• It has two forms of generation, namely the sporophyte generation and the gametophyte generation.
• It is a transitional plant because there are plants in the form of thallus (sheets, namely liverworts), and plants that already have a body structure similar to true stems, roots and leaves (leverbs).
• Talophytes are plants that cannot be distinguished between stems, roots and leaves.
• Moss plants are pioneer vegetation (a pioneer plant or grows before other plants can grow).

Some moss plants that live in rainforest areas can be used as erosion barriers and used to absorb water. Marchantia can also be used as a medicine for liver disease, and spatial ornaments. Some of these plant species, such as Sphagnum, can be used as an eye and skin remedy. Types of Bryophyta (Mosses) include mosses, liverworts, and hornworts.

• Bryopsida (leaf moss): It is a true moss because its body shape resembles a small plant that has true stems, roots and leaves. Live in groups to form thick, velvety beds. Example: Spagnum and Polytricum.
• Hepaticopsida (liverworts): Is a moss with two houses (deoceus). This type of lichen is talus-shaped, lobulated like the shape of a human heart. Moreover, this type of lichen forms a zygote. Asexual reproduction by fragmentation in the formation of spores and gemmacups (buds). Gemmacup is a distinctive structure that exists on a gametophyte which is a cup and contains a collection of small mosses. Gemma can be dispersed and released by water which then grows and forms new moss. In sexual reproduction by means of fertilization between the ovum and sperm. For example: Marchantia polymorpha
• Anthocerotopsida (hornworts): The gametophyte of this moss is similar to that of liverworts, but the location of the sporophyte is different. The hornwort sporophyte has an elongated capsule that grows like a horn from the gametophyte. Example: Anthoceros laevis.

phylum Spermatophyta (seed plants)

The characteristics of Spermatophyta (seed plants) include having 2 subdivisions, namely closed seeds (Angiospermae) and open seeds (Gymnospermae) and having seed or flower organs produced by flowers or strobilus. The benefits of Spermatophyta (seed plants) in everyday life are as a staple food.

Examples include: rice, sago, corn and wheat as well as shade, oxygen source, carbon dioxide absorber and water storage. Examples include: pine, mahogany, teak and Angsana. For building materials and furniture, examples are meranti and teak. The types of Spermatophyta (seed plants) include:

• Closed seed plants (Angiospermae): Angiosperms are plants whose ovaries are inside the ovaries. The characteristics of Angiosperms include wide and flat leaves, leaf bones are finger-shaped, pinnate, parallel or curved. Live as shrubs, trees, shrubs and herbs. Breeding tools are in the form of stamens and pistils. Has true flowers with ornaments in the form of crowns and flower petals, based on the number of seed pieces, angiosperms are divided into two classes, namely monocots or seed plants with one or single pieces and dicots which have two institutional leaves (dicotyldons).
• Open seed plants (Gymnospernae) are plants whose ovaries are not covered or protected by ovaries. The characteristics of gymnospernae include that gymnospernae have separate genitals, where eggs are found in female strobilus and pollen is found in male strobilus., ovaries are arranged in strobilus, strobilus or conifers are conical reproductive organs, stems and roots have cambium, so that it can grow larger, the leaves are stiff, thick and narrow, the leaf bones are not varied, do not have true flowers, the roots are in the form of a mount, usually trees or shrubs do not have herbs. Gymnospernae is divided into 4 classes including:
• Ginkgoinae : Is a native plant originating from mainland China. The tree height can reach 30 meters, and the leaves are fan-shaped and fall easily. The seeds and pollen of these plants were obtained from different individuals. There is only one species of this plant, namely Ginkgo biloba.
• Cycadinae plants are dioecious, which means they have only female strobilus or only male strobili. Example: Cycas rumphii (pilgrim fern).
• Gnetinae: Members of the group of this plant species, namely in the form of shrubs, trees and lianas (climbing plants). The leaves are oval or oval in shape with pinnate leaf veins. Example: Gnetum gnemon (melinjo).
• Coniferinae : This plant has a characteristic that is always green all year round (evergreen). Strobilus conical. Example: Pinus merkusii (pine), Agathis alba (resin), Araucaria sp., Cupressus sp., Sequoia sp., Taxus sp. and Juniperus sp.

KINGDOM PLANTAE BENEFITS

Kingdom Plantae are multicellular eukaryotic organisms that have chlorophyll and a cell wall. There are about 400,000 species in the kingdom Plantae. In the food chain, this kingdom acts as a producer. Kingdom plantae is very useful for human life, starting from ferns which are useful as green manure in rice plants, can be used as vegetable ingredients, can be used as ornamental plants and processed as wound medicine.

Moss plants with Sphagnum species can also be used as skin, liver and eye medicine. Some moss plants that grow in the rain forest also function as a barrier to erosion and absorb water. Here are some other benefits of plantae, including:

• Several types of Kingdom Plantae, such as rattan and teak trees, can be used as building materials, paper, furniture, playing cards, sports equipment and musical instruments.
• Some types of Kingdom Plantae, such as flax, are capable of producing linen fiber. Linen fibers are used in a variety of household textiles (towels, tablecloths, etc.), fittings (curtains, wall coverings and wall hangings) as well as in the manufacture of clothing.
• Most of the nutrition that humans get comes from plants, such as corn, rice, potatoes, wheat and cassava as staple foods or sources of carbohydrates. In addition, there are also vegetables, fruits, spices and nuts as sources of protein, vitamins and other nutrients. Apart from food, kingdom plantae can also be used as a beverage, such as tea, coffee, beer, wine and other alcoholic beverages. Sugarcane is used to make sugar and flavorings such as monosodium. The manufacture of margarine and cooking oil uses ingredients from plantae, such as corn, palm oil, soybeans, olives and sunflowers.
• Several types of plants from kingdom plantae can also be used as ornamental plants, such as orchids, roses, sun, and other plants that are useful for beautifying your environment or your yard. Plants can also be used as a venue for artistic creations such as bonsai plants (Adenium Bonsai, Bougenville Bonsai, Azalea Bonsai, Dutch Tamarind Bonsai, Tamarind Bonsai, Banyan Bonsai, Kimeng Bonsai, to Pine Shrimp Bonsai)
• Plants can also be used as industrial materials, such as soap, rubber, paint, wax, tannins, shampoo, cosmetics, perfume, oil, ink, plastics, and so on.
• Many types of plants from the kingdom plantae can be used as medicinal ingredients, such as herbal medicines, food supplements and pesticides, as well as:
  • Ginkgo biloba extract which is used as a medicine to increase stamina, is able to relieve dizziness, to treat the dangerous disease cancer.
  • Rane nails can be processed into wound healers.
  • The guava tree leaves can be used as a medicine for stomach ache.
  • Marchantia polymorpha can be used as a medicine for inflammation of the liver or treating hepatitis.